calaveras head start building - sccoe

Calaveras Head Start Building

County Office of Education Santa Clara County

PROJECT MANUAL

Construction Documents

IBI Group - Project No. 16273.000

IBI GROUP

160 West Santa Clara Street, Suite 800 San Jose, CA 95113 USA

Tel (408) 924-0811 Fax (408) 924-0844

(C37459)

No. C37459

ST

EPHEN SOWA

C

A

AL IFO

RN

I

F

ST

AT

O

L

E

TICE

NSED ARCHITEC

REN. 8/31/19

APPROVED DIV. OF THE STATE ARCHITECT

APP. INC:REVIEWED FOR

SS FLS ACS

DATE:

01-117574

✔ ✔ ✔

12/06/2018

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Table of Contents - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building

TABLE OF CONTENTS TO PROJECT MANUAL TITLE/SIGNATURE PAGE TABLE OF CONTENTS ADDENDA (to be inserted)

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures Substitution Request Form – For Use During Bidding Substitution Request Form – For Use During Construction Substitution Warranty Form 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 01 42 00 Definitions and References 01 43 00 Quality Assurance 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 56 39 Tree Protection and Trimming 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 70 00 Field Engineering and Execution Requirements 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 Selective Site Demolition DIVISIONS 3 and 4 – Not Used


DIVISION 5 - METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISIONS 6 and 7 – Not Used DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS 08 71 00 Door Hardware DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09 91 00 Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Signage DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 68 16 Playground Surface System DIVISIONS 12 thru 21 – Not Used DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 00 00 Plumbing General 22 10 00 Site Utilities DIVISIONS 23 thru 25 – Not Used DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 General Electrical Requirements 26 05 19 Line Voltage Wire and Cable 26 05 26 Grounding 26 05 33 Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes 26 05 42 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings 26 24 13 Switchboards, 600 Volts and Below 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 28 16 Circuit Breakers


DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 00 00 Structured Cabling 27 41 19 Assistive Listening System DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 00 Fire Alarm/Voice Evacuation System DIVISIONS 29 and 30 – Not Used DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 00 00 Earthwork 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 23 33 Trenching, Backfilling, & Compacting DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 Asphalt Concrete Paving 32 13 13 Site Concrete 32 16 00 Curbs and Gutters 32 17 13 Wheelstops 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 32 17 26 Tactile Warning Surfaces 32 31 13 Chain-Link Fences and Gates 32 80 00 Irrigation 32 90 00 Planting 32 91 00 Landscape Soil Preparation 32 93 00 Landscape Maintenance DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 00 00 Piped Utilities 33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities DIVISIONS 34 thru 49 – Not Used End of Table of Contents

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 11 00- Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Summary of Work

SECTION 01 11 00

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

a. Type of contract.

3. Work under separate contracts.

4. Access to site.

5. Work restrictions.

6. Specification and Drawing formats and conventions.

B. Related Sections include:

1. Section 01 50 00 ”Temporary Facilities and Controls” for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner’s facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Calaveras Head Start Building 1081 Buena Vista Road Hollister, CA 95023

B. Owner: Santa Clara County Office of Education 1290 Ridder Park Drive San Jose, CA 95131-2304 (408) 453-6500

C. Architect: IBI Group 160 West Santa Clara Street, Suite 800 San Jose, CA 95113 (408) 924-0811


1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the construction of one modular Head Start building, with associated sitework and utiltiies, as shown on Contract Documents prepared by IBI Group, dated 4/24/18, which includes the following:

1. Buildings:

a. One 1-story modular building.

2. Sitework, including the following:

a. Underground utilities.

b. Earthwork.

c. Paving.

d. Fencing.

e. Landscaping and irrigation.

B. Refer to Project Manual Table of Contents, Specifications Divisions 2 thru 49 for listing of Work included.

C. Type of Contract: Project will be constructed under a single-prime contract arrangement.

1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner’s separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with Work under this Contract.

1. Separate contracts will be awarded for the following:

a. Fabrication and installation of modular building.

b. Sitework and utilities.

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor’s use of Project site is limited only by Owner’s right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to area indicated on Drawings.

2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking areas, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner’s employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.


a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

C. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment. Confine stockpiling of materials and location of storage areas to areas indicated, or if not indicated, as directed by Architect and Owner.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work to normal business working hours of 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Monday through Friday, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Do not perform work during the following times until written permission from Owner has been obtained:

1. Weekends.

2. Early mornings before 7:00 AM.

3. Evenings after 5:00 PM.

D. Do not perform the following types of work until written agreement as to allowable times has been obtained from Owner:

1. Work involving utility shutdowns.

2. Core drilling or other noisy activity.

E. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than 5 working days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without written permission from Owner.

F. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than 5 working days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Do not proceed with disruptive operations without written permission from Owner.

G. Use of tobacco products including smoking and other controlled substances on the Project site is prohibited.


1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 49-division format CSI’s “MasterFormat” numbering system, 2010 edition.

1. Division 1 General Requirements: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words “shall,” “shall be,” or “shall comply with,” depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

3. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specification Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 11 00

County Office of Educations – 16273.000 Section 01 25 00 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Substitution Procedures

SECTION 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

1. During bidding.

2. After award of contract.


1. Section 01 60 00 ”Product Requirements and Substitutions” for requirements for selection of products for use in Project.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitution for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitution for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

B. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Submittal Format: Submit via email as PDF electronic file.

2. Substitution Request Form: Use forms provided at end of this Section.

a. For substitution requests during bidding, use form entitled “Substitution Request Form – For Use During Bidding Phase.”


b. For substitution requests after award of contract, use form entitled “Substitution Request Form – For Use During Construction Phase.”

3. Supporting Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material, product, fabrication, or installation cannot be provided, if applicable

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.

g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.

i. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES or other model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

j. Contractor’s waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

k. If occurring after award of contract, include the following:

i) Detailed comparison of Contractor’s construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer’s letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

ii) Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

iii) Contractor’s certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

-Attach Substitution Warranty, on Contractor’s letterhead, in format matching sample at end of this Section.


iv) Contractor’s waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce intended results.

4. Architect’s Action:

a. During Bidding: If proposed substitution is accepted, bidders will be notified by Addendum.

i) Use product specified if Architect does not issue approval of use of proposed substitution in Addendum prior to bid date.

b. After Award of Contract: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 5 working days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 10 working days of receipt of request, or 5 working days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

i) Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect’s Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

ii) Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1. Each Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between Contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS DURING BIDDING

A. Submit requests for substitution not later than 15 working days prior to bid date.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider bidder’s request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied.

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.


b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provides.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor’s construction schedule.

e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 working days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor’s request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provides.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor’s construction schedule.

e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.


B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 10 working days after issuance of Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor’s request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner’s additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of testing and inspection, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. Cost of Owner’s additional responsibilities will be deducted from Contract Sum by Change Order.

i) Substitution request will not be considered if necessitated by failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities in a timely manner.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provides.

e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor’s construction schedule.

g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

C. Submittal procedures as specified in Section 01 33 00 ”Submittals Procedures,” do not constitute an acceptable method of requesting substitutions. Architect’s review of such submittals does not constitute approval of substitutions that may be contained therein.

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM FOR USE DURING BIDDING PHASE

PROJECT:


REQUEST NO.: (Office Use)

OWNER:

Office of Education Santa Clara County

DATE:

CONTRACTOR:

Name of Contractor Address City, State Zip Code

ARCHITECT: IBI Group 160 W Santa Clara St, #800 San Jose, CA 95113

PTN: PROJECT NO.:

OPSC / OSHPD NO.: DSA FILE NO.:

APPLICATION NO.:

Company: Work Scope:

Specification Title:

Section No.: Page: Paragraph:

Product Description:

Proposed Substitution:

Manufacturer: Phone No:

Address:

Reason For Substitution: __________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________

Product Differences:______________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________

Similar Installations: ______________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________

Per the requirements of Specification Section 01 25 00, attach detailed point by point comparison, product data, samples, cost information, and pertinent test and evaluation reports.

I certify that the proposed substitution complies with the requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated, and waive rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. CONTRACTOR: ACCEPTED BY: IBI Group By:_________________________ Date:__________ By:_____________________________ Date:___________

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM FOR USE DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

PROJECT:


REQUEST NO.: (Office Use)

OWNER:

Office of Education Santa Clara County

DATE:

CONTRACTOR:

Name of Contractor Address City, State Zip Code

ARCHITECT: IBI Group 160 W. Santa Clara St., #800 San Jose, CA 85113

PTN: PROJECT NO.:

OPSC / OSHPD NO.: DSA FILE NO.:

APPLICATION NO.:

Company: Work Scope:

Specification Title:

Section No.: Page: Paragraph:

Product Description:

Proposed Substitution:

Manufacturer: Phone No:

Address:

Reason For Substitution: __________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________

Product Differences:______________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________

Similar Installations: ______________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________

Savings to Owner: $ Schedule Impact: Days

Per the requirements of Specification Section 01 25 00, attach detailed point by point comparison, product data, samples, cost information, pertinent test and evaluation reports, and documentation indicating coordination of Work and Schedule.

I certify that the proposed substitution complies with the requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated, and waive rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. CONTRACTOR: ACCEPTED BY: IBI Group

By:_________________________ Date:__________ By:_____________________________ Date:___________

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Substitution Warranty Calaveras Head Start Building

SUBSTITUTIONS WARRANTY

In addition to other requirements, Contractor shall warrant in writing that substituted materials shall perform as specified, and assume complete responsibility for same, including responsibility and costs required for modifications to building or other materials or equipment, added tests and inspections, research time of Architect, and any additional coordination with work of other trades. The following is an example of the type of Substitution Warranty which shall be executed by the Contractor, on his own letterhead:

SUBSTITUTION WARRANTY

We propose to provide

(Describe items being proposed for substitution)

for Calaveras Head Start Building

(List project name)

in lieu of, and as an equivalent to:

(Describe specified product)

as indicated on the drawings and described in Section ##### of the Specifications. We agree to assume the cost of any modifications to other portions of the work, including additional tests and inspections, and additional time on the part of Architect/Engineer as necessary to accommodate our material(s) and system(s). We hereby warrant that:

(Provide description)

is the equivalent of

(Specified product)

in every respect and will perform satisfactorily under the conditions and use indicated on the Drawings and described in the Specifications, and will not affect or delay progress schedule unless approved in writing by Architect. Signed: _________________________ Date: ____________ (Manufacturer/Supplier/Other)

Signed: _________________________ Date: ____________ (Subcontractor)

Signed: __________________________ Date: ____________ (Contractor)

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 26 00 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Contract Modification Procedures

SECTION 01 26 00

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 01 25 00 ”Substitution Procedures” for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions.

a. During bidding.

b. After award of contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.4 ARCHITECT’S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION (ASI)

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Architect’s standard form “Architect’s Supplemental Instruction.”

1. If Architect’s Supplemental Instructions involve, in Contactor’s opinion, changes to Contract Sum or Contract Time, submit Proposed Change Order as specified in “Proposed Change Orders (PCO)” Article.

1.5 PROPOSAL REQUEST (PR)

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by the Architect are for purpose of soliciting Proposed Change Order. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.


2. Unless a shorter time period is specified in Proposal Request, within 10 working days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a Proposed Change Order (PCO) in accordance with “Proposed Change Orders (PCO)” Article.

3. Work described in a Proposal Request is not to be commenced until associated Proposed Change Order has been approved in writing with signature of Owner and Architect.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Architect may choose to issue a Construction Change Directive (CCD) when necessary to expedite the Work and avoid or minimize delays. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Work included in a Construction Change Directive is to be performed under the observation of the Project Inspector.

C. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit a Proposed Change Order with supporting documentation including itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract, including paid invoices and daily labor reports signed by the Project Inspector.

1.7 PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER (PCO)

A. Submit Proposed Change Order in response to the following:

1. Proposal Request issued by Architect.

2. Circumstances Justifying Contractor-Initiated Proposal:

a. Architect’s directive which in Contractor’s opinion, involves changes to Contract Sum or Contract Time.

b. Latent or unforeseen conditions which in Contractor’s opinion involve changes to Contract Sum or Contract Time.

3. Construction Change Directive issued by Architect.

B. Format: Submit Proposed Change Order as PDF electronic file via email, unless requested otherwise.

C. Form and content of Proposed Change Order to comply with the following.

1. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

2. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.


3. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the charge.

4. Include an updated Contractor’s Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

5. Use forms acceptable to Architect.

6. If Contractor-Initiated:

a. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

b. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 ”Substitution Procedures” if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

D. Work Described in a Proposed Change Order is not to be commenced until approved in writing with signature of Owner and Architect, with the exception of the following:

1. Proposed Change Orders for work authorized and completed by means of Construction Change Directive.

1.8 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 01 21 00 ”Allowances” for administrative procedures for preparation of Proposed Change Order for adjusting Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of Work covered by allowances.

B. Unit Price Adjustment: See Section 01 22 00 ”Unit Prices” for administrative procedures for preparation of Proposed Change Order for adjusting Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work.

1.9 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner’s approval of a Proposed Change Order, Architect will incorporate the Proposed Change Order, including adjustments to Contract Sum and/or Contract Time into subsequent Change Order.

1. PCO items which involve changes to the structural, accessibility, or life-safety portions of the DSA-approved Contract Documents shall be submitted to and approved by DSA as a Construction Change Document, as required by California Administrative Code, Title 24, Part 1, Section 4-338, prior to commencement of the Work. Architect shall prepare and submit Construction Change Documents to DSA in compliance with DSA Interpretation of Regulation IR A-6.

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 29 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Payment Procedures

SECTION 01 29 00

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Section 01 26 00 “Contract Modification Procedures” for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

2. Section 01 32 00 “Construction Progress Documentation” for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of Contractor’s construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.


1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.

b. Submittals Schedule.

c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 10 working days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.


a. Submittal Format: Submit in the following format:

i) PDF electronic file: Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project Identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.

c. Architect’s project number.

d. Contractor’s name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division.

b. Description of the Work.

c. Name of subcontractor.

d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.

e. Name of supplier.

f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.

g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent:

i) Labor.

ii) Materials.

iii) Equipment.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual Table of Contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of 5 percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under principal subcontracts for the following Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling 5 percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount:

i) Operation and maintenance manuals.

ii) Punchlist activities.

iii) Project record documents.

iv) Demonstration and training activities.


4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.

6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Provide separate line item in the Schedule of Values for maintenance and updating of Project Record Documents as specified in Section 01 78 39 “Project Record Documents.”

8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance.

9. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor’s option.

10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Application for Payment when Change Orders result in a change to the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and Project Inspector and paid by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Each Application for Payment shall include Project Inspector’s acknowledgement and signature indicating the following:

1. Progress of Work is as indicated on Application.

2. Record documents as required in Section 01 78 39 ”Project Record Documents” are fully updated to reflect current progress of Work indicated on Application.

C. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment 5 working days prior to due date for review by and Project Inspector.


D. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor’s Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

G. Transmittal: Submit five signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. Include waivers of lien and similar attachments.

1. Transmit each payment submittal with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

H. Waivers of Mechanic’s Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic’s liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item, after deduction for retainage.

a. Submit Conditional Waiver on each item for amount requested for construction period covered by Application for Payment being submitted.

b. Submit Unconditional Waiver on each item for amount requested for construction period covered by previous Application.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.


4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

I. Updated Contractor’s Construction Schedule, as specified in Section 01 32 00 “Construction Progress Documentation,” must be submitted prior to submittal of each Application for Payment.

J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of Values.

3. Contractor’s Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).

4. Products list (preliminary if not final).

5. Schedule of unit prices.

6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).

7. List of Contractor’s staff assignments.

8. List of Contractor’s principal consultants.

9. Copies of building permits.

10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work.

11. Initial progress report.

12. Report of preconstruction conference.

13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

14. Performance and payment bonds.

15. Data needed to acquire Owner’s insurance.

16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.

K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect’s issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

L. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of all Project closeout requirements.


a. Refer to Section 01 77 00 “Closeout Procedures” for closeout requirements.

b. Refer to Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data” for requirements for submittal of operation and maintenance manuals.

c. Refer to Section 01 78 39 “Project Record Documents” for record document requirements.

d. Refer to Section 01 79 00 “Demonstration and Training” for training of Owner’s personnel in operation of systems.

2. Evidence of completion of all Project Punchlist items.

3. DSA Form DSA-6, Final Verified Report, fully executed and signed by Contractor, indicating 100% completion.

4. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

5. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

6. AIA Document G706 “Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims.”

7. AIA Document G706A, “Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens.”

8. AIA Document G707, “Consent of Surety to Final Payment.”

9. Evidence that claims have been settled.

10. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

11. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.

M. Upon completion of the Work of this contract, Contractor shall file affidavit with Owner, sworn to before a Notary Public, stating that all workers and persons employed, all firms supplying materials, and all subcontractors have been paid in full and that there are no bills outstanding against the project for either labor or materials, except those items, if any, to be set forth in such affidavit, covering disputed claims or items in connection with Notices to Withhold (Mechanics Lien or Stop Notice) which have been filed under the provisions of the statutes of the State of California. At the same time, Contractor shall execute a Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens, with separate release or waiver of lien from each subcontractor and material or equipment supplier.



County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 31 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Project Management and Coordination

SECTION 01 31 00

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative requirements for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures.

2. Supervision.

3. Coordination Drawings.

4. Requests for Information (RFI’s).

5. Project website.

6. Project meetings.


1. Section 01 32 00 “Construction Progress Documentation” for preparing and submitting Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

2. Section 01 70 00 “Field Engineering and Execution Requirements” for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Section 01 77 00 “Closeout Procedures” for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking information required by or clarification of the Contract Documents.


1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:


1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 10 working days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses, telephone numbers, including both office and cellular telephone numbers, and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, telephone numbers, and email addresses of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. The manner in which the Specifications are divided into Divisions and Sections is not intended to indicate division of work between trades nor indicate trade union or jurisdictional agreements.

a. Assign and subcontract construction activities, and employ workers in a manner that will not risk jurisdictional disputes that could result in conflicts, delays, claims, or losses.

2. Coordinate structural, mechanical, and electrical elements prior to installation. All penetrations of structural elements must first receive approval of Architect. Rerouting of ductwork, piping, or conduit caused by failure to coordinate beforehand is the responsibility of the affected subcontractor and will not be considered justification for additional cost.

3. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

4. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

5. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.


C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.

6. Preinstallation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.

8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary facilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner’s property

1.6 SUPERVISION

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

B. Contractor is solely responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for performing Work.

1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable.

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.


c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences.

Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

g. Indicate key plan, north arrow, and sufficient grid lines to provide cross reference to Contract Drawings.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings, where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.

5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts, and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.


b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations.

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations.

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor’s responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor,

C. Sheet Size: At least 11 inches by 17 inches, but no larger than 30 inches by 40 inches.

1. Provide title block on each sheet with locations for signatures from all subcontractors involved. Include statement that each subcontractor has reviewed coordination drawings in detail and coordinated work of their respective trade.

D. Submittal Format: Submit paper copies.

1. Number of Copies: Three.

2. At Contractor’s written request, read-only digital data files will be made available to Contractor.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data as it relates to the Contract Drawings.

b. Contractor shall execute an electronic file release agreement in the form of Agreement form provided by or acceptable to Architect.

1.8 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI’s)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Do not submit an RFI until due diligence has been exercised in attempting to locate needed information in Contract Documents. If information requested is apparent from field observations, is contained in the Contract Documents, or is reasonably inferred by them, Contractor shall be responsible to Owner for all reasonable costs charged by Architect for additional services required to provide such information.

2. RFI’s shall originate with the Contractor. RFI’s submitted by entities other than Contractor, including entities controlled by Contracctor, will be returned with no response.

3. Coordinate and submit RFI’s in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor’s work or work of subcontractors.


B. Content of RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation or clarification, and the following:

1. Project name.

2. Date.

3. Name of Contractor.

4. Name of Architect.

5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

6. RFI topic.

7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

10. Contractor’s suggested resolution. If Contractor’s suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

11. Contractor’s signature.

12. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Format: Use form acceptable to Architect.

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

D. RFI Submittal Procedure: Submit to Architect via email using format as follows:

1. RFI form and attachments in the form of a PDF electronic file.

E. Architect’s Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond with reasonable promptness, within a timeframe not impacting critical path affected by the RFI topic, as verified by the Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

1. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to Contractor’s failure to allow sufficient time for Architect’s RFI review.

2. The following RFI’s will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for approval of Contractor’s mean and methods.

d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.

e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or Contract Sum.

f. Requests for interpretation of Architect’s actions on submittals.

g. Incomplete RFI’s or RFI’s with numerous errors.

3. Architect’s response may include a request for additional information.


4. Architect’s action on RFI’s that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Proposed Change Order (PCO) according to Section 01 26 00 ”Contract Modification Procedures.”

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 5 working days of receipt of the RFI response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFI’s organized by the RFI number. Submit log biweekly or as requested by Architect. Include the following:

1. Project name.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Architect.

4. RFI number including RFI’s that were returned without action or withdrawn.

5. RFI description.

6. Date the RFI was submitted.

7. Date Architect’s response was received.

8. Identification of related Architect’s Supplemental Instruction (ASI), Construction Change Directive (CCD), and Proposal Request (PR), as appropriate.

G. On receipt of Architect’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within 5 working days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner Project Inspector, and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved, unless minutes are indicated to be recorded by others. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 4 working days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Owner or Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, Project Inspector, and Architect, but no later than 10 working days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location.

1. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers, and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the


conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing.

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.

e. Lines of communications.

f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

g. Procedures for RFI’s.

h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

k. Submittal procedures.

l. LEED requirements.

m. Preparation of record documents.

n. Use of the premises.

o. Work restrictions.

p. Working hours.

q. Owner’s occupancy requirements.

r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

s. Procedures for moisture and mold control.

t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.

u. Construction waste management and recycling.

v. Parking availability.

w. Office, work, and storage areas.

x. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

y. First aid.

z. Security.

aa. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes to parties present and parties not present but requiring the information.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.


2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.

b. Options.

c. Related RFI’s.

d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.

f. Deliveries.

g. Submittals.

h. Review of mockups.

i. Possible conflicts.

j. Compatibility problems.

k. Time schedules.

l. Weather limitations.

m. Manufacturer’s written instructions.

n. Warranty requirements.

o. Compatibility of materials.

p. Acceptability of substrates.

q. Temporary facilities and controls.

r. Space and access limitations.

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

t. Testing and inspecting requirements.

u. Installation procedures.

v. Coordination with other work.

w. Required performance results.

x. Protection of adjacent work.

y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties not present but requiring the information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals or as otherwised agreed on by Owner and Architect.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests..


2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Project Inspector, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor’s Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

i) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

i) Interface requirements.

ii) Sequence of operations.

iii) Status of submittals.

iv) Deliveries.

v) Off-site fabrication.

vi) Access.

vii) Site utilization.

viii) Temporary facilities and controls.

ix) Work hours.

x) Hazards and risks.

xi) Progress cleaning.

xii) Quality and work standards.

xiii) Status of correction of deficient work items.

xiv) Field observations.

xv) Status of RFI’s.

xvi) Status of Proposal Requests.

xvii) Pending changes.

xviii) Status of Change Orders.

xix) Pending claims and disputes.

xx) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes to each party present and to parties not present but requiring the information.


a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor’s Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

E. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers, and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents.

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance.

c. Submittal of written warranties.

d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.

e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.

f. Requirements for demonstration and training.

g. Preparation of Contractor’s punchlist.

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment.

i. Submittal procedures.

j. Owner’s partial occupancy requirements.

k. Installation of Owner’s furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

l. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes to each party present and to parties not present but requiring the information.



County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 32 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Construction Progress Documentation

SECTION 01 32 00

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Submittals Schedule.

2. Startup Construction Schedule.

3. Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

4. Construction schedule updating reports.

5. Daily construction reports.

6. Material location reports.

7. Site condition reports.

8. Special reports.


1. Section 01 29 00 ”Payment Procedures” for submitting the Schedule of Values.

2. Section 01 31 00 ”Project Management and Coordination” for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes.

3. Section 01 33 00 ”Submittal Procedures” for submitting schedules and reports.

4. Section 01 41 00 ”Quality Requirements” for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Associated General Contractors of America (AGC):

1. Construction Planning and Scheduling.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.


3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.

H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.

J. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships.

K. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

L. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals via email as PDF electronic files, unless sheet size is larger than 11 inches by 17 inches, in which case, submit four paper copies.


B. Submittals Schedule: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal.

2. Specification Section number and title.

3. Submittal category (action or informational).

4. Name of subcontractor.

5. Description of the Work covered.

6. Scheduled date for Architect’s final release or approval.

C. Startup Construction Schedule:

1. Approval of cost-loaded, Startup Construction Schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities.

D. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.

E. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

F. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.

4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor’s total earnings from commencement of the Work until most recent Application for Payment.

G. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

H. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

I. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

J. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.

1. If Owner waives requirement for scheduling consultant as specified in Part 3, submit qualification data for Contractor’s in-house personnel responsible for preparing construction schedules.


A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 48 hours of Architect’s request.


B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 “Project Management and Coordination.” Review methods and procedures related to the Startup Construction Schedule and Contractor’s Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.

2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.

3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones, and partial Owner occupancy.

4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.

5. Review schedule for work of Owner’s separate contracts.

6. Review submittal requirements and procedures

7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.

8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies.

9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures.

10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.

11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor’s Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary network diagram. Include submittals required during the first 40 working days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor’s Construction Schedule.


2.2 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 15 working days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures,” in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor’s Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.

3. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 10 working days for startup and testing.

4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect’s administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

5. Punchlist and Final Completion: Include not more than 20 working days for completion of punchlist items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.

3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 01 11 00 ”Summary of Work.” Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction.

b. Limitations of continued occupancies.

c. Uninterruptible services.

d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.

e. Use of premises restrictions.

f. Provisions for future construction.

g. Seasonal variations.

h. Environmental control.


5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards.

b. Submittals.

c. Purchases.

d. Mockups.

e. Fabrication.

f. Sample testing.

g. Deliveries.

h. Installation.

i. Tests and inspections.

j. Adjusting.

k. Curing.

l. Building flush-out.

m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

6. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion.

b. Temporary space enclosure and space conditioning.

c. Permanent space enclosure.

d. Completion of mechanical installation.

e. Completion of electrical installation.

f. Substantial Completion.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.

E. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. Refer to Section 01 29 00 ”Payment Procedures,” for cost reporting and payment procedures.

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues.

2. Unanswered Requests for Information (RFI’s).


3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.

4. Notations on returned submittals.

5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is [14] or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.3 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within 5 working days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 calendar days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

2.4 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 10 working days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 working days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor’s Construction Schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 15 working days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.

a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect’s approval of the schedule.

2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key personnel, including subcontractor’s personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.

3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.


4. Use “one workday” as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate non-working days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.

D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals.

b. Mobilization and demobilization.

c. Purchase of materials.

d. Delivery.

e. Fabrication.

f. Utility interruptions.

g. Installation.

h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor’s activities.

i. Testing.

j. Punchlist and final completion.

k. Activities occurring following final completion.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those from interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.

4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.

a. Sub-networks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.

5. Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect’s approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation, and maintenance manuals, punchlist activities, Project record documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Architect.

b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.


E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight “early start-total float.” Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.

2. Description of activity.

3. Main events of activity.

4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.

5. Early and late start dates.

6. Early and late finish dates.

7. Activity duration in workdays.

8. Total float or slack time.

9. Average size of workforce.

10. Dollar value of activity (coordinate with the Schedule of Values).

G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Identification of activities that have changed.

2. Changes in early and late start dates.

3. Changes in early and late finish dates.

4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.

5. Changes in the critical path.

6. Changes in total float or slack time.

7. Changes in the Contract Time.

H. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.

1. In the first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.

2. In the second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.

3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date.

4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings.

a. In both value summary lists, tabulate “actual percent complete” and “cumulative value completed” with total at bottom.

b. Submit value summary printouts 1 week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting, if requested by Architect or Construction Manager.


2.5 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.

3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.

4. Equipment at Project site.

5. Material deliveries.

6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow.

7. Accidents.

8. Meetings and significant decisions.

9. Unusual events (refer to special reports).

10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.

11. Meter readings and similar recordings.

12. Emergency procedures.

13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.

14. Change Orders received and implemented.

15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.

16. Services connected and disconnected.

17. Equipment or system tests and startups.

18. Partial Completions and occupancies.

19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.

2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and instsalled.

3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.


2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within 2 working days of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor’s personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling.

1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications.

2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.

B. Contractor’s Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule 1 week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate actual completion percentage for each activity.

4. Applications for Payment as specified in Section 01 29 00 “Payment Procedures,” will not be processed until Project Inspector and Architect have verified updated schedule has been submitted.

C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Inspector, Owner, separate contractors, subcontractors, suppliers and fabricators, testing and inspection agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.


2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

END OF SECTION 01 32 00

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 33 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Submittal Procedures

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for the Submittal Schedule, and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 01 25 00 ”Substitution Procedures” for submitting substitution requests.

2. Section 01 26 00 ”Contract Modification Procedures” for submitting Proposed Change Orders.

3. Section 01 29 00 ”Payment Procedures” for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values.

4. Section 01 31 00 ”Project Management and Coordination” for submitting Coordination Drawings and RFI’s.

5. Section 01 32 00 ”Construction Progress Documentation” for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor’s Construction Schedule, and Daily Construction Reports.

6. Section 01 41 00 ”Quality Requirements” for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements.

7. Section 01 77 00 ”Closeout Procedures” for submitting warranties.

8. Section 01 78 39 ”Project Record Documents” for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

9. Section 01 78 23 ”Operation and Maintenance Data” for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

10. Section 01 79 00 ”Demonstration and Training” for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner’s personnel.

11. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect’s responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as “Action Submittals.”


B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect’s responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as “Informational Submittals.”

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate Submittal Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with Startup Construction Schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 calendar days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

a. Submit revised Submittal Schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.

c. Submittal Category: Action; informational.

d. Name of subcontractor.

e. Description of the Work covered.

f. Scheduled date for Architect’s final release or approval.

g. Scheduled date of fabrication.

h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.

i. Scheduled dates for installation.

j. Activity or event number.


1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUREMENTS

A. Architect’s Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor’s use in preparing submittals.

1. At Contractor’s written request, read-only digital data files can be made available to Contractor.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data as it relates to the Contract Drawings.

b. Contractor shall execute an electronic file release agreement in the form of Agreement form provided by or acceptable to Architect.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow minimum time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows below. Time for review shall commence on Architect’s receipt of submittal, except submittals received after 1:00 PM will be considered as received the following working day. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. Submittal review times indicated below are minimums. Longer review times may occur within timeframe not impacting critical path affected by submittal being reviewed, as verified by Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in the same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 12 working days for review of each resubmittal.


D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 inches by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor’s review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Construction Manager.

e. Name of Contractor.

f. Name of subcontractor.

g. Name of supplier.

h. Name of manufacturer.

i. Submittal number.

i) Resubmittal number shall use the original submittal number followed by a decimal point and sequential number (e.g. 15.1 indicates the first resubmittal of Submittal No. 15, 15.2 indicates second resubmittal, etc.).

j. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

m. Other necessary information.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review, submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information:

i) Submittal number.

ii) Project name.

iii) Date.

iv) Destination (To:)

v) Source (From:)

vi) Name and address of Architect.

vii) Name of Construction Manager.


viii) Name of Contractor.

ix) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

x) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

xi) Category and type of submittal.

xii) Submittal purpose and description.

xiii) Specification Section number and title.

xiv) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items.

xv) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

xvi) Indication of full or partial submittal.

xvii) Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

xviii) Remarks.

b. Paper submittals without proper transmittal forms will be returned without review.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use an identifier indicating submittal number (e.g. sub01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after a decimal point (e.g. sub01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor’s review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Architect, containing the following information:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Architect.



f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

h. Category and type of submittal.

i. Submittal purpose and description.

j. Specification Section number and title.

k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items.


l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

n. Related physical samples submitted directly.

o. Indication of full or partial submittal.

p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

r. Other necessary identification.

s. Remarks.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor’s letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked “No Exceptions Taken” or “Make Corrections Noted” on Architect’s action stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction; Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals with notation from Architect’s action stamp indicating “No Exceptions Taken” or “Make Corrections Noted.”

1. Make corrections requested by Architect on submittals marked “Make Corrections Noted.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections to Architect, unless indicated otherwise. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Submittals Other Than Samples and Other Than Shop Drawings With Sheet Size Larger Than 11 Inches by 17 Inches: Submit in pdf electronic file format.


a. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. Architect will return annotated file.

Shop Drawing Submittals With Sheet Size Larger Than 11 Inches by 17 Inches: Submit paper copies.

b. Action Submittals: Submit three copies unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one copy.

c. Informational Submittals: Submit two copies unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

2. Sample Submittals: Refer to “Samples” paragraph below for required quantities of Samples.

3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specifically prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer’s product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance with with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable.

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.

c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Format: Submit Product Data in format specified in “General Submittal Procedure Requirements” paragraph above.


C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.

c. Compliance with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer, if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 inches by 42 inches.

3. Format: Submit Shop Drawings in format specified in “General Submittal Procedure Requirements” paragraph above.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner’s property, are the property of Contractor.


5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer’s color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer’s product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units of Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned.

i) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number, if applicable.

3. Number and name of room or space.

4. Location within room or space.

5. Submit Product Schedule in PDF electronic format.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00 “Project Management and Coordination.”

G. Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 00 “Construction Progress Documentation.”

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 29 00 “Payment Procedures.”

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 43 00 “Quality Assurance.”

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 “Closeout Procedures.”


K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data.”

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific project.

O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.

3. Time period when report is in effect.

4. Product and manufacturers’ names.

5. Description of product.

6. Test procedures and results.

7. Limitations of use.


U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

W. Field Quality Control Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file or three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR’S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00 “Closeout Procedures.”


C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor’s approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT’S ACTIONS

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor’s approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect’s review is for general conformance with design concept, only, and does not relieve Contractor in any way from compliance with Contract Documents, nor does it in any way constitute a Change Order. Contractor remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, all quantities and dimensions, and selection of fabrication processes.

C. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:

1. No Exceptions Taken: Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Compliance with Contract Documents will be a condition of acceptance of Work.

2. Make Corrections Noted: Work covered by submittal may proceed, provided it complies with Architect/Engineer’s notations or corrections. Compliance with Contract Documents will be a condition of acceptance of Work.

3. Revise and Resubmit: Do not proceed with Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise submittal in accordance with Architect/Engineer’s notations and resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary.

4. Rejected, See Remarks: Do not proceed with Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise submittal or prepare new submittal in accordance with Architect/Engineer’s notations and resubmit without delay.

5. Remarks Attached: Follow Architect/Engineer’s remarks and instructions attached to submittal. Remarks may be in conjunction with one of the four actions listed above.

D. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

E. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

F. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.


G. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by Architect without action.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 41 00 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Regulatory Requirements

SECTION 01 41 00

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes regulatory requirements.

1.3 GOVERNING REGULATIONS

A. All Work to be in strict conformance with requirements of all applicable codes, ordinances, standards, and other regulations, including the following:

1. California Code of Regulations, Title 24 - Building Standards.

a. 2016 California Building Standards Administrative Code (Title 24, Part 1).

b. 2016 California Building Code (Title 24, Part 2).

c. 2016 California Electrical Code (Title 24, Part 3).

d. 2016 California Mechanical Code (Title 24, Part 4).

e. 2016 California Plumbing Code (Title 24, Part 5).

f. 2016 California Energy Code (Title 24, Part 6).

g. 2016 California Historical Building Code (Title 24, Part 8).

h. 2016 California Fire Code (Title 24, Part 9).

i. 2016 California Existing Building Code (Title 24, Part 10).

j. 2016 California Green Building Standards Code (Title 24, Part 11).

k. 2016 California Referenced Standards Code (Title 24, Part 12).

2. U.S. Department of Justice 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. NFPA 13: Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2016 Edition.

b. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code and Signaling Code, 2016 Edition.

B. Nothing in these Contract Documents shall be construed to permit work not in conformance with applicable codes and regulations. Notify Architect and Project Inspector promptly in writing if there is reason to believe that any portion of Contract Documents is at variance with any applicable codes and regulations.

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 41 00 – Page 2 Calaveras Head Start Building Regulatory Requirements


A. Permits and Licenses: Submit copies of permits, licenses, inspection reports, certifications, and other similar documents pertaining to compliance with applicable standards and regulations.



County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 42 00 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Definitions and References

SECTION 01 42 00

DEFINITIONS AND REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes definitions and reference standards.


1. Section 01 41 00 ”Regulatory Requirements” for applicable codes and other regulatory requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. “Approved”: When used to convey Architect’s action on Contractor’s submittals, applications, and requests, “approved” is limited to Architect’s duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract, and does not relieve the Contractor in any way of responsibility for conformance with contract.

C. “Directed”: A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including “requested,” “authorized,” “selected,” “approved,” “required,” and “permitted” have the same meaning as “directed.”

1. In no way shall any implied meaning be interpreted to extend Architect’s responsibility to construction means and methods or construction site safety.

D. “Indicated”: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including “shown,” “noted,” “scheduled,” and “specified” have the same meaning as “indicated.”

E. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. “Install”: Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.


H. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. “Project Site”: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale’s “Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S.” or in Columbia Books’ “National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States.”

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. DIN – Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V; www.din.de.

2. IAPMO – International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org

3. ICC – International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.

4. ICC-ES – ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CPSC – Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.

2. DOE – Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.

3. EPA – Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.


4. OSHA – Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.

D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CFR – Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.

2. FS – Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24; www.calregs.com.

2. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-iaq.org.

3. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.



County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 43 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Quality Assurance

SECTION 01 43 00

QUALITY ASSURANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor’s other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

C. Related Sections include:

1. Section 01 32 00 ”Construction Progress Documentation” for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections.

2. Section 01 73 29 ”Cutting and Patching” for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.

3. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials):

1. ASTM E 329: Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

1. 29 CFR 1910, Subpart A, Section 1910.7: Definitions and Requirements for a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.


C. NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technology.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.

3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.


1. Using a trade-specific terminology such as “carpentry” in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trades.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, “experienced” means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Shop Drawings: For mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.


A. Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting systems, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.


C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

3. Description of test and inspection.

4. Identification of applicable standards.

5. Identification of test and inspection methods.

6. Number of tests and inspections required.

7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

8. Requirements for obtaining samples.

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified to be performed by Contractor in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.

2. Project title and number.

3. Division of the State Architect project application number.

4. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

5. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

6. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.

7. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

8. Identification of product and Specification Section.

9. Complete test or inspection data.

10. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

11. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.

12. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements.

13. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

14. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative’s Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer’s technical rerpresentative’s tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.

4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.


5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements.

6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative’s Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer’s factory-authorized service representative’s tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.

3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements.

4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner’s records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to product required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual with experience in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Minimum Experience: 5 years or 5 projects, unless indicated otherwise.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.


F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, where approval by said authorities is required.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST’s National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer’s products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer’s products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups, to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.


K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work.

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect 5 working days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

5. Obtain Architect’s approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow 5 working days for initial review and each re-review of each.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup as indicated. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.

M. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 49 .

1.10 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner’s responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Notify Project Inspector and testing agencies, at least 2 working daysin advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor’s responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services


required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor’s responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify Project Inspector and testing agencies, at least 2 working days or as indicated otherwise in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor’s responsibility, submit a certified written report, as two paper copies or in PDF electronic form, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor’s responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report as two hard copies or in PDF electronic form directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing and submit as hard copies or in PDF electronic form as specified in Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures.”

D. Manufacturer’s Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer’s technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer’s technical representative’s services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activites, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting:

1. Where quality-control services are Contractor’s responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaces or is necessitated by Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

2. Where quality-control services are Owner’s responsibility, costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, by way of a deductive Change Order.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Inspector, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Inspector, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.


4. Submit a certified written report, in writing or PDF electronic form, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. Provide timely notice of the Work’s readiness for all required tests and inspections.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor’s construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Inspector, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency/Special Inspector to conduct special tests and inspections as required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, as indicated in DSA Structural Tests and Inspections sheet (DSA Form 103-1) at end of this Section, and in individual Specification Sections. Performance of Special Testing and Inspection will include the following:

1. Verification that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.


2. Notification of Architect, Inspector, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submittal of certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect, Inspector, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submittal of final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpretation of tests and inspections, stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting of corrected work.

1.12 PROJECT INSPECTOR

A. Owner will engage a qualified Inspector acceptable to Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. Primary duty of the Inspector is to inspect the Work for compliance with the Contract Documents.

1. The duties of the Inspector are defined in Title 24, Part 1, Chapter 4.

2. The Inspector will report to the Owner and Architect.

B. Provide free access to all parts of the Work at all times, so as to allow continuous observation by the Inspector. Presence of the Inspector does not relieve the Contractor in any way from requirement to comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Notify Inspector at least 2 working days in advance of time when work that requires inspecting will be performed.

D. Provide reasonable facilities for Inspector’s use in performing inspection duties, as specified in Section 01 50 00 ”Temporary Facilities and Controls.”

E. Inspector will alert Owner, Contractor, and Architect in the event of noncompliance with the Contract Documents.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.

4. Identification of testing agency or Special Inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect’s and Inspector’s reference during normal working hours.


3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 29 ”Cutting and Patching.”

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 50 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Temporary Facilities and Controls

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Section 01 10 00 ”Summary of Work” for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions.

2. Section 01 33 00 ”Submittal Procedures” for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.

3. Section 01 70 00 ”Field Engineering and Execution Requirements” for progress cleaning requirements.

4. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 10: Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

2. NFPA 241: Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.5 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.


C. Water Service: Water from Owner’s existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.


A. Shop Drawing: Project Identification Sign. Show dimensions, graphics, and layout.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, enclosures, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

D. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

E. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.

2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.

3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.

4. Waste handling procedures.

5. Other dust-control measures.



A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner’s acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pavement: Hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes designed according to Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 39 requirements for Type B asphalt concrete

B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch (9 gage), galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8 inch OD top rail. Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.

C. Lumber and Plywood:

1. Lumber: Douglas fir-larch, No. 2.

2. Plywood: ½-inch C-D with exterior glue.

D. Steel Studs and Track: ASTM C 645, 0.0209 (25 gage) thickness.

E. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

F. Paint: Suitable for intended use, as recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.


2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures according to NFPA 10.

B. First Aid Supplies: In compliance with governing regulations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

2. If temporary service is not available, provide mobile or portable solutions, adequate to meet expected demand.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Use of or connection to Owner’s existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

1. Where installation below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use by construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Provide fully stocked supply of toilet tissue, paper towels, and other disposable materials as needed for sanitary facilities.


E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.

2. Connect temporary service to Owner’s existing power source, as directed by Owner.

G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line for each field office.

1. In addition to telephone lines specified above, provide telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and each computer.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments.

b. Ambulance service.

c. Contractor’s home office.

d. Contractor’s emergency after-hours telephone number.

e. Architect’s office.

f. Engineer’s offices.

g. Owner’s office.

h. Principal subcontractors’ field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.


I. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office, adequate for use by Architect, Inspector, and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the following:

1. Processor: Intel Pentium D or Intel CoreDuo, 3.0 GHz processing speed.

2. Memory: 4 gigabyte.

3. Disk Storage: 300 gigabyte hard-disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW drive.

4. Display: 22-inch LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM.

5. Full-size keyboard and mouse.

6. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet.

7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Microsoft Windows Vista Business.

8. Productivity Software:

a. Microsoft Office Professional, XP or higher, including Word, Excel, and Outlook.

b. Adobe Reader 7.0 or higher.

c. WinZip 7.0 or higher.

9. Printer: “All-in-one” unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.

10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardwall firewall, providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.

11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application.

12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 40 gigabyte, with automated backup software providing daily backups.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.


B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated.

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner’s existing parking areas for construction personnel.

E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

F. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Engage an experienced sign company to produce project signs. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

3. Conform with all applicable regulations of local authorities.

G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with requirements of Section 01 70 00 ”Field Engineering and Execution Requirements” for progress cleaning requirements.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 ”Construction Waste Management” for recycling of construction waste.

H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered “tools and equipment” and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.


B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction to comply with environmental regulations and minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 11 00 ”Summary of Work.”

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant-protection zones.

2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.

4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction: Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 56 39 ”Tree Protection and Trimming.”

F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring or rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel.

H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

1. Provide secure lockup for stored materials and equipment which are of value or attractive for theft.


I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.

L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and fire-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

5. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.

6. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.

7. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor’s Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage.

2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.

3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.


4. Remove standing water from decks.

5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonable clean and protected from water damage.

3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.

4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.

5. Do not install material that is wet.

6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.

7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.

2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.

3. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.


B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.

D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project Identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent consruction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 ”Closeout Procedures.”


County Office of Education - 16273.000 Section 01 56 39 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Tree Protection and Trimming

SECTION 01 56 39

TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the protection and trimming of existing trees that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 1 Section for limits placed on Contractor’s use of the site.

2. “Site Clearing” for removal limits of trees, shrubs, and other plantings affected by new construction.

3. “Earthwork” and “Utility Trenching” for building and utility trench excavation, backfilling, compacting and grading requirements, and soil materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to remain during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tree Damage: Any bruising, scarring, tearing, or breaking of roots, branches, or trunk.

C. Drip Line: Outermost limits of tree canopy.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule from arborist detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.

C. Qualification Data: For tree service firm and arborist.

D. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged.

E. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing Work.



A. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed tree protection and trimming work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced qualified arborist to Project site during execution of tree protection and trimming.

B. Arborist Qualifications: An arborist certified by ISA or licensed in the jurisdiction where Project is located.

C. Tree Pruning Standard: Comply with ANSI A300 (Part 1), “Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard Practices (Pruning).”

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section requirements for project management and coordination.

1. Before tree protection and trimming operations begin, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, Architect, consultants, and other concerned entities to review scope of tree protection and trimming procedures and responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fence: Metallic-coated steel chain-link fence fabric of 0.120-inch diameter wire; a minimum of 48-inches high; with 1.9-inch diameter line posts; 2-3/8-inch diameter terminal and corner posts; 1-5/8-inch diameter top rail; and 0.177-inch diameter bottom tension wire; with wire ties, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system.

B. Organic Mulch: Ground or shredded bark, or wood and bark chips, free of deleterious materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Fencing: Install temporary fencing around tree protection zones to protect remaining trees and vegetation from construction damage. Maintain temporary fence and remove when construction is complete.

1. Install chain-link fence according to ASTM F 567 and manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage or noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.


C. Mulch areas inside tree protection zones and within drip line of trees to remain and other areas indicated.

1. Apply 2-inch average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6-inches of tree trunks.

D. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material inside tree protection zones. Do not permit vehicles or foot traffic within tree protection zones; prevent soil compaction over root systems.

E. Maintain tree protection zones free of weeds and trash.

F. Do not allow fires within tree protection zones.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Install shoring or other protective support systems to minimize sloping or benching of excavations.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless absolutely necessary and approved in writing by arborist.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, obtain approval in writing from arborist prior to excavation. Hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spreading forks and comb soil to expose roots.

1. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3-inches back from new construction.

2. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil.

D. Where utility trenches are required within tree protection zones, obtain approval in writing from arborist prior to excavation. Tunnel under or around roots by drilling, auger boring, pipe jacking, or digging by hand.

1. Root Pruning: Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

3.3 TREE PROTECTION

A. Maintain existing trees in a healthy and vigorous condition during course of construction and maintenance period. No construction, demolition, storage, vehicle parking, or work of any other nature is allowed within fenced tree protection zone unless approved in writing by arborist.

1. Approval of work within tree protection zone does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to maintain tree in a healthy condition.


B. Do not use trees as support posts, power poles, signposts, or as anchorage for ropes, guy wires or similar functions.

C. Do not dump poisonous or deleterious materials on ground within tree protection zone.

D. Do not alter surface drainage patterns within dripline of trees.

E. Maintain irrigation of existing trees to remain in accordance with written instructions of arborist throughout construction period

F. Perform periodic inspections of existing trees to remain to verify health of tree. Notify arborist if tree appears to be failing in health.

3.4 TREE PRUNING

A. Prune trees to remain that are affected by temporary and permanent construction.

B. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist.

C. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1).

D. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

E. Chip removed tree branches and spread over areas identified by Architect.

3.5 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist’s written instructions.

B. Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that die or are damaged during construction operations that arborist determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern.

1. Provide new trees of 6-inch caliper size and of a species selected by Architect and Landscape Architect when damaged trees more than 6-inches in caliper size, measured 12-inches above grade, are required to be replaced. Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Division 2 Section requirements for exterior plants.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Burning is not permitted.

B. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material and displaced trees from Owner’s property.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 60 00 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Product Requirements

SECTION 01 60 00

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturer’s standard warranties on products; and special warranties.


1. Section 01 25 00 01630”Substitution Procedures” for requests for substitutions.

2. Section 01 42 00 01420”Definitions and References” for applicable industry standards for products specified.

3. Section 01 77 00 ”Closeout Procedures” for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.

4. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warrantied.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term “product” includes the terms “material,” “equipment,” “system,” and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer’s product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer’s published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimensions, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified intent.



A. Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers and products preceded by the term “Available Manufacturers” or “Available Products,” and an unnamed manufacturer and product is proposed to be incorporated, submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with requirements specified in Part 2 “Comparable Products” Article.

2. Architect’s Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 5 working days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 10 working days of receipt of request, or 5 working days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified for action submittals in Section 01 33 00 ”Submittal Procedures.”

b. Use products specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

3. Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers or products with the term “or equal,” and an unnamed manufacturer and product is proposed to be incorporated, comply with provisions in Section 01 25 00 ”Substitution Procedures.”


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer’s original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.


4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.

5. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

6. Comply with product manufacturer’s written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner’s construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer’s Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. Refer to other Sections in Divisions 2 through 49 for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Warranty Requirements:

1. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.


2. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall extend and be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

3. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. Replace or rebuild defective Work regardless of whether Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

4. Owner’s Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

a. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

b. Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

D. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 ”Closeout Procedures.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term “as selected,” Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term “match sample,” sample to be matched is Architect’s.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.


7. Equal Products: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term “or equal,” comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 ”Substitution Procedures.” Standard submittals procedure is not an acceptable means of obtaining approval of proposed product substitutions.

B. Product Selection Procedures: For each of the following methods of product selection used in other Division 2 through 49 Sections, conform with requirements as indicated.

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor’s convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor’s convenience will not be considered.

3. Products and Equal Products : Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products followed by the statement or item “Equal product,” provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements, or comply with provisions in Section 01 25 00 ”Substitution Procedures” for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers and Manufacturers of Equal Products: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturer’s names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements, or comply with provisions in Section 01 25 00 ”Substitution Procedures” for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, preceded by the statement, “products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following,” provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 “Comparable Products” Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, preceded by the statement, “manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following,” provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 “Comparable Products” Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require “match Architect’s sample,” provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect’s sample. Architect’s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 ”Substitution Procedures” for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase “as selected from manufacturer’s colors, patterns, textures” or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.


1. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase “as selected from manufacturer’s standard range” or similar phrase, Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer’s product line that does not include premium items.

2. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase “as selected from full range of colors, patterns, textures” or similar phrase, Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer’s product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor’s request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 70 00 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Field Engineering and Execution Requirements

SECTION 01 70 00

FIELD ENGINEERING AND EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering and surveying.

3. Installation of the Work.

4. Coordination of Owner-installed products.

5. Progress cleaning.

6. Starting and adjusting.

7. Protection of installed construction.

8. Correction of the Work.


1. Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Work” for limits on use of Project site.

2. Section 01 31 00 ”Project Management and Coordination” for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

3. Section 01 33 00 ”Submittal Procedures” for submitting surveys.

4. Section 01 73 29 ”Cutting and Patching” for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.

5. Section 01 77 00 ”Closeout Procedures” for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 241: Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.

1.4 DEFINITIONS




A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

D. Certified Surveys: Work performed and record survey data, signed by land surveyor. Submit in both of the following formats:

1. PDF electronic file.

2. Paper Copies: Two copies.

E. Final Property Survey: Show Work performed and record survey data. Submit in both of the following formats:

1. PDF electronic file.

2. Paper Copies: Five copies.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Manufacturer’s Installation Instruction: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer’s written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.


PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator


present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work.

2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.

3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.

4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a Request For Information to Architect in accordance with Section 01 31 00 “Project Management and Coordination.” Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for modifications, if needed.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.


B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project sit.

3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.

6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.

7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points, without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.


1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements, and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official “property survey.”

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (8’-0”) in occupied spaces, and 90 inches (7’-6”) in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.


F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner’s property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

1. Dust Control: Palliate dust conditions throughout duration of Project for entire area of work and surrounding site by watering and sprinkling as required to allay dust.


C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 ”Temporary Facilities and Controls.”

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 ”Construction Waste Management” for recycling of construction waste.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Section 01 91 13 ”General Commissioning Requirements.”

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.


E. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 43 00 “Quality Requirements.”

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 73 29 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Cutting and Patching

SECTION 01 73 29

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


1. Section 02 41 19 ”Selective Demolition” for demolition of selected portions of the building.

2. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other Work.


A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 15 working days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building’s appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work,.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.

5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time services and systems will be disrupted.


a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Architect’s Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. Structural elements include but are not limited to:

1. Foundation construction.

2. Bearing and retaining walls.

3. Structural concrete.

4. Structural steel.

5. Wood framing.

6. Stair systems.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment.

2. Fire separation assemblies.

3. Air or smoke barriers.

4. Fire-suppression systems.

5. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.

6. Control systems.

7. Communication systems.

8. Fire-detection and alarm systems.

9. Conveying systems.

10. Electrical wiring systems.

11. Operating systems of special construction.

C. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased


maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

2. Membranes and flashings.

3. Exterior curtainwall construction.

4. Sprayed fire-resistive material.

5. Equipment supports.

6. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.

7. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

D. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Comply with requirements for sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, using products for patching that comply with requirements in Section 01 81 13 ”Sustainable Design Requirements.”

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining aras or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 01 11 00 “Summary of Work.”

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer’s written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.


4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, ductwork, and similar features before paint or other finishes are applied.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 74 19 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Construction Waste Management and Disposal

SECTION 01 74 19

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.


1. Section 02 41 19 ”Selective Site Demolition” for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. ASTM E 1609: Standard Guide for Development and Implementation of a Pollution Prevention Plan.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency.

E. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

F. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.


G. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

H. USGBC: United States Green Building Council.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following:

1. Demolition Waste:

a. Asphaltic concrete paving.

b. Concrete.

c. Concrete reinforcing steel.

d. Brick.

e. Concrete masonry units.

f. Wood studs.

g. Wood joists.

h. Plywood and oriented strand board.

i. Wood paneling.

j. Wood trim.

k. Structural and miscellaneous steel.

l. Rough hardware.

m. Roofing.

n. Insulation.

o. Doors and frames.

p. Door hardware.

q. Windows.

r. Glazing.

s. Metal studs.

t. Gypsum board.

u. Acoustical tile and panels.

v. Carpet.

w. Carpet pad.

x. Demountable partitions.

y. Equipment.

z. Cabinets.

aa. Plumbing fixtures.

bb. Piping.


cc. Supports and hangers.

dd. Valves.

ee. Sprinklers.

ff. Mechanical equipment.

gg. Refrigerants.

hh. Electrical conduit.

ii. Copper wiring.

jj. Lighting fixtures.

kk. Lamps.

ll. Ballasts.

mm. Electrical devices.

nn. Switchgear and panelboards.

oo. Transformers.

2. Construction Waste:

a. Site-clearing waste.

b. Brick and concrete masonry.

c. Lumber.

d. Wood sheet materials.

e. Wood trim.

f. Metals.

g. Roofing.

h. Insulation.

i. Carpet and pad.

j. Gypsum board.

k. Piping.

l. Electrical conduit.

m. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:

i) Paper.

ii) Cardboard.

iii) Boxes.

iv) Plastic sheet and film.

v) Polystyrene packaging.

vi) Wood crates.

vii) Plastic pails.



A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 10 working days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.


A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Use form acceptable to Architect. Include the following information:

1. Material category.

2. Generation point of waste.

3. Total quantity of waste in tons.

4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.

5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.

6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.

7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.

B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator.

H. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements, that employs a LEED Accredited Professional, certified by USGBC, as waste


management coordinator. Waste management coordinator may also serve as LEED coordinator.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination” for project management and coordination. Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator.

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.

3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.

4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.

5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.9 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements of this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste, Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing, and construction waste generated by the Work. Use forms acceptable to Architect. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use forms acceptable to Architect. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.


5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be performed.

D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Use forms acceptable to Architect. Include the following:

1. Total quantity of waste.

2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of collection containers for each type of waste.

3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management).

4. Revenue from salvaged materials.

5. Revenue from recycled materials.

6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.

7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.

8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of waste.

9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements om Section 01 50 00 ”Temporary Facilities and Controls.”

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within 5 working days of submittal return.


2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Section 01 50 00 01500”Temporary Facilities and Controls” for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.

3. Store items in a secure area until installation.

4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated.

B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

C. Salvaged items for Owner’s Use: Salvage items for Owner’s use and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner’s storage area as directed by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors.

E. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather.

F. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.

G. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.

H. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.


3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information, only; available recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Environmental Management Systems 954 Ames Avenue

Milpitas, CA 95035 (408) 501-4200

2. Guadalupe Rubbish Disposal Company 15999 Guadalupe Mines Road San Jose, CA 95120 (408) 268-1670

3. Newby Island Landfill 1601 Dixon Landing Road Milpitas, CA 95035 (408) 262-1401

4. Zanker Materials Processing Facility 675 Los Esteros Road San Jose, CA 95134 (408) 263-2384

C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.

5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner’s property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.


3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Grind asphalt to a maximum size allowed by recycling facility.

B. Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.

C. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize concrete to maximum size allowed by recycling facility.

D. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize masonry to maximum size allowed by recycling facility.

2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.

E. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

F. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.

2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

G. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts. Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories.

H. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.

I. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

J. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.

K. Carpet: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips.

1. Store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.

L. Carpet Tile: Remove debris, trash, and adhesive.

1. Stack tile on pallet and store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.

M. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.


N. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.

3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on-site.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 32 requirements for exterior planting for use of chipped organic waste as organic mulch.

C. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.

2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner’s property and legally dispose of them.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 77 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Closeout Procedures

SECTION 01 77 00

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.

3. Warranties.

4. Final cleaning.

5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 01 29 00 ”Payment Procedures” for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.

2. Section 01 70 00 ”Field Engineering and Execution Requirements” for progress cleaning of Project site.

3. Section 01 78 39 ”Project Record Documents” for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

4. Section 01 78 23 ”Operation and Maintenance Data” for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

5. Section 01 79 00 ”Demonstration and Training” for requirements for instructing Owner’s personnel.

6. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor’s List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.


C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor’s List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor’s punchlist), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 working days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 1 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record documentation.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer’s name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect’s signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

6. Submit sustainable design submittals required in Section 01 81 13 ”Sustainable Design Requirements,” and in individual Sections.

7. Submit Certificate of Construction Phase Commissioning Completion as specified in Section 01 91 13 ”General Commissioning Requirements.”


8. Submit changeover information related to Owner’s occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 working days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner’s personnel of changeover in security provisions.

3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.

4. Perform preventative maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.

5. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 01 79 00 ”Demonstration and Training.”

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders.

8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

9. Compete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 working days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor’s list or additional items identified by Architect (punchlist), that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

a. Architect will not perform reinspection until assurance can be provided that incomplete items have been completed.

i) Compensation for Architect’s time in performing more than one reinspection will be deducted from Contract Sum by Change Order.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.


1.8 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 ”Payment Procedures.”

a. Include all outstanding Change Orders, if applicable.

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit a certified copy of Architect’s Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punchlist), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

5. Submit DSA Form DSA-6, Final Verified Report, fully executed and signed by Contractor, indicating 100% completion.

6. Submit testing and inspection reports for those tests and inspections designated as responsibility of Contractor.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 working days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

a. Architect will not perform reinspection until assurance can be provided that incomplete items have been completed.

i) Compensation for Architect’s time in performing more than one reinspection will be deducted from Contract Sum by Change Order.

1.9 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first, and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.

b. Date.



d. Name of Contractor.

e. Page number.

4. Submit a list of incomplete items in PDF electronic format.

1.10 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner’s rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch size paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title “WARRANTIES,” Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.


B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project.

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, or rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer’s recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.

n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

o. Replace disposable air filters, and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.


q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

r. Clean food service equipment to a condition of sanitation ready and acceptable for intended food service use.

s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator in compliance with requirements of Section 01 50 00 ”Temporary Facilities and Controls,” to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Remove waste materials for Project site and dispose of lawfully.

E. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19 ”Construction Waste Management and Disposal.”

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over “UL” or other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out lamps/bulbs, lamps/bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 78 23 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Operation and Maintenance Data

SECTION 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Product maintenance manuals.

5. Systems and equipment manuals.


1. Section 01 33 00 ”Submittal Procedures” for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work of those Sections.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):

1. ASHRAE Guideline 4: Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems.

1.4 DEFINITIONS


B. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

C. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.



A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in one of the following formats:

1. PDF electronic file: Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Paper Copies: Submit two copies unless otherwise indicated.

a. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 15 working days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form with corrections and revisions addressing Architect’s comments prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 10 working days before commencing demonstration and training.

E. Submit Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location jto facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:


1. List of documents.

2. List of systems.

3. List of equipment.

4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, “Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems.”

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.

2. Table of contents.

3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name and contact information for Contractor.

6. Name and contact information for Architect.

7. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.

8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals.

9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.


C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch white bond paper.


5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.

2. Emergency instructions.

3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.

2. Flood.

3. Gas leak.

4. Water leak.

5. Power failure.

6. Water outage.

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.

8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner’s operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

5. Special operating instructions and procedures.


2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards.

4. Operating procedures.

5. Operating logs.

6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Control diagrams.

8. Piped system diagrams.

9. Precautions against improper use.

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer’s name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

3. Routine and normal operating instructions.

4. Regulation and control procedures.

5. Instructions on stopping.

6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.


E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer’s name.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer’s written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Material and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers’ maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.


B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawings or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturer’s Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturer’s maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures.

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturer’s forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturer’s maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner’s operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner’s operating personnel.

E. Manufacturer’s Data: Where manuals contain manufacturer’s standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturer’s standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers’ printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78 39 ”Project Record Documents.”

G. Comply with Section 01 77 00 ”Closeout Procedures” for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 78 39 – Page 2 Calaveras Head Start Building Project Record Documents

B. Record Specifications: Comply with the following:

1. Submit one paper copy of marked-up record Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

2. Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record specifications.

C. Record Product Data: Comply with the following:

1. Submit one paper copy of marked-up record Product Data, including addenda and contract modifications.

2. Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record Product Data.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities.

1. Submit one paper copy with scanned PDF electronic file.

2. Submit PDF electronic files of scanned miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

c. Depths of foundations below first floor.

d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.

i) Indicate sizes and invert elevations of piping below grade or floor line

ii) Indicate sizes of conduit below grade or floor line.


SECTION 01 78 39

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.

2. Record Specifications.

3. Record Product Data.

4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 01 70 00 ”Field Engineering and Execution Requirements” for final property survey.

2. Section 01 77 00 ”Closeout Procedures” for general closeout procedures.

3. Section 01 78 23 ”Operation and Maintenance Data” for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

4. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Submit one paper copy set of marked-up record Drawing prints, including addenda and contract modifications.

a. Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

2. Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record Drawing prints.


iii) Indicate exact locations and sizes of plugged wyes, tees, caps, and manholes.

iv) Indicate locations of valves, pull boxes, and pull boxes.

e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.

f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

g. Actual equipment locations.

h. Duct size and routing.

i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.

j. Changes made by Architect’s Supplemental Instruction, Change Order, Construction Change Directive, Request for Information, or other written directive from Architect. Note corresponding reference numbers for each item.

k. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.

l. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

m. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Indicate location and layout of items by measured dimension to building corners or other permanent features.

4. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

5. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

7. Identification and Dating: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWING” in a prominent location.

a. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

b. Identification: As follows:

i) Project name.

ii) Date.

iii) Designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS.”

iv) Name of Architect.

v) Name of Contractor.

8. Format: Submit record Drawings in both paper format and scanned PDF electronic format, as specified in Part 1 “Closeout Submittals” Article.


2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Project Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Indicate changes made by Architect’s Supplemental Instruction, Change Order, Construction Change Directive, Request for Information, or other written directive from Architect. Note corresponding reference numbers for each item

6. Format: Submit record Specifications in both paper format and scanned PDF electronic format, as specified in Part 1 “Closeout Submittals” Article.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer’s written instructions for installation.

3. Indicate changes made by Architect’s Supplemental Instruction, Change Order, Construction Change Directive, Request for Information, or other written directive from Architect. Note corresponding reference numbers for each item

B. Format: Submit record Product Data in both paper format and scanned PDF electronic format, as specified in Part 1 “Closeout Submittals” Article.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals in both paper format and scanned PDF electronic format, as specified in Part 1 “Closeout Submittals” Article.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect’s reference during normal working hours.

1. Record documents are to be maintained continuously in a state of completion reflecting current progress of completed Work at all times. Applications for Payment as specified in Section 01 29 00 “Payment Procedures,” will not be processed until Architect and Project Inspector have verified record documents are fully updated.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 01 79 00 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Demonstration and Training

SECTION 01 79 00

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner’s personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


1. Section 01 31 00 “Project Management and Coordination” for requirements for preinstruction conferences.

2. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors’ names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor/facilitator.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit one copy within 5 working days of end of each training module.


1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name and address of videographer.




f. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner’s use, prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals.

a. In addition to bound paper copy, prepare scanned PDF electronic file on compact disc.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 01 43 00 ”Quality Assurance,” experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 ”Project Management and Coordination.” Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.

2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructor’s personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.

3. Review required content of instruction.

4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner’s operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner’s operations and to ensure availability of Owner’s personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, including the following.

1. Equipment, including stage equipment, projection screens, loading dock equipment, waste compactors, food-service equipment, residential appliances, and laboratory fume hoods.

2. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm, fire pumps, and fire-extinguishing systems.

3. Intrusion detection systems.

4. Access-control systems.

5. Heat generation, including boilers, pumps, steam distribution piping, and water distribution piping.

6. Refrigeration systems, including chillers, cooling towers, condensers, pumps, and distribution piping.

7. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems, and terminal equipment and devices.

8. HVAC instrumentation and controls.

9. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards, panelboards, uninterruptible power supplies, and motor controls.

10. Lighting equipment and controls.

11. Communication systems, including intercommunication, surveillance, clocks and programming, voice and data, and audiovisual equipment.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following, as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.


b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

c. Operating standards.

d. Regulatory requirements.

e. Equipment function.

f. Operating characteristics.

g. Limiting conditions.

h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.

b. Operations manuals.

c. Maintenance manuals.

d. Project Record Documents.

e. Identification systems.

f. Warranties and bonds.

g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

c. Routine and normal operating instructions.

d. Regulation and control procedures.

e. Control sequences.

f. Safety procedures.

g. Instructions on stopping.

h. Normal shutdown instructions.

i. Operating procedures for emergencies.

j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

m. Special operating instructions and procedures.


5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.

b. Checking adjustments.

c. Noise and vibration adjustments.

d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.

b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Procedures for routine cleaning.

e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.

f. Procedures for routine maintenance.

g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.

b. Repair instructions.

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.

e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 01 78 23 ”Operation and Maintenance Data.”

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner’s personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.


a. Owner’s participants will describe Owner’s operational philosophy.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 10 working days advance notice

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant’s mastery of module by use of a demonstration or oral performance-based test.

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to Owner, on electronic media.

1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, woth commercial-grade graphic label.

2. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer.

b. Business address.

c. Business phone number.

d. Point of contact.

e. Email address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment.


b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual table of contents.

c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by microphone while video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed.

F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from video recording opposite the corresponding narration segment.

G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 02 41 19 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Selective Demolition

SECTION 02 41 19

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected existing site elements.


1. Division 1 Section for temporary construction, protection facilities, and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.

2. Division 1 Section for temporary protection of existing trees and plants that are affected by selective demolition.

3. Division 1 Section for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE):

1. ANSI/ASSE A10.6: Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations.

B. Cal/OSHA Standards - California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Chapter 4, Division of Industrial Safety.

C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

1. 40 CFR, Part 82: Protection of Stratospheric Ozone.

D. EPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency.

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 51B: Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work.

2. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.

F. Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI):

1. Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings.


1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are to be undisturbed and left in place.

E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.5 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner’s on-site operations.

1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review and finalize building demolition schedule and verify availability of demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

4. Review and finalize protection requirements for areas of existing construction to remain.

5. Review procedures for noise control and dust control.

6. Review procedures for protection of adjacent buildings.

7. Review items to be salvaged and returned to Owner.



A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control, and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Coordinate to avoid interruptions to Owner’s on-site operations.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Shutoff and capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Locations of temporary protection of means of egress, including for other tenants affected by selective demolition operations, if applicable.

5. Coordination of Owner’s continuing occupancy of portions of existing buildings and of Owner’s partial occupancy of completed Work.

C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit prior to beginning Work.

D. Record drawings of removed, relocated, or abandoned utilities in accordance Division 1 Section for project closeout requirements.

1. Locate and dimension work with reference to permanent landmarks. Indicate materials and sizes of all components.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. Minor variations may occur as a result of Owner’s salvaging operations prior to start of selective demolition work.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

C. It is not expected that hazardious materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

D. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities serving building and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations, unless indicated otherwise.

1. Do not interrupt fire-protection service during selective demolition operations.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are the same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during building demolition operations. If required, engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record by use of preconstruction photographs or video, existing conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations.

1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B. Existing Utilities to be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.


3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.

4. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

5. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

5. Protect site improvements and landscaping to remain.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide and maintain shoring, bracing, or structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.


C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Do not damage portions of existing construction indicated to remain. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. If using cutting torches, comply with applicable requirements of Cal/OSHA Standards (California Code of Regulations, Title 8), Chapter 4 - Division of Industrial Safety, Subchapter 7 – General Industry Safety Orders, Article 88 Fire Prevention in Welding and Cutting Operations, and NFPA 51B.

a. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

b. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 1 hour after flame-cutting operations.

c. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torch

5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.

6. Equipment: Disconnect equipment indicated to be removed at nearest fitting connection to services, complete with service valves. Remove as whole units, complete with controls.

7. Remove debris from elevated portions by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

a. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

9. Concrete and Asphalt Paving: Cleanly saw-cut in straight lines, perimeter of area to be removed, then break up and remove portion indicated.

a. At utility trenches occurring in existing paved areas to remain, remove portion occurring over width of trench.

b. At concrete paving, use existing joints to define area of removal, unless indicated otherwise.


10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section for construction waste management and disposal.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove.

D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI’s “Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings.”

E. Structural Steel: Dismantle field connections without bending or damaging steel members.

3.6 REPAIRS

A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations.

B. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.

C. Restore landscaping plants to condition matching existing appearance prior to start of selective demolition work.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner’s property, remove from Project site, and legally dispose of, all demolished materials. Comply with all applicable regulations for salvaging and recycling of demolition waste materials. Materials to be disposed of in landfill, are to be disposed of in EPA-approved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to Division 1 Section for construction waste management for additional requirements for salvaging and recycling demolition waste materials.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Do not burn demolished materials.


3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 05 50 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Metal Fabrications

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal handrails.


1. Section 09 91 00 “Painting” for field painting of metal fabrications.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code - Steel.”



A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicated measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation of railings so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 STEEL AND IRON

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum and stainless steel. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts, Threaded Rods, and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts and threaded rods, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.


C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated galvanized.

D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.

G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.

H. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four(4) times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153.

I. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity calculated according to ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria indicated, and ACI 318 greater than or equal to design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency, and according to evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on applicable substrate type.

1. At Concrete: One of the following:

a. Torque-Controlled Expansion Anchors: Working capacity calculated according to ICC-ES AC01.

i) Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a) Hilti, Inc.; Kwik-Bolt TZ (KB-TZ), sizes as indicated on Drawings.

-Product Report: ICC-ES Evaluation Report #ESR-3785.

b) Simpson Strong-Tie Company; Strong-Bolt 2, sizes as indicated on Drawings.


c) Equal product in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.

ii) Expansion Anchor Material: As indicated in referenced Product Report, and as follows:

a) Exterior: Stainless-steel, Alloy Group 1 (Type 304), ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.

b) Interior: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn5, unless otherwise indicated.


b. Adhesive Anchors: Working capacity calculated according to ICC-ES AC308.

i) Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a) Hilti, Inc.; HY 200, with HAS anchor rod, sizes as indicated on Drawings.


b) Simpson Strong-Tie Company; ET-HP, with anchor rod sizes as indicated on Drawings.


c) Equal product in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.

ii) Anchor Rod and Nut Material: As indicated in referenced Product Report, and as follows:

a) Exterior: Stainless-steel, Alloy Group 1 (Type 304), ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.

b) Interior: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn5, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79.

1. Provide product that complies with local regulatory limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer, if zinc-rich primer occurs on project.

C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Available Products:

a. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.

1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously and cope components at connections to provide close fit. Comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.


I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

2.6 FABRICATION, RAILINGS

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Form changes in direction as follows:

1. By radius bends of radius indicated.

D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

E. Close exposed ends of railing members with welded cap plate. Grind edges flush with profile of railing member.

F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns.

1. Locate wall bracket for handrail at 6 inches from end of handrail return, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

H. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.


B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams or channels of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.

D. Galvanize items occurring at exterior locations.

2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Finish steel and iron items as follows:

1. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication, all items occurring at exterior locations.

a. Steel pipe and tube downspouts to receive galvanized coating on both inner and outer surfaces.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated.

1. Comply with applicable standard listed below:

a. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.

b. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.


C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

G. Install manufactured items in accordance with written instructions of manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION, RAILINGS

A. Unless indicated otherwise, use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 “Fabrication” Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

B. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads.

C. Set posts plumb in each direction within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.

D. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

E. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

F. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post.

G. Anchoring of posts into concrete: As indicated and as follows:

1. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than outside diameter of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer’s written instructions.


2. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 08 71 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Door Hardware

SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exit device hardware (panic hardware) for exterior metal gates.


1. Section 32 31 13 “Chain-Link Fences and Gates” for chain-link gates to receive exit device hardware.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA):

1. BHMA A156.3: Exit Devices.

2. BHMA A156.5: Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products.

3. BHMA A156.18: Materials and Finishes.

B. United States Department of Justice:

1. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Samples for Verification: Submit minimum 2-inch by 4-inch plate Samples of each type of finish required, except primed finish.


C. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Submittal Sequence: Submit final door hardware sets at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets.

2. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI Handbook “Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule.” Double space entries, and number and date each page. Use same door numbers as in Contract Documents.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.

b. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.

c. Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item.

d. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware product.

e. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.

i) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter; unauthorized person wants to exit.

f. Fastenings and other pertinent information.

g. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

h. Mounting locations for door hardware.

i. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.

D. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of Installer, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with Contract Documents.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.



A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule.


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project’s vicinity.

2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer’s standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. Installer’s personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.


1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use.

2. Warranty Periods:

a. Exit Devices: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Means of Egress Doors: Comply with California Building Code. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch.

B. Accessibility Requirements:

1. Comply with applicable provisions of the following:

a. California Building Code (Title 24, Part 2), Chapters 11A and 11B.

b. United States Department of Justice’s 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.

2. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

2.2 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 “Door Hardware Sets” Article.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturer’s products.


B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 “Door Hardware Sets” Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturer’s Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required. Manufacturer’s names are abbreviated in Part 3 “Door Hardware Sets” Article.

2.3 EXIT DEVICES

A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.

B. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

C. Outside Trim: As scheduled in Part 3 “Door Hardware Sets” Article.

2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

B. Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:

1. Number of Pins: Six.

2. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.

C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer’s standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following:

1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturer’s cylinders.

D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following:

1. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.

a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.

E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.

2.5 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.

1. Comply with all keying requirements of Owner.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the notation “DO NOT DUPLICATE.”


2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following (as applicable):

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer’s Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer’s name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer’s identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer’s standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:

a. Surface-mounted exit devices.

3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: for through bolting.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware sets.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before stripping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine gates and jamb framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Operating Hardware: Between 34 inches and 44 inches above finish floor, per 2016 California Building Code Section 11B-404.2.7.

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying schedule.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 1 Section for demonstration and training.


3.5 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. Items listed in the following Schedule of Door Hardware Sets conform to requirements specified in Part 2 of this Section.

B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:

SCH Schlage VON Von Duprin

C. Hardware Sets:

HW Set 01 Gates G-1, G-3 Qty. Item Product Mfr. Finish 4 Self-closing hinges Refer to Drawings 1 Panic hardware CD-PA-AX-99-DT-WH VON 626 1 Panic hardware CD-PA-AX-99-NL-WH VON 626 2 Mortise cylinder 20-001 114 XQ11-949 SCH 626 1 Rim cylinder 20-022 SCH 262 (Balance of hardware by gate manufacturer)

HW Set 02 Gate G-2 Qty. Item Product Mfr. Finish 2 Self-closing hinges Refer to Drawings 1 Panic hardware CD-PA-AX-99-NL-WH VON 626 2 Mortise cylinder 20-001 114 XQ11-949 SCH 626 1 Rim cylinder 20-022 SCH 262 (Balance of hardware by gate manufacturer)


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 09 91 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Painting

SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the field application of paint systems as specified in Paint Systems Schedules at the end of this Section.


1. Section 05 50 00 ”Metal Fabrications” for shop priming of metal fabrication items.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D 523: Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

B. California Air Resources Board:

1. Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings.

C. California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen) – California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 11.

D. Master Painters Institute (MPI):

1. MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual.

2. MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual.

E. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):

1. SSPC-PA 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel.

2. SSPC-SP 2: Hand Tool Cleaning.

3. SSPC-SP 3: Power Tool Cleaning.

F. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD):

1. Rule 1168 – Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. VOC: Volatile Organic Compounds.


B. Gloss Levels: As follows, according to ASTM D 523:

1. Flat: Gloss Level 1 (not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees).

2. Low-Sheen: Gloss Level 3 (10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees).

3. Semi-Gloss: Gloss Level 5 (35 to 70 units at 60 degrees).

4. Gloss: Gloss Level 6 (70 to 85 units at 60 degrees), unless indicated otherwise.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Review other Sections of these Specifications in which prime paints are to be provided. Where requested by those trades performing Work in other Sections, provide information regarding paint products specified in this Section to ensure compatibility of overall painting system.

1. Surface preparation, priming, and coats of paint specified in this Section are in addition to surface preparation and shop priming specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

2. Where prime paints specified in other Sections of these Specifications are incompatible with prime or topcoats specified in this Section, provide barrier coats, or remove and reprime as required.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Indicate preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and sheen of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.

D. CALGreen Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s product data for paints and coatings indicating compliance with product requirements specified in “CALGreen Requirements” Article.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials from the same product run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq ft.

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer’s labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F or as otherwise recommended in paint manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F or as otherwise stated in paint manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by manufacturers as indicated in Paint Systems Schedules at end of this Section.

1. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer’s best quality (e.g. “Premium” quality) paint products for each paint system indicated.

2. Source Limitations: Unless indicated otherwise, provide primer and topcoat products as manufactured by a single manufacturer for each paint system as specified for a given substrate and sheen.

2.2 CALGREEN REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Conform with all applicable requirements of the California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen).

B. Paints and Coatings: Provide paints and coatings that comply with VOC limits in Table 1 of the California Air Resources Board (ARB) Architectural Coatings Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings, unless more stringent local limits apply.

2.3 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As indicated at end of this Section.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION - GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual” applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are removable and not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Unprimed Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 3.

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as is used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

F. Galvanized Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual.”

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.


2. Apply materials at not less than manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

3. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where if feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of a subsequent coat does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.

4. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to ensure a topcoat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

B. Paint all exposed surfaces, regardless of whether designated in Color Schedule. The term “exposed surface” includes area visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain visual continuity and protection.

C. Do not paint the following prefinished items unless indicated otherwise:

1. Exterior Prefinished Items: Do not paint prefinished exterior items.

D. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

E. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that all surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

F. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer’s written recommendation, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer’s written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.


B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULE – UNPAINTED SUBSTRATES

A. General: Subject to compliance with requirements, for each of the following exterior unpainted substrate types and sheens, provide one of the listed paint systems or equal products in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.

B. Galvanized Steel - Semi-Gloss Sheen:

1. Dunn-Edwards Paints:

a. Pretreatment: SCME01 Supreme Chemical Metal Etch

b. First Coat: UGPR00-1 ULTRA-GRIP Premium Interior/Exterior Multi-Surface Primer

c. Second Coat: EVSH50-2 EVERSHIELD Exterior/Interior Semi-Gloss Paint

d. Third Coat: EVSH50-2 EVERSHIELD Exterior/Interior Semi-Gloss Paint

2. Devoe High Performance Coatings:

a. Pretreatment: Devprep 88 Surface Cleaner and Degreaser

b. First Coat: Devcryl 1440 Water-Based Acrylic

c. Second Coat: Devcryl 1448 Water-borne Acrylic

d. Third Coat: Devcryl 1448 Water-borne Acrylic

3. Sherwin-Williams Company:

a. Pretreatment: Jasco Prep & Prime

b. First Coat: B66W01310 Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer

c. Second Coat: A76W00051 Solo 100% Acrylic Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss

d. Third Coat: A76W00051 Solo 100% Acrylic Interior/Exterior Semi-Gloss


3.7 PAINT COLOR/SHEEN SCHEDULE

A. Paint Colors:

1. Metal Handrails: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. END OF SECTION 09 91 00

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 10 14 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Signage

SECTION 10 14 00

SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Polymer panel Signs.

a. Assistive listening sign.

2. Exterior pole-mounted signs and concrete footings.


1. Section 32 17 23 “Pavement Markings” for parking striping and symbols; playground striping.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 611: Voluntary Specifications for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

2. AAMA 2603: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A 53: Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.

2. ASTM A 123: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

3. ASTM B 209: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

4. ASTM C 33: Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

5. ASTM C 94: Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

6. ASTM C 150: Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

7. ASTM D 4956: Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control.

C. California Air Resources Board:

1. Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings.


D. California Building Code (CBC) - California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2.

E. California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen) – California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 11.

F. Federal Standard 595B: Colors.

G. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD):

1. Rule 1168 – Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

H. United States Department of Justice:


1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices and concealed framing and backing in other Sections with templates for installing signs to ensure that signs can be supported and installed as indicated.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Include elevations and layout for each sign. Show sign message, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille.

2. Show sign mounting heights, anchorage details, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors available for selection by Architect for the following:

1. Polymer Signs:

a. Minimum Number of Available Colors: 40.

2. Include representative Samples of available typeface styles and graphic symbols, if not specified in Contract Documents.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly, for each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:

1. Panel Signs: 6 inches by 6 inches.

2. Reviewed Samples will not be returned for installation in Project.

E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. CALGreen Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s product data for adhesives and paints for signage indicating compliance with product requirements specified in “CALGreen Requirements” Article.

2. Tactile characters and braille shall comply with CBC11B-703.



A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Deliver products to site in protective wrapping or packaging to protect from damage during handling and storage.

B. Store and handle in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturer’s written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration, including fading, of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Deterioration of embedded graphic images.

c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.

2. Warranty Period:

a. Polymer-Based Panel Signs: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of sign through one source from a single manufacturer.



B. Provide adhesives which comply with current VOC content limits of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168, except as noted otherwise below. Such products shall also comply with Rule 1168 prohibition of the use of certain toxic compounds (chloroform, ethylene, dichloride, methylene chloride, perchloroethylene, and trichloroethyelen).

C. Paints and Coatings: Provide paints and coatings for panel signs that comply with VOC limits in Table 1 of the California Air Resources Board (ARB) Architectural Coatings Suggested Control Measure, unless more stringent local limits apply.


A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements for signage as per the following:

1. California Building Code (Title 24, Part 2), Chapter 11B.

2. United States Department of Justice’s 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.

2.4 POLYMER PANEL SIGNS

A. Polymer Panel Signs: Unframed, polymer-based panel sign. Applied text is not acceptable. Panel and text color achieved through applied UV-resistant polyurethane enamel paint.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers:

a. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

b. Corporate Sign Systems.

c. Mohawk Sign Systems.

d. Nova Polymers, Inc

e. Manufacturer of equal products in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.

B. Thickness: 1/4 inch.


C. Fabricate signs with smooth uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; edges smoothly finished to comply with the following requirements:

1. Edge Conditions: Square cut, with edges eased to 1/32 inch radius.

2. Corner Conditions (Front Elevation View): Square, with corners eased to 1/16 inch radius.

D. Sign Text and Graphic Content: In addition to requirements specified herein, comply with requirements indicated on Drawings for content, typeface styles, sizes, spacing, and layout. Italicized text used in this Section indicates actual text message to be fabricated on sign.

E. Pictograms: Pictograms, where indicated, shall have a field height of 6 inches minimum. Characters and Braille shall not be located in the pictogram field.

1. Contrast: Pictogram shall contrast with background field.

2. Finish: Both pictogram and background field shall have non-glare finish.

3. Corresponding descriptive text and Braille shall be located directly below pictogram field.

F. Colored Coatings for Polymer Sheet: For text and graphics, and background colors, provide acrylic polyurethane enamel paints recommended by polymer manufacturer for optimum adherence to polymer surface and which are UV- and water-resistant for colors and exposures indicated. Paint to fully cover all surfaces of sign.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following topcoat material:

a. Matthews Paint Company; Matthews Satin VOC MAP.

2. VOC Content: Complies with requirements specified in “CALGreen Requirements” Article.

3. Primer: As recommended in writing for intended substrate material by manufacturer of topcoat material.

4. Sign Finish: Sign characters and background to have non-glare (matte) finish.

5. Visual Contrast: Provide minimum 70 percent contrast between sign characters and sign background.

6. Sign Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors.

G. Sign Mounting: Manufacturer’s noncorroding anchors suitable for substrate being mounted to or as detailed on Drawings.

1. Anchors to be countersunk flush with face of sign, and finished to match surrounding color of sign face.

2. Adhesive: Manufacturer’s silicone adhesive.

H. Polymer Panel Sign Types:

1. Assistive Listening System Sign:

a. Sign Size and Layout: As indicated on Drawings.

b. Tactile characters and Braille are not required.


c. Typeface: Futura Book, upper case.

d. Text Character Height: As indicated on Drawings.

e. Sign Message Text:

ASSISTIVE-LISTENING SYSTEM AVAILABLE

(refer to Drawings for layout)

f. Pictogram: International Symbol of Access for Hearing Loss, adjacent to sign message text.

g. Mounting Location: As indicated on Drawings.

I. Accessories:

1. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer’s standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

a. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

b. For exterior exposure, furnish nonferrous-metal, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized devices unless otherwise indicated.

c. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead countersunk screws with tamper-resistant slots unless otherwise indicated.

i) Finish exposed portion of fastener head to match surrounding sign color and finish.

d. Furnish inserts to be set by other trades into concrete or masonry work.

2. Adhesive: Silicone adhesive as recommended by sign manufacturer.

a. VOC Content: Complies with requirements specified in “CALGreen Requirements” Article.

2.5 EXTERIOR POLE-MOUNTED SIGNS

A. General: Freestanding pole-mounted sign for exterior installation.

1. Sign Face: Aluminum sheet.

a. Thickness: 0.080 inch.

b. Round all corners to 1/2 inch radius.

2. Reflective Sheeting: Reflective sheet with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing; ASTM D 4956, Type I.

3. Sign Text and Graphic Content: In addition to requirements specified herein, comply with requirements indicated on Drawings for content, typeface styles, sizes, spacing, and layout. Italicized text used in this Section indicates actual text message to be fabricated on sign

4. Sign Mounting Height: As shown on Drawings.

5. Pole: Steel pipe, 2-inch nominal size (2.375-inch outside diameter).

6. Footing: Concrete.


B. Fabrication:

1. Fabricate sign face from single sheet without splices or joints.

2. Prior to application of reflective sheeting, pretreat and clean sign face in accordance with written instructions of reflective sheeting manufacturer.

3. Apply reflective sheeting without wrinkles, stretching, tearing, or damage in accordance with written instructions of reflective sheeting manufacturer.

4. Apply text and graphics with clean, sharp edges, using inks of a type and quality as approved for compatibility by manufacturer of reflective sheeting.

C. Sign Types:

1. Van-Accessible Parking Stall: Complying with requirements of California Building Code and United States Justice Department’s 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.

a. Upper Sign:

i) Size: 12 inches wide by 12 inches high.

ii) Colors:

a) Field: Blue, Federal Standard 595B, Color No. 17886.

b) Graphic Symbol and Border: White.

iii) Typeface: Helvetica Light.

iv) Sign Message Text: MINIMUM FINE $250

a) Pictogram: International Symbol of Accessibility, centered over sign message text.

b. Lower Sign:

i) Sign Size: 12 inches wide by 4 inches high.

ii) Colors:

a) Field: Blue, Federal Standard 595B, Color No. 17886.

b) Text and Border: White.

iii) Typeface: Helvetica Light.

iv) Sign Message Text: VAN ACCESSIBLE

MINIMUM FINE $250

2. Towing Warning Sign: Complying with California Building Code Chapter 11B.

a. Sign Size: 18 inches wide by 24 inches high.

b. Colors:

i) Field: White.

ii) Text and Border: Black.

c. Typeface: Helvetica Light.

d. Text Character Height: 1 inch.

C

C


e. Sign Message Text:

UNAUTHORIZED VEHICLES PARKED IN DESIGNATED ACCESSIBLE

SPACES NOT DISPLAYING DISTINGUISHING PLACARDS OR

SPECIAL LICENSE PLATES ISSUED FOR PERSONS WITH

DISABILITIES WILL BE TOWED AWAY AT OWNER’S EXPENSE.

TOWED VEHICLES MAY BE RECLAIMED AT [insert name and address of towing company as indicated on sign detail on drawings] OR BY TELEPHONING [insert telephone number of towing company as indicated on sign detail on drawings].

D. Materials:

1. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

2. Steel Pipe: Standard steel pipe, ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40).

a. Finish: Hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123.

3. Concrete for Footings:

a. Materials:

i) Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

ii) Aggregates: ASTM C 33.

iii) Water: Clean and potable.

b. Concrete Mixes: Normal-weight concrete with not less than 2500 psi compressive strength (28 days), 3 inch slump, and 1 inch maximum size aggregate.

c. Measure, batch, and mix Project-site-mixed concrete according to ASTM C 94.

E. Accessories:

1. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer’s standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

a. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.\

b. Furnish nonferrous-metal, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized devices unless otherwise indicated.

c. Exposed Metal Fastener Components, General:

i) Fabricated from same basic metal, finish, and color of fastened sign unless otherwise indicated.

ii) Fastener Heads: Use flathead or oval countersunk screws and bolts with tamper-resistant slots unless otherwise indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Verify anchor inserts are sized and located to accommodate signs.

D. Verify painting and finishing of wall substrates are complete.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and complying with manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to accessibility standard.

3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation.

4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Panel Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer’s written instructions, except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled and countersunk holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.

a. Install silicone-adhesive at perimeter of backside of sign.

C. Pole-Mounted Signs:

1. Set posts for pole-mounted signs plumb in minimum 12 inch diameter concrete footing with top of footing 6 inches below finish grade and bottom of footing minimum 30 inches below finish grade. Cap top of pipe.

2. Secure signs to posts with saddles and vandalproof nuts. Provide back-to-back signs where indicated.

3. Install signs at mounting height indicated.

a. Bottom of signs to be minimum of 80 inches above finish grade.


b. Lower sign of two-sign assemblies to be placed with bottom a minimum of 80 inches above finish grade, and with a one-inch space between upper and lower sign.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signage that does not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signage according to manufacturer’s written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signage in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 11 68 16 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Playground Surface Systems

SECTION 11 68 16

PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY Furnish all labor, materials, miscellaneous hardware, foundations, miscellaneous appurtenances, facilities, transportation and services required for installation of all playground area surface systems and related work as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.

A. Scope of work: The general extent of work contained in this section is shown on the drawings and can include, but may not be limited to, installation of the following:

1. Poured-in-Place Resilient Rubber Surface.

B. Related sections can include, but may not be limited to:

1. Section 024109 - Selective Demolition.

2. Section 022300 - Site Clearing.

3. Section 027500 - Concrete Paving.

4. Section 116813 - Playground Equipment. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Area Safety: Safety surfacing within playground equipment use zones shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of CPSC, ASTM F 1292-99 and CSA Z614-98 that a surface yield both a peak deceleration of no more than 200 g’s and a Head Injury Criteria (HIC) value of no more than 1,000 for a head-first fall from the highest accessible portion of play equipment being installed as shown on drawings.

B. Manufactured Safety Surface: For surfaces manufactured for the purpose of playground safety surface, the impact attenuation performance shall be documented by a certificate of compliance.

C. Performance Requirements for Poured-in-place playground surfacing system: Provide a 2 layer rubber-polyurethane playground surfacing system which has been designed, manufactured and installed to meet the following criteria:

1. Shock Attenuation (ASTM F1292):

a. Gmax: Less than 200.

b. Head Injury Criteria: Less than 1000.

2. Flammability (ASTM D2859): Pass.

3. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 60 psi (413 kPa).

4. Tear Resistance (ASTM D624): 140%.


5. Water Permeability: 0.4 gal/yd2/second.

6. Accessibility: Comply with requirements of ASTM F1951.

D. Submittals: The following shall be submitted:

1. Manufacturer’s descriptive data and installation instructions, including cleaning and preventative maintenance instructions.

2. Drawings showing shop details of the safety surfacing system, including depths of material, sub-base materials, anchoring systems and edge details.

3. A list of all materials and components to be installed as part of the system, by weight, and/or volume and recommended coverage, including manufacturers name, shipment date, storage requirements, and precautions, and shall state chemical composition and test results to which material has been subjected in compliance with these specifications.

4. A listing of at least five installations where products similar to those proposed for use have been installed and have been in successful service for a minimum period of three years. This list shall include owner or purchaser, address of installation, service or maintenance organization, date of installation, contact person, and phone number.

5. Statement signed by an official authorized to certify on behalf of the manufacturer of the synthetic safety surfacing attesting that the surfacing meets the requirements of ASTM F 1292-99 for a head-first fall from the highest accessible portion of specified playground equipment.

6. Statement signed by the Manufacturer of the synthetic safety surfacing attesting that all materials under this section shall be installed by the Manufacturer’s employees and that playground surfacing installation shall not be performed by anyone other than the Manufacturer. Manufacturer shall provide, upon request, payroll records from previous installations to document compliance.

7. A certificate of Insurance shall be provided by manufacturers of synthetic safety surfacing for use as playground safety surfacing, covering both general and product liability, of not less than $5,000,000. The issuing underwrite shall be AA rated.

8. Sample of safety surface, minimum of 9 inches x 9 inches (150 mm x 150 mm) proposed for this project of pour-in-place resilient rubber surface.

E. Delivery, Storage and Handling: Materials and equipment shall be delivered and

stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. Project Site Conditions: Synthetic safety surfacing shall be installed on a dry subsurface, with no prospect of rain within the initial drying period, at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer.

G. Sequencing and Scheduling: Safety surfacing shall be installed after the playground equipment is installed. Surface installation shall be coordinated by


designated individual playground sub-equipment and sub-base installation.

H. Warranty: Surfacing shall maintain required impact attenuation characteristics and be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and material for a period of two years. Provide warranty to Owner upon completion of surfacing installation.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Utilize an installer approved and trained by the manufacturer of

the playground surfacing system, having experience with other projects of the scope and scale of the work described in this section.

B. Certifications: Certification by manufacturer that installer is an approved applicator of the playground surfacing system.

C. International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association (IPEMA) certified.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension.

2. ASTM D624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.

3. ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.

4. ASTM D2859 Standard Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials.

5. ASTM E303 Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using the British Pendulum Tester.

6. ASTM F1292 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.

7. ASTM F1951 Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements for Poured-in-place playground surfacing system: Provide a 2 layer rubber-polyurethane playground surfacing system which has been designed, manufactured and installed to meet the following criteria:

1. Shock Attenuation (ASTM F1292):

a. Gmax: Less than 200.

b. Head Injury Criteria: Less than 1000.

2. Flammability (ASTM D2859): Pass.


3. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 60 psi (413 kPa).

4. Tear Resistance (ASTM D624): 140%.

5. Water Permeability: 0.4 gal/yd2/second.

6. Accessibility: Comply with requirements of ASTM F1951. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged

containers with identification labels intact.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and a maximum temperature of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Install surfacing system when minimum ambient

temperature is 40 degrees F (1 degree C) and maximum ambient temperature is 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). Do not install in steady or heavy rain.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty

provisions. B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s

standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

A. Resilient Rubber Surface. Resilient Rubber Surface material shall consist of

synthetic safety surfacing meeting requirements of this specification. The type of safety surfacing shall be as indicated on the drawings. Additional requirements are as follows: 1. Wear Surface: Wear surface shall consist of ethylene propylene diene

monomer (EPDM) particles adhered with polyurethane binder formulated to produce an even, uniform surface.

2. EPDM particles shall meet requirements of ASTM D 412 and CSA Z614-98 for tensile strength and elongation.

3. ASTM D 2240 (Shore A) hardness of 50-70, not less than 25 percent rubber hydrocarbons.

4. EPDM shall be peroxide cured with an EPDM content of 26 percent and shall include a processing aid to prevent hardness.

5. Size of rubber particles shall be not less than 1.00 mm, nor greater than


3.0 mm across. Binder shall be not less than 20 percent of total weight of rubber used in the wear surface, and shall provide 100 percent coating of the particles.

6. Thickness of wear surface shall be a minimum ½ inch (2.5 mm). 7. The wear surface shall be porous. 8. Binder: Binder for safety surfacing shall be 88-M-41, which is specifically

designed for use with rubber granule material for outdoor installations. 9. 88-M-41 is a single component polyurethane prepolymer formulated using

a polymeric foam of Diphenylmethane 4, 4’ Diisocyanate (MDI). 10. No toluene diphenel isocyanate (TDI) shall be used. 11. No filler materials shall be used in urethane such as plasticizers and the

catalyzing agent shall contain no heavy metals. 12. Weight of polyurethane shall be no less than 8.5 lbs/gal (1.02 Kg/1) and

no more than 9.5 lbs/gal (1.14 Kg/1). PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 SITE PREPARATION

A. Finished Grade: Verify that finished elevations of adjacent areas are as indicated

on the drawings, that the appropriate subgrade elevation has been established for the particular safety surface to be installed, and that the subsurface has been installed in a true, even plane, and sloped to drain as indicated in Drawings. Verify the subsurface irregularities have been corrected. For pour-in-place playground surface system, Using a brush or short nap roller, apply primer to the substrate perimeter and any adjacent vertical barriers such as playground equipment support legs, curbs or slabs that will contact the surfacing system at the rate of 300 ft2/gal (7.5 m2/L).

B. Drainage: Verify that subsurface drainage, if required, has been installed to provide positive drainage.

C. Subsurface: Tolerance of aggregate base as subsurface material shall be within

3/8 inch (10mm) in 10 ft (3050 mm). Verify that aggregate base subsurface has been fully compacted to 95 percent.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLAYGROUND SURFACE SYSTEM

A. Do not proceed with playground surfacing installation until all applicable site

work, including substrate preparation, fencing, playground equipment installation and other relevant work, has been completed.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect the installed playground surface from damage resulting from subsequent

construction activity on the site.

END OF SECTION

Santa Clara County Office Of Education 16273.000 Section 22 00 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Plumbing General

DIVISION 22 00 00

PLUMBING GENERAL

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are hereby a part of this Section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2 SCOPE

A. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary for, and reasonably incidental to, providing and installing complete plumbing systems and other mechanical work as shown or indicated in the Drawings and Specifications.

B. Consult all other Sections to determine the extent and character of this work specified elsewhere.

C. Specifically refer to the following:

Section 22 00 00

Section 22 10 00

Plumbing General

Site Utilities

D. Make all connections to equipment requiring service from systems installed under this Section.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Before submitting a bid for the mechanical work the Contractor shall visit the site and become familiar with all the work on other related Drawings and Specifications, and plan the work to provide the best possible assembly of the combined work of all trades. No additional costs will be considered for work which has to be relocated due to conflicts with other trades.

B. If, after examination of the bidding documents relating to the work, the Contractor has queries concerning the nature and scope of the work or intent of the Specifications, he/she shall promptly request clarification from the Architect. After contract award, claims of ignorance of the intent and scope of the contract shall not be allowed.

C. At the start of the project, Site Utilities Contractor shall schedule a coordination meeting between building provider, building plumbing contractor, and Electrical sub-contractors at a minimum. Architect, Plumbing, and Electrical Engineers shall be notified of the meeting time and location. Meeting shall review domestic site piping routing, inverts, valve locations, and connection locations & sizes at building. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded and forwarded to the Architect,


Plumbing, and Electrical Engineers and sub-contractors, whether present at the meeting or not

D. Contractor to provide Shop Drawings of all Plumbing valves, pipes, equipment, etc. for coordination with other trades.

E. Contractor is responsible for coordinating the schedule of inspections by Engineer at appropriate stages of construction such as rough-in, pre-final, and final, and at other times required by the Specifications or by the construction. Notify Architect and Engineer seven (7) days in advance of proposed site visit. Notification constitutes certification that construction is, or will be, complete and ready for inspection.

1.4 SAFETY

A. Contractors must conduct a weekly safety meeting with their employees and provide documentation as to attendance and topics of discussion. Engineer's construction support services do not constitute review or approval of Contractor's safety procedures. Contractor shall comply with all OSHA regulations. Contractor is required to obtain and pay for insurance required to cover all activities within Contractor's Scope of Work.

1.5 BUILDING LAWS

A. Plumbing work shall conform to all requirements prescribed by governmental bodies having jurisdiction and is to be in accordance with the California Building Code; all federal, state, and local codes and ordinances; all OSHA requirements; California Plumbing Code, California Mechanical Code, California Fire Code, and National Fire Protection Association, California State Code Title 8, Title 21, Title 24.

B. Should any part of the design fail to comply with such requirements, the discrepancy shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to submitting bid.

C. Should there be any direct conflict between the Drawings and/or Specifications and the above rules and regulations, the rules and regulations shall take precedence. However, when the indicated material, workmanship, arrangement, or construction is of a superior quality or capacity to that required by above rules and regulations, the Drawings and/or Specifications shall take precedence. Rulings and interpretations of enforcing agencies shall be considered as part of the regulations.

D. After a Contract is awarded, if minor changes or additions are required by the aforementioned authorities, even though such work is not shown on Drawings or overtly covered in the Specifications, they must be included at the Contractor's expense.

E. The Contractor is responsible to coordinate and make adjustments in his/her work with the full set of Contract Drawings and Specifications.


1.6 PERMITS, FEES, AND UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and fees. The Contractor shall arrange for all required inspections.

1.7 UTILITY CONNECTIONS

A. See Division 22 10 00 Site Utilities for site utility connection requirements.

1.8 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION WATER

A. The Plumbing Contractor shall make all arrangements and provide necessary facilities for the temporary construction water from the Owner's source.

1.9 PAINTING

A. See Division 09 for painting of piping, equipment, etc.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All materials used shall be new as listed in subheadings and indicated on Drawings. Inspect all materials and immediately remove defective materials from the site.

B. All electrical materials shall bear the label of, or be listed by, the Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), unless the material is of a type for which label or listing service is not provided.

C. Substitution:

1. No substitute materials or equipment may be installed without the written approval of the Architect.

2. Use of substitute materials or equipment may require changes in associated materials and equipment. Contractor shall submit detailed Shop Drawings and installation instructions of substitute materials and equipment to Architect for approval. Such submittals shall address all changes required in other items.

3. All additional costs incurred by the substitution of material or equipment, or the installation thereof whether Architectural, Structural, Fire, Mechanical, Plumbing, or Electrical shall be borne by the Contractor who substitutes the materials or equipment in place of the items specified.

D. Quality of Materials: Pipe fittings and equipment may be taken from stock but the Contractor will be required to submit manufacturer's certificates identifying the material and equipment furnished as conforming with these Specifications and such codes and standards as apply to the equipment specified. Any material on


the site which cannot be identified by manufacturer's mark shall be removed from the site at Architect’s request.

2.2 SUBMITTALS

A. The review of submittals and approval thereof by the Architect does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements and intentions of the Drawings and Specifications to which the submittals pertain. The contractor acknowledges its responsibility to submit complete shop drawings and other required submittals. Incomplete submittals will be returned to the contractor unreviewed.

B. No item shall be installed without having been submitted and reviewed without comment. Should the Contractor install items that have not been submitted and reviewed, the work shall be changed at Contractor's own expense when so ordered by the Architect.

C. Material List: An itemized list of material and equipment which the Contractor proposes to use shall be submitted to the Architect with number of copies indicated and within time indicated.

D. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Submit all required Shop Drawings, product data, etc. at one time. Submittals shall be bound, tabbed, and properly indexed by Specification Section.

2. Each item shall be identified by manufacturer, brand, and trade name; model number, size, rating, and whatever other data is necessary to properly identify and verify the materials and equipment. The words "AS SPECIFIED" will not be considered sufficient information.

3. Each submittal shall bear the Contractor's stamp and mark indicating the Contractor has reviewed and approved the submittal.

4. Each submitted item shall refer to the Specification Section and paragraph in which the item is specified.

5. Accessories, controls, finish, etc. not required to be submitted or identified with the submitted equipment shall be furnished and installed as specified.

6. Submittals shall be all inclusive with all items requiring submittals being submitted at the same time; individual submittals will not be accepted.

7. Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional charges made by equipment manufacturers to complete their equipment in time to meet construction schedule, together with any special handling charges, shall be borne by Contractor.


PART III - EXECUTION

3.1 DRAWINGS

A. The Drawings show the general arrangement and location of the piping and equipment. Work shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings, except for changes required by conflicts with the work of other trades. The Contractor shall provide for the support, expansion, and pitch of any rearranged piping in conformance with the intent of the Drawings, Specifications, and codes.

B. Note that certain plumbing work is shown, wholly or in part, on Architectural Drawings.

C. Plumbing Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show the approximate location of equipment and piping. Dimensions shown on Drawings shall take precedence over scaled dimensions on Drawings. All dimensions shall be verified in the field by the Contractor.

D. The exact location of apparatus, equipment, and piping shall be ascertained from the Architect or the Owner’s representative in the field, and work shall be laid out accordingly. Should the Contractor fail to ascertain such locations the work shall be changed at Contractor's own expense when so ordered by the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make minor changes in the location of piping and equipment up to the time of installation without additional cost.

E. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications that, where certain plumbing items such as unions, expansion joints, and other plumbing components are not shown, but where such items are required by the nature of the work, shall be furnished and installed.

F. The Plumbing Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement each other. Any material or labor called for in one shall be furnished even though not specifically mentioned in the other.

G. Pipe sizes shown are the minimum allowable and shall be increased in size if required by code or wherever necessary to meet unusual conditions.

3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Drawings shall be maintained at all times showing the exact location of equipment, piping mains, branches, valves, cleanouts, etc. installed under all Sections. Obtain from the Architect, at cost, a complete set of prints. On these prints systematically and accurately keep a dimensional record of all work installed different from those shown on Drawings. Have these Drawings readily available for reference.

B. Record Set: When above information is complete and acceptable to the Architect transfer this information accurately to reproducible tracings, purchased at cost from the Architect for this purpose, and deliver to the Architect for final review.


C. Upon completion of the Architect’s review of the Record Set the Contractor shall incorporate changes, as noted on the record set, including dimensions such as building waste inverts, valves, etc. Deliver transparencies with one (1) set of prints to the Architect. Deliver one (1) complete set of prints to building Owner within ninety (90) days of issuance of final occupancy report.

D. Inspector's Approval: Where a full-time inspector is employed by the Owner, the Record Drawing information shall be reviewed by the inspector during the course of construction and shall have the inspector's approval before submission to the Architect.

3.3 DAMAGE

A. Repair any damage to the premises and equipment occasioned by the work under this Section.

B. Repair all damage to any part of the premises caused by leaks or breaks in pipe, or malfunctions of equipment furnished or installed under this Section until the warranty period expiration date.

3.4 COMPLETE WORKING INSTALLATION

A. The Drawings and Specifications do not attempt to list every item that must be installed. When an item is necessary for the satisfactory operation of equipment, is required by the equipment manufacturer, or accepted as good practice, furnish without change in Contract cost.

3.5 STORAGE

A. Provide proper protection and storage of all items and tools required for this work.

3.6 QUALITY OF WORK

A. The quality of work shall be of a standard generally accepted in the respective trade. Use only experienced, competent, and properly equipped workers. Replace work falling below this standard as directed by the Architect.

B. Systems shall be worked into a complete and integrated arrangement with like elements arranged to make a neat appearing and finished piece of work, with passageway free from obstructions. Such systems shall be installed by laborers experienced in the respective trades involved.

3.7 CONCRETE WALLS AND CONCRETE FOOTINGS

A. Where pipes must pass through concrete walls and footings, they shall pass through SDR 35 PVC pipe sleeves with 1" annular space set in place at time of construction.

B. Coordinate core drilled openings with Architect and General Contractor. Coordination shall include location, size, and spacing of openings. No slot


openings will be allowed. Coordinate openings to avoid critical structural items such as reinforcing bars, tensioning tendons, etc.

C. Also see Paragraph 3.10.

3.8 CUTTING AND REPAIRING

A. No cutting shall be done except with Architect’s approval. Cutting of structural members or footings is prohibited without the prior written consent of the Structural Engineer.

B. Where cutting of paving, walls, ceilings, etc. is necessary for the installation of the plumbing work, it shall be done under the direction of this Section. Damage caused by this cutting shall be repaired to match original and adjacent surfaces without additional expense to the Owner. Cutting of new construction shall be by the installing Contractor of that construction as directed by this Contractor.

3.9 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify all piping contents with letter legend on color background identifying hazard or use of material.

B. The pipe marker system shall conform completely with "The Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems" (ANSI A13.1 latest edition). More specifically, the pipe marker must possess the following:

1. ANSI specified color coded background.

2. ANSI specified color of legend in relation to background color.

3. ANSI specified legend letter size.

4. ANSI specified length of color field (marker length).

C. Provide flow markers consisting of labels similar to pipe markers with a large black arrow printed on same background color to indicate direction of flow.

D. Place markers adjacent to valves and fittings or branch take-off and for exposed piping locate markers to be clearly visible to person standing on floor, and at not over 30'-0" intervals on all straight runs of pipe.

E. All valves under 3/4" I.D.: 18 gauge brass identification tags 1 1/2" in diameter with depressed 1/2" high black filled letters above 1/2" black filled numbers. Tags shall be fastened securely at specified locations. Valve tags shall show valve number, purpose, and normal condition (open or closed).

F. Tag Locations:

1. Adjacent to each valve and fitting.

2. At each branch and riser take-off.


3. At each pipe passage to underground.

4. On all horizontal pipe runs, marked every 25'-0".

3.10 SLEEVES AND SEALING

A. Provide sleeves for all pipes passing through new floors, walls, partitions, and any other building construction, of adequate diameter to allow minimum of 1" clearance all around between sleeve and pipe. Sleeves are not required for holes drilled through existing floors, walls, or partitions (in which case leave specified clearance between hole and pipe).

B. Lay out work prior to concrete forming. Reinforce sleeves to prevent collapse during forming and curing.

C. All floor sleeves required shall extend 1" above finished floor except through mechanical equipment room floors and shafts where sleeves shall extend 2" above finished floor level.

D. Sleeves shall permit free thermal expansion of pipe without binding or contact with structure.

E. Do not support pipes by resting pipe clamps on floor sleeves. Supplementary members shall be provided so pipes are floor supported.

F. Pipe sleeves as scheduled below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Concrete or Masonry Walls and Concrete Bases: See Paragraph 3.7.

G. Sealing of Sleeves or Holes:

1. Waterproof Sleeves or Holes in Floors and Walls: Seal space between pipe and sleeves in exterior walls, foundations, walls, pits, etc. watertight using Link-Seal modular wall and casing seal, or as detailed.

2. Trim Plates: Provide minimum 1" trim plates at visible sides of openings on all exposed pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, plaster furring, etc. unless otherwise specified or indicated. Plates shall be prime coated.

3.11 SUPPORTS

A. All equipment and piping shall be mounted on, or suspended from, foundations and supports as specified and indicated, and seismically braced to structure.

B. Vibration isolation and seismic restraints for vibration isolated equipment per Title 24.

C. All piping and equipment shall be securely anchored to building structure as required by the Specifications, SMACNA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems", Title 24, and the California Building Code.


D. Earthquake restraints shall be capable of resisting 100% gravity lateral loads or as required by Title 24.

E. Supplemental Supports: Provide supplemental supports to span building structural elements as necessary for equipment foundations and supports. Provide Shop Drawings to Mechanical and Structural Engineers for approval prior to installation.

3.12 ACCESSIBILITY

A. General: Valves, cleanout fittings, and indicating equipment or specialties requiring reading, adjusting, inspection, repairing, removal, or replacement shall be conveniently and accessibly located.

B. Panels: No unions, flanges, valves, or equipment shall be placed in a location that will be inaccessible after the system is complete. Access panels or doors shall be provided where required whether or not shown on Drawings.

3.13 TESTING

A. Test all piping, equipment, and systems as called for in the Specifications. Notify Architect and inspection authorities prior to testing so that they may be witnessed. Protect all personnel and equipment during testing. Where Specifications do not cover specific points or methods, conform to manufacturer's specifications.

3.14 DEMOLITION

A. Removal, storage, or disposal of existing pipes, equipment, plumbing fixtures, etc. shall be under the direction of the Architect.

B. Provide a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations.

3.15 PIPE OPENINGS

A. Locating and sizing of all openings for pipes shall be done under this Division. Framing of openings shall be done by the respective trades in whose work the opening is made.

3.16 EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment shall be accurately set and leveled. Supports shall be neatly placed and properly fastened. All equipment shall be fastened in place with bolts.

B. Keep all openings closed with plugs or caps to prevent entrance of foreign matter. Protect all piping, fixtures, and equipment against dirt, water, chemical, or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Any equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance shall be restored to original condition or replaced at the Architect’s discretion and at no additional cost to the Owner.


C. Start-Up: Equipment shall be adjusted, lubricated, aligned, etc. prior to start-up. Inspect each piece of equipment prior to start-up. Start each piece of equipment in accordance with manufacturer's directions and warranty requirements.

D. Finish: Protect all equipment and materials until in use. Any visible rust or corrosion shall be removed as directed prior to installation. All damaged factory painted finishes shall be cleaned and painted with manufacturer provided paint.

3.17 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS

A. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's application and recommendations, requirements, and instructions, and in accordance with Contract Documents. Where manufacturer's instructions differ from those indicated or specified, they shall be brought to Architect attention for resolution prior to equipment ordering and installation.

B. Where requirements indicated in Contract Documents exceed manufacturer's requirements, Contract Documents shall govern.

3.18 CLEAN-UP

A. During the course of work under this Section, all rubbish, debris, surplus materials, tools, etc. resulting from this work shall be removed from work area and shall be disposed of off-site at the end of each working day. The Owner's premises shall be left clean and in a condition acceptable to the Architect.

B. Clean all work installed under this Contract to satisfaction of Owner and submit documentation that each system has been cleaned and results witnessed by the Architect representative.

C. All water distribution and piping systems shall be flushed thoroughly until piping is cleaned to satisfaction of the Architect. See other Specification Sections for additional requirements.

3.19 FINAL INSPECTION

A. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect with certificates of final inspection and approval from the inspection authorities having jurisdiction.

3.20 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee the quality of all work and the quality of equipment and materials in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions and Special Conditions. Should any defects occur during this period, the Contractor shall promptly repair or replace defective items as directed by the Architect, without cost to the Owner.

3.21 SITE VISITS BY ENGINEER

A. Engineer's responsibility is limited to normal construction support services only, consisting of office consultation, site visits, and reports to the Architect at


appropriate stages of construction such as rough-in, pre-final, and final. All costs incurred by the Engineer for additional site visits or office work required to complete the project as the result of incomplete coordination or supervision by the Contractor or the Mechanical Sub-Contractor shall be paid for by the Contractor.

3.22 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Three (3) complete sets of bound instructions containing the manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment shall be furnished to the Owner within ninety (90) days of issuance of final occupancy permit. Each set shall be permanently bound and shall have a hard cover. The following identification shall be inscribed on the covers, "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", the name and location of the building, the name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. Flysheets shall be placed before instructions covering each subject. The instruction sheets shall be approximately 8 1/2" x 11" with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The instructions shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. System layout showing piping, valves and controls with complete valve and control identification, listing, and indexing valve charts.

2. Operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment including lubrication instructions. Include information on frequency of lubrication, filter change, belt adjustment, cleaning, adjusting, etc.

B. Field Instructions: Upon completion of the work and at a time designated by the Owner the services of one or more competent Engineers shall be provided by the Contractor to instruct a representative of the Owner in the operation and maintenance of the systems. These field instructions shall cover all the items contained in the bound instructions and shall be of a sufficient length and detailed nature, in the Engineer's judgment, to insure safe and efficient operation.


Santa Clara County Office Of Education 16273.000 Section 22 10 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Site Utilities

SECTION 22 10 00

SITE UTILITIES

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

The General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, Section 22 00 00, Plumbing General, and Division 1 are hereby a part of this Section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2 SCOPE

Water service shall consist of furnishing and installing new water as indicated on Drawings.

Sanitary sewer systems shall consist of furnishing and installing new sanitary sewer as indicated on Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit for review, within fifteen (15) days after signing Contract, the required number of copies of a complete list of materials proposed for use, including sizes, capacities, etc. See Division 1 and Section 22 00 00, Plumbing General for requirements. This list includes:

1. Piping.

2. Valves.

3. Utility boxes.

4. Cleanouts.

1.4 COORDINATION

Before submitting a bid for the mechanical work the Contractor shall visit the site and become familiar with all the work on other related Drawings and Specifications, and plan his/her work to provide the best possible assembly of the combined work of all trades. No additional costs will be considered for work which has to be relocated due to conflicts with other trades.

1.5 BUILDING LAWS

Mechanical work shall conform to all requirements prescribed by governmental bodies having jurisdiction and is to be in accordance with the California Plumbing Code, California Mechanical Code, California Fire Code, National Fire Protection Association, California State Code Title 8, Title 21, and Title 24.


Should any part of the design fail to comply with such requirements, the discrepancy shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to submitting a bid.

Should there be any direct conflict between the Drawings and/or Specifications and the above rules and regulations, the rules and regulations shall take precedence. However, when the indicated material, workmanship, arrangement or construction is of a superior quality or capacity to that required by above rules and regulations, the Drawings and/or Specifications shall take precedence. Rulings and interpretations of enforcing agencies shall be considered a part of the regulations.

After a Contract is awarded, if minor changes or additions are required by the aforementioned authorities, even though such work is not shown on Drawings or overtly covered in the Specifications, they must be included at the Contractor's expense.

The Contractor is responsible to coordinate and make adjustments in his/her work with the full set of Contract Drawings and Specifications.

1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND UTILITIES

The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and fees. The Contractor shall arrange for all required inspections.

1.7 UTILITY CONNECTIONS

The Contractor shall route site utilities to building and connect to building as shown on Drawings.

1.8 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

All equipment provided shall deliver full rated capacity at efficiency for which designed. All equipment shall meet requirements indicated and be suitable for installation shown. Notify Architect of any shortcomings found at least ten (10) days prior to bid date. Equipment not meeting all specified requirements will not be accepted even though specified by name along with other manufacturers.

Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished in the same Section of the Specification, provide each from the same manufacturer. Furnish all equipment and materials new and free from defects.

Capacities, dimensions or sizes specified or indicated are minimum. Tolerances used in rating or testing standards specified not allowed in determining capacities of equipment.

Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's application recommendations, requirements, and instructions, and in accordance with Contract Documents. Where manufacturer's instructions differ from those indicated or specified, they shall be brought to Architect attention for resolution prior to equipment ordering and installation. Where requirements indicated in


Contract Documents exceed manufacturer's requirements, Contract Documents shall govern.

All non-metallic piping below grade shall have 12 gauge copper tracer wire and marking tape installed as part of this scope of work.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS

Information on Drawings relative to existing conditions is approximate. During progress of construction, deviations found necessary to conform to actual conditions shall be reported to Architect for determination of procedure to be followed. Contractor is responsible for any damage caused to existing systems. Promptly notify Architect if utilities are found which are not indicated.

Existing equipment, piping, wiring, construction of City sidewalk, street, etc. which interferes with work of this Section shall be removed and promptly returned to service. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. The City or County and private utilities must be informed of property owned by them that has been damaged and replaced.

Remove materials not required for present or future use of facility and not claimed by Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the premises. Consult Owner before removing any material from the premises. Materials claimed by the Owner shall be removed carefully to prevent damage and delivered on-site where directed.

Existing piping and wiring not reused and concealed in new construction may be abandoned in place, but all such piping and wiring which is exposed or indicated to be removed shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the premises.

Verify all dimensions, lines, and levels at the site for all work specified herein. All inverts, slopes, and elevations shall be established by instrument working from established datum. Provide elevation markers and lines for Owner's use in determining that slopes and elevations are in accordance with contract requirements. Accurately locate trenches in relation to building and boundary lines as indicated.

PART II - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING

Cold water mains to 5'-0" from the building shall be Schedule 40 PVC, PVC Class 200, pipe with solvent joints (rated at 200 PSI fittings).

Gravity sanitary waste systems from 5'-0" outside of building shall be extra strength PVC installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's guide.

Tracer wire for all non-metallic piping shall be minimum size #14 AWG copper wire with U.L. approval for direct-burial with an insulating jacket of Yellow Color.


Piping shall have a contiguous trace wire strapped to the pipe every 5 lineal feet and shall be accessible at every riser and in-grade valve box. Contractor shall provide both warning tape and tracer wire for all underground piping.

2.2 VALVE BOXES

Valve boxes shall be of reinforced concrete type with loose reinforced concrete cover as manufactured by Oldcastle Precast or Jensen Precast. Covers shall be lettered "Water" or as detailed and specified on Drawings.

2.3 THRUST BLOCKS

Provide concrete thrust blocks at all changes in direction of water main. Minimum face area against undisturbed soil shall be 6 ft2 on water mains, or as indicated; 1/2" diameter rods shall be bent around pipe and anchored into 2000 lb strength concrete.

2.4 CLEAN-OUT

Grade cleanouts (GCO), J.R. Smith, Zurn or Wade with bronze plug.

2.5 VALVES

All valves shall be the product of a single manufacturer, Mueller, Stockham, Kennedy or Clow. Valves shall be mechanical joint and be AWWA approved.

PART III - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for installation of mechanical work. Any work damaged during excavation and backfilling shall be repaired at Contractor's expense.

Trenches are to be excavated to necessary depth and width. Provide additional excavation to facilitate crossovers, additional offsets, etc. as required. Excavation material is unclassified. Width of trench adequate for proper installation of piping.

Bedding shall be on minimum 6" deep layer of sand placed on leveled trench bottom. Sand removed to necessary depth for piping bells and couplings to maintain contact of pipe on sand for entire length. All other piping laid on smooth level trench bottom to maintain contact for entire length.

All backfill shall be bank run sand and/or gravel to 6" above piping up to slab on interior piping below slabs. All backfill placed in layers not exceeding 8" deep and compacted to 95% of maximum density at optimum moisture content per AASHTO Standards.

During progress of work, Owner may have compaction tests made under direction of testing laboratory for all compacted fill. If found not to meet


Specification, Contractor shall excavate and recompact fill at no additional cost to Owner.

Following backfilling, grade all trenches to level of surrounding subgrade. All excess soil shall be located per Owner's instructions.

3.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

In addition to requirements shown or specified, comply in general with applicable portions of latest current local and/or State ordinances and codes.

Include all items of labor and material required to comply with such standards and codes. Where quantities, sizes or other requirements indicated are in excess of standard or code requirements, specified requirements shall govern.

3.3 COORDINATION

Do all work to receive or joint with work of all trades; cut new service into existing mains; extend piping; and make necessary connections as required to prevent interruption of service. All work shall be coordinated with work of other trades to provide clearances for installation and maintenance of all mechanical equipment. Drawings and Specifications are arranged for convenience only and do not necessarily determine which trades perform various portions of the work.

Before shutdown of any utility service for new connections, coordinate with and notify Owner, County, and utility company(s). Contractor to verify with Architect for approval for areas of interference with existing facilities and operation of departments before doing any work. Contractor to work out schedule of construction and get approval by Architect before starting any work.

3.4 DRAWINGS

Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show all offsets, bends, elbows, etc. which may be required for proper installation of work. Such work shall be verified by Contractor at building site. Provide additional bends and offsets as required by riser and main locations, or other conditions, to complete work at no additional cost to Owner.

Drawings and Specifications are complementary and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Items indicated are not necessarily included in Specifications. Specifications shall supersede Drawings in case of conflict.

3.5 TESTING, CLEANING, AND STERILIZATION

Test all piping, valves, cleanouts, etc. as listed below and provide the Architect with certified copies of test results. The inspection authority having jurisdiction and the Architect shall be notified at least 24 hours prior to performance of all tests so that they may be witnessed.


1. All new water piping shall be tested to 100 PSIG with potable water and held for 8 hours without drop in pressure before it is covered and concealed. Equipment and personnel shall be protected from this test pressure.

2. All new sanitary sewer piping shall be tested hydraulically by being subjected to a head not less than 10'-0". Stand-pipe installed for head test shall be 2" minimum. Test pressure shall be held for 15 minutes before inspection starts and water level shall remain stationary for not less than 1 hour.

Adjust and regulate all cleanouts, valves, equipment, etc. and turn over to the Owner in perfect working order.

Floor drain strainers and cleanout covers shall be freed, cleaned, and polished.

Upon completion of the work, clean all equipment and piping installed under this Section and thoroughly wash and polish all plumbing fixtures, fittings, and trim, removing labels therefrom.

3.6 CHLORINATION

Upon completion of all tests and necessary replacements, all domestic water piping shall be disinfected. Chlorination shall be accomplished by personnel in employ of a firm licensed to do this type of work. After the work has been accomplished, provide the Owner and Architect with a statement from the laboratory indicating the water is suitable for human consumption.

The system shall be charged with a chlorine solution of at least 50 PPM residual chlorine. The solution shall be distributed evenly throughout the system until flowing out furthest outlets. The strong chlorine solution shall remain in the system for a minimum of 24 hours. The strength of the solution shall be confirmed at over 10 PPM at the end of the 24 hour period.

Flush thoroughly and submit bacteriological samples to a certified laboratory which shall certify in writing that the water is suitable for drinking.

3.7 VALVE TAGS, PIPE TAGS, AND CHARTS

See Section 22 00 00 Plumbing General.

3.8 OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

See Section 22 00 00 Plumbing General.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 26 50 00 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building General Electrical Requirements

SECTION 26 05 00

GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work of this Section consists of providing all required labor, supervision, materials and equipment to satisfactorily complete all electrical installations that are shown on the Drawings, included in these specifications, or otherwise needed for a complete and fully operating facility.

B. Furnish and install all required in-place equipment, conduits, conductors, cables and any miscellaneous materials for the satisfactory interconnection and operation of all associated electrical systems.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. This Section provides the basic Electrical Requirements which supplement the General Requirements of Division 01 and apply to all Sections of Division 26.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. As specified in Division 01. Submit to the Architect shop drawings, manufacturer's data and certificates for equipment, materials and finish, and pertinent details for each system specified. Information to be submitted includes manufacturer's descriptive literature of cataloged products, equipment, drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves as applicable, test data and catalog cuts. Obtain written approval before procurement, fabrication, or delivery of the items to the job site. Partial submittals are not acceptable and will be returned without review. Furnish manufacturer's name, trade name, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, project specification and paragraph reference, applicable Federal, Industry and Technical Society Publication References, and years of satisfactory service of each item required to establish contract compliance. Photographs of existing installations and data submitted in lieu of catalog data are not acceptable and will be returned without approval.

B. Organize submittals for equipment and items related to each specification section together as a package.

C. Proposed substitutions of products will not be reviewed or approved prior to awarding of the Contract.

D. Substitutions shall be proven to the Architect or Engineer to be equal or superior to the specified product. Architect’s decision is final. The Contractor shall pay all costs


incurred by the Architect and Engineer in reviewing and processing any proposed substitutions whether or not a proposed substitution is accepted.

E. If a proposed substitution is rejected, the contractor shall furnish the specified product at no increase in contract price.

F. If a proposed substitution is accepted, the contractor shall be completely responsible for all dimensional changes, electrical changes, or changes to other work which are a result of the substitution. The accepted substitution shall be made at no additional cost to the owner or design consultants.


A. Codes: All electrical equipment and materials, including installation and testing, shall conform to the latest editions following applicable codes:

1. California Electrical Code (CEC).

2. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) standards.

3. All applicable local codes, rules and regulations.

4. Electrical Contractor shall posses a C-10 license and all other licenses as may be required. Licenses shall be in effect at start of this contract and be maintained throughout the duration of this contract.

B. Variances: In instances where two or more codes are at variance, the most restrictive requirement shall apply.

C. Standards: Equipment shall conform to applicable standards of American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Electronics Industries Association (EIA), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), and National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

D. Underwriter Laboratories (UL) listing is required for all equipment and materials where such listing is offered by the Underwriters Laboratories. Provide service entrance labels for all equipment required by the NEC to have such labels.

E. The electrical contractor shall guarantee all work and materials installed under this contract for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance by owner.

F. All work and materials covered by this specification shall be subject to inspection at any and all times by representatives of the owner. Work shall not be closed in or covered before inspection and approval by the owner or his representative. Any material found not conforming with these specifications shall, within 3 days after being notified by the owner, be removed from premises; if said material has been installed, entire expense of removing and replacing same, including any cutting and patching that may be necessary, shall be borne by the contractor.


1.5 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and Specifications:

1. In the case of conflict between the drawings and specifications, the specifications shall take precedence.

2. Drawings and specifications are intended to comply with all law, ordinances, rules and regulations of constituted authorities having jurisdiction, and where referred to in the Contract Documents, said laws, ordinance, rules and regulations shall be considered as a part of said Contract Documents within the limits specified. The Contractor shall bear all expenses of correcting work done contrary to said laws, ordinance, rules and regulations if the Contractor knew or should have known that the work as performed is contrary to said laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and if the Contractor performed same (1) without first consulting the Architect for further instructions regarding said work and/or (2) disregarded the Architect’s instructions regarding said work.

B. Drawings: The Electrical Drawings shall govern the general layout of the completed construction.

1. Locations of equipment, panels, pullboxes, conduits, stub-ups, ground connections are approximate unless dimensioned; verify locations with the Architect prior to installation.

2. Review the Drawings and Specification Divisions of other trades and perform the electrical work that will be required for those installations.

3. Should there be a need to deviate from the Electrical Drawings and Specifications, submit written details and reasons for all changes to the Architect for approval.

4. The general arrangement and location of existing conduits, piping, apparatus, etc., is approximate. The drawings and specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the contractor, exact locations, distances and elevations are governed by actual field conditions. Accuracy of data given herein and on the drawings is not guaranteed. Minor changes may be necessary to accommodate work. The contractor is responsible for verifying existing conditions. Should it be necessary to deviate from the design due to interference with existing conditions or work in progress, claims for additional compensation shall be limited to those for work required by unforeseen conditions as determined by the Architect.

5. All drawings and divisions of these specifications shall be considered as whole. The contractor shall report any apparent discrepancies to the Architect prior to submitting bids.

6. The contractor shall be held responsible to have examined the site and compared it with the specifications and plans and to have satisfied himself as to the conditions under which the work is to be performed. He shall be held responsible for knowledge of all existing conditions whether or not accurately


described. No subsequent allowance shall be made for any extra expense due to failure to make such examination.


A. Manuals: Furnish manuals for equipment where manuals are specified in the equipment specifications or are specified in Division 01.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the electrical work with the other trades, code authorities, utilities and the Architect.

B. Provide and install all trenching, backfilling, conduit, pull boxes, splice boxes, etc. as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Where connections must be made to existing installations, properly schedule all the required work, including the power shutdown periods.

D. When two trades join together in an area, make certain that no electrical work is omitted.

1.8 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Operations: Perform all work in compliance with Division 01.

1. Keep the number and duration of power shutdown periods to a minimum.

2. Show all proposed shutdowns and their expected duration on the construction schedule. Schedule and carry out shutdowns so as to cause the least disruption to operation of the Owner's facilities.

3. Carry out shutdown only after the schedule has been approved, in writing, by the owner. Submit power interruption schedule 15 days prior to date of interruption.

B. Construction Power: Unless otherwise noted in Division 01 of these specifications, contractor shall make all arrangements and provide all necessary facilities for temporary construction power from the owner’s on site source. Energy costs shall be paid for by the Owner.

C. Storage: Provide adequate storage for all equipment and materials which will become part of the completed facility so that it is protected from weather, dust, water, or construction operations.


1.9 DAMAGED PRODUCTS

A. Notify the Architect in writing in the event that any equipment or material is damaged. Obtain approval from the Architect before making repairs to damaged products.

1.10 LOCATIONS

A. General: Use equipment, materials and wiring methods suitable for the types of locations in which they are located.

B. Dry Locations: All those indoor areas which do not fall within the definition below for Wet Locations and which are not otherwise designated on the Drawings.

C. Wet Locations: All locations exposed to the weather, whether under a roof or not, unless otherwise designated on the Drawings.

1.11 SAFETY AND INDEMNITY

A. The Contractor is solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continually and not be limited to normal working hours. The contractor shall provide and maintain throughout the work site proper safeguards including, but not limited to, enclosures, barriers, warning signs, lights, etc. to prevent accidental injury to people or damage to property.

B. No act, service, drawing review or construction review by the Owner, the Engineer or their Consultants is intended to include reviews of the adequacy of the Contractors safety measures in or near the construction site.

C. The Contractor performing work under this Division of the Specifications shall hold harmless, indemnify, and defend the Owner, the Engineer, their consultants, and each of their officers, agents and employees from any and all liability claims, losses, or damage arising out of or alleged to arise from bodily injury, sickness, or death of a person or persons and for all damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property arising directly or indirectly out of or in connection with the performance of the work under this Division of the Specifications, and from the Contractor's negligence in the performance of the work described in the construction contract documents, but not including liability that may be due to the sole negligence of the Owner, the Engineer, their Consultants or their officers, agents and employees.

D. If a work area is encountered that contains hazardous materials, the contractor is advised to coordinate with the owner and it's abatement consultant for abatement of hazardous material by the Owner’s Representative. “Hazardous materials” means any toxic substance regulated or controlled by OSHA, EPA, State of California or local rules, regulations and laws. Nothing herein shall be construed to create a liability for Aurum Consulting Engineers regarding hazardous materials abatement measures, or discovery of hazardous materials.


1.12 ACCESS DOORS

A. The contractor shall install access panels as required where floors, walls or ceilings must be penetrated for access to electrical, control, fire alarm or other specified electrical devices. The minimum size panel shall be 14” x 14” in usable opening. Where access by a service person is required, minimum usable opening shall be 18” x 24”.

B. All access doors installed lower than 7’-0” above finished floor and exposed to public access shall have keyed locks.

C. Where specific information or details relating to access panels differ from Division 16[26] paragraph 1.12 of these specifications, or shown on the electrical drawings and details or under other Divisions of work, those requirements shall supersede these specifications.

1.13 ARC FLASH

A. The contractor shall install a clearly visible arc flash warning to the inside door of all panelboards and industrial control panels, as well as to the front of all switchboards and motor control centers that are a part of this project.

B. The warning shall have the following wording: line 1 “WARNING” (in large letters), line 2 “Potential Arc Flash Hazard” (in medium letters), line 3 & 4 “Appropriate Personal Protective Equipment and Tools required when working on this equipment”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD OF QUALITY

A. Products that are specified by manufacturer, trade name or catalog number establish a standard of quality and do not prohibit the use of equal products of other manufacturers provided they are established to be equal to the specified product and approved by the Architect prior to installation.

B. Material and Equipment: Provide materials and equipment that are new and are current products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. The two-year period includes use of equipment and materials of similar size under similar circumstances. For uniformity, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of product.

C. Service Support: Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations including their addresses and qualification for support of the equipment. These service organizations shall be convenient to the equipment installation and able to render service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.


D. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures are required to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, furnish printed copies of the recommendations prior to installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until recommendations are received. Failure to furnish recommendation shall be cause for rejection of the equipment or material.

2.2 NAMEPLATES

A. For each piece of electrical equipment, provide a manufacturer's nameplate showing his name, location, the pertinent ratings, the model designation, and shop order number.

B. Identify each piece of equipment and related controls with a rigid laminated engraved plastic nameplate. Unless otherwise noted, nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 0.5 by 2.5 inches unless otherwise noted. Where not otherwise specified, lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style. Engrave nameplates with the inscriptions indicated on the Drawings and, if not so indicated, with the equipment name. Securely fasten nameplates in place using two stainless steel or brass screws.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Fasteners for securing equipment to walls, floors and the like shall be either hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or stainless steel.

2.4 FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment: Refer to each electrical equipment section of these Specifications for painting requirements of equipment enclosures. Repair any final paint finish which has been damaged or is otherwise unsatisfactory, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

B. Wiring System: In finished areas, paint all exposed conduits, boxes and fittings to match the color of the surface to which they are affixed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP

A. Ensure that all equipment and materials fit properly in their installation.

B. Perform any required work to correct improperly fit installation at no additional expense to the owner.


C. All electrical equipment and materials shall be installed in a neat and workmanship manner in accordance with the “NECA-1 Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting”. Workmanship of the entire job shall be first class in every respect.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS

A. Provide the required inserts, bolts and anchors, and securely attach all equipment and materials to their supports.

B. Do all the cutting and patching necessary for the proper installation of work and repair any damage done.

C. Earthquake restraints: all electrical equipment, including conduits over 2 inches in diameter, shall be braced or anchored to resist a horizontal force acting in any direction as per Title 24, part 2, table 16a-o, part 3.

D. Structural work: All core drilling, bolt anchor insertion, or cutting of existing structural concrete shall be approved by a California registered structural consulting engineer prior to the execution of any construction. At all floor slabs and structural concrete walls to be drilled, cut or bolt anchors inserted, the contractor shall find and mark all reinforcing in both faces located by means of x-ray, pach-ometer, or prof-ometer. Submit sketch showing location of rebar and proposed cuts, cores, or bolt anchor locations for approval.

3.3 FIELD TEST

A. Test shall be in accordance with Acceptance testing specifications issued by the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA).

B. Perform equipment field tests and adjustments. Properly calibrate, adjust and operationally check all circuits and components, and demonstrate as ready for service. Make additional calibration and adjustments if it is determined later that the initial adjustments are not satisfactory for proper performance. Perform equipment field test for equipment where equipment field tests are specified in the equipment Specifications. Give sufficient notice to the Architect prior to any test so that the tests may witnessed.

C. Provide instruments, other equipment and material required for the tests. These shall be of the type designed for the type of tests to be performed. Test instrument shall be calibrated by a recognized testing laboratory within three months prior to performing tests.

D. Operational Tests: Operationally test all circuits to demonstrate that the circuits and equipment have been properly installed and adjusted and are ready for full-time service. Demonstrate the proper functioning of circuits in all modes of operation, including alarm conditions.


E. Re-testing will be required for all unsatisfactory tests after the equipment or system has been repaired. Re-test all related equipment and systems if required by the Architect. Repair and re-test equipment and systems which have been satisfactorily tested but later fail, until satisfactory performance is obtained.

F. Maintain records of each test and submit five copies to the Architect when testing is complete. All tests shall be witnessed by the Architect. These records shall include:

1. Name of equipment tested.

2. Date of report.

3. Date of test.

4. Description of test setup.

5. Identification and rating of test equipment.

6. Test results and data.

7. Name of person performing test.

8. Owner or Architect's initials.

G. Items requiring testing shall be as noted in the additional electrical sections of these specifications.

3.4 CLEANING EQUIPMENT

A. Thoroughly clean all soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials.

3.5 PAINTING OF EQUIPMENT

A. Factory Applied: Electrical equipment shall have factory applied painting system which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA ICS 6 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements specified in the technical section.

B. Field Applied: Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces.

3.6 RECORDS

A. Maintain one copy of the contract Drawing Sheets on the site of the work for recording the "as built" condition. After completion of the work, the Contractor shall carefully mark the work as actually constructed, revising, deleting and adding to the Drawing Sheets as required. The following requirements shall be complied with:


1. Cable Size and Type: Provide the size and type of each cable installed on project.

2. Substructure: Where the location of all underground conduits, pull boxes, stub ups and etc. where are found to different than shown, carefully mark the correct location on the Drawings. Work shall be dimensioned from existing improvements.

3. Size of all conduit runs.

4. Routes of concealed conduit runs and conduit runs below grade.

5. Homerun points of all branch circuit.

6. Location of all switchgear, panels, MCC, lighting control panels, pullcans, etc.

7. Changes made as a result of all approved change orders, addendums, or field authorized revisions.

8. As Builts: At the completion of the Work the Contractor shall review, certify, correct and turn over the marked up Drawings to the Architect for his use in preparing "as built" plans.

9. As built Drawings shall be delivered to the Architect within ten (10) days of completion of construction.

3.7 CLEAN UP

A. Upon completion of electrical work, remove all surplus materials, rubbish, and debris that accumulated during the construction work. Leave the entire area neat, clean, and acceptable to the Architect.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 26 05 19 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Line Voltage Wire and Cable

SECTION 26 05 19

LINE VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work of this Section consists of providing all wire and cable rated 600 volts or less, including splices and terminations, as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. See the following Specification Section for work related to the work in this Section:

1. 260542 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings.

2. 260533 Junction and Pull Boxes.


A. Field tests shall be performed as specified in paragraph 3.4 of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Conductors shall be copper, type THHN/THWN/MTW oil and gasoline resistant, 600 volt rated insulation.

B. Conductors shall be stranded copper.

C. Minimum power and control wire size shall be No. 12 AWG unless otherwise noted.

D. All conductors used on this Project shall be of the same type and conductor material.

2.2 CABLES

A. All individual conductors shall be copper with type THHN/THWN, 600 volt rated insulation.

B. Type MC Armored Cable


1. Conductors shall be copper type THHN/THWN/MTW oil and gasoline resistant, 600 volt rated insulation.

2. Conductors shall be stranded copper No.8 AWG and above. 3. Minimum power and control wire shall be No.12 AWG unless otherwise noted. 4. All conductors used on this project shall be of the same type and conductor

material. 5. Light weight aluminum interlocked armor. 6. Integral green insulated grounding conductor.

C. Insulation Marking - All insulated conductors shall be identified with printing colored to contrast with the insulation color.

D. Color Coding - As specified in paragraph 3.03.

E. Special Wiring - Where special wiring is proposed by an equipment manufacturer, submit the special wiring requirements to the Owner's Representative and, if approved, provide same. Special wire shall be the type required by the equipment manufacturer.

F. Other Wiring - Wire or cable not specifically shown on the Drawings or specified, but required, shall be of the type and size required for the application and as approved by the Owner's Representative.

G. Manufacturer - Acceptable manufacturers including Cablec, Southwire, or equal.

2.3 TERMINATIONS

A. Manufacturer - Terminals as manufactured by T&B, Burndy or equal.

B. Wire Terminations – Stranded conductors shall be terminated in clamping type terminations which serve to contain all the strands of the conductor. Curling of a stranded conductor around a screw type terminal is not allowed. For screw type terminations, use a fork type stake-on termination on the stranded conductor. Use only a stake-on tool approved for the fork terminals selected.

C. End Seals - Heat shrink plastic caps of proper size for the wire on which used.

2.4 TAPE

A. Tape used for terminations and cable marking shall be compatible with the insulation and jacket of the cable and shall be of plastic material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Clean Raceways - Clean all raceways prior to installation of cables as specified in Section 260542 - Conduits Raceway and Fittings.


B. All line voltage wiring shall be installed in conduit.

C. All feeder conductors shall be continuous from equipment to equipment. Splices in feeders are not permitted unless specifically noted or approved by the Electrical Engineer.

D. All branch circuit wiring shall be run concealed in ceiling spaces, walls, below floors or in crawl spaces unless noted otherwise.

E. Cable Pulling - Exercise care in pulling wires and cables into conduit or wireways so as to avoid kinking, putting undue stress on the cables or otherwise abrading them. No grease will be permitted in pulling cables. Only soapstone, talc, or UL listed pulling compound will be permitted. The raceway construction shall be complete and protected from the weather before cable is pulled into it. Swab conduits before installing cables and exercise care in pulling, to avoid damage to conductors.

F. Bending Radius - Cable bending radius shall be per applicable code. Install feeder cables in one continuous length.

G. Equipment Grounding Conductors - Provide an equipment grounding conductor, whether or not it is shown on the Drawings, in all conduits or all raceways.

H. Panelboard Wiring - In panels, bundle incoming wire and cables which are No. 6 AWG and smaller, lace at intervals not greater than 6 inches, neatly spread into trees and connect to their respective terminals. Allow sufficient slack in cables for alterations in terminal connections. Perform lacing with plastic cable ties or linen lacing twine. Where plastic panel wiring duct is provided for cable runs, lacing is not necessary when the cable is properly installed in the duct.

3.2 CABLE TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES

A. Splices - UL Listed wirenuts.

B. Terminations - Shall comply with the following:

1. Make up and form cable and orient terminals to minimize cable strain and stress on device being terminated on.

2. Burnish oxide from conductor prior to inserting in oxide breaking compound filled terminal.

3.3 CIRCUIT AND CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION

A. Color Coding - Provide color coding for all circuit conductors. Insulation color shall be white for neutrals and green for grounding conductors. Conductor colors shall be as follows:


VOLTAGE 208/120V Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Ground Green

B. Color coding shall be in the conductor insulation for all conductors #10 AWG and smaller; for larger conductors, color shall be either in the insulation or in colored plastic tape applied at every location where the conductor is readily accessible.

C. Circuit Identification - All underground distribution and service circuits shall be provided with plastic identification tags in each secondary box and at each termination. Tags shall identify the source transformer of the circuit and the building number(s) serviced by the circuit.

3.4 FIELD TESTS

A. All systems shall test free from short circuits and grounds, shall be free from mechanical and electrical defects, and shall show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground of not less than the requirements of the CEC. All circuits shall be tested for proper neutral connections.

B. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on circuits with #2 AWG and larger conductors to be energized with a line-to-neutral voltage of 120 volts or more. Make these tests before all equipment has been connected. Test the insulation with a 500Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The insulation resistance shall be 2 megohms or more. Submit results for review.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 26 05 26 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Grounding

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Conduits, wires, ground rods and other materials for the electrical grounding system.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 260500 - Electrical General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUND ROD

A. "Copperweld" ground rod conforming to or exceeding requirements of U.L. Specification No. 467 (ANSI C-33.8). Rod shall be 3/4" diameter and 10' in length, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

2.2 BELOW GRADE CONNECTIONS

A. Compression fittings, Thomas & Betts, Series 52000, 53000 or 54000 or approved equal.

2.3 HARDWARE

A. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be bronze, cadmium plated steel or other non-corrosive materials, approved for the purpose.

2.4 WATERPROOF SEALANT

A. Use Kearney "Aqua Seal" mastic sealant on all below grade clamp or compression type connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 26 05 26 – Page 2 Calaveras Head Start Building Grounding

A. Grounding and bonding shall be as required by codes and local authorities.

B. All electrical equipment shall be grounded, including, but not limited to, panel boards, terminal cabinets and outlet boxes.

C. The ground pole of receptacles shall be connected to their outlet boxes by means of a copper ground wire connecting to a screw in the back of the box.

D. A green insulated copper ground wire, sized to comply with codes, shall be installed in all conduit runs.

E. All metal parts of pull boxes shall be grounded per code requirements.

F. All ground conductors shall be green insulated copper.

G. The ground system electrodes shall be tested for resistance before the equipment ground conductors are connected. Maximum ground system resistance shall be 25 ohms. Install up to two additional ground rods to meet the 25 ohm requirement. Multiple ground rods shall not be less than 10 feet apart.

H. Grounding of the panels and buildings shall be completed as indicated on the Drawings.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 26 05 33 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes

SECTION 26 05 33

OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The work of this Section consists of providing all required labor, supervision, materials and equipment to satisfactorily complete all electrical installations shown on the drawings, included in these Specification, or otherwise needed for a complete and fully operating facility. The work shall include but not be limited to the following:

B. Furnish and install all required material, supports and miscellaneous material for the satisfactory interconnection of all associated electrical systems.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work of this section.

1. 260500 General Electrical Requirements.

2. 260542 Conduits, Raceway and Fittings.

3. 260519 Line Voltage Wire and Cable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLET BOXES, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. Standard Outlet Boxes: Galvanized, steel, knock-out type of size and configuration best suited to the application indicated on the Drawings. Minimum box size shall be 4 inches square (octagon for most light fixtures) by 1-1/2 inches deep with mud rings as required.

B. Switch boxes: Minimum box size shall be 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with mud rings as required. Install multiple switches in standard gang boxes with raised device covers suitable for the application indicated.

C. Conduit bodies: Cadmium plated, cast iron alloy. Conduit bodies with threaded conduit hubs and neoprene gasketed, cast iron covers. Bodies shall be used to facilitate pulling of conductors or to make changes in conduit direction only. Splices are not permitted in conduit bodies. Crouse-Hinds Form 8 Condulets, Appleton Form 35 Unilets or equal.

D. Sheet Metal Boxes: Use standard outlet or concrete ring boxes wherever possible; otherwise use a minimum 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, NEMA I box sized to Code requirements with covers secured by cadmium plated machine screws located six inches on centers. Circle AW Products, Hoffman Engineering Company or equal.


E. Flush Mounted Pull boxes and Junction boxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush head cover retaining screws, prime coated.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. General:

1. All outlet boxes shall finish flush with building walls, ceilings and floors except in mechanical and electrical rooms above accessible ceiling or where exposed work is called for on the Drawings.

2. Install raised device covers (plaster rings) on all switch and receptacle outlet boxes installed in masonry or stud walls or in furred, suspended or exposed concrete ceilings. Covers shall be of a depth to suit the wall or ceiling finish.

3. Leave no unused openings in any box. Install close-up plugs as required to seal openings.

B. Box Layout:

1. Outlet boxes shall be installed at the locations and elevations shown on the drawings or specified herein. Make adjustments to locations as required by structural conditions and to suit coordination requirements of other trades.

2. Locate switch outlet boxes on the latch side of doorways.

3. Outlet boxes shall not be installed back to back nor shall through-wall boxes be permitted. Outlet boxes on opposite sides of a common wall shall be separated horizontally by at least one stud or vertical structural member.

4. For outlets mounted above counters, benches or backsplashes, coordinate location and mounting heights with built-in units. Adjust mounting height to agree with required location for equipment served.

5. On fire rated walls, the total face area of the outlet boxes shall not exceed 100 square inches per 100 square feet of wall area.

C. Supports:

1. Outlet Boxes installed in metal stud walls shall be equipped with brackets designed for attaching directly to the studs or shall be mounted on specified box supports.

2. Fixture outlet boxes installed in suspended ceiling of gypsum board or lath and plaster construction shall be mounted to 16 gauge metal channel bars attached to main ceiling runners.


3. Fixture outlet boxes installed in suspended ceilings supporting acoustical tiles or panels shall be supported directly from the structure above where pendant mounted lighting fixture are to be installed on the box.

4. Fixture Boxes above tile ceilings having exposed suspension systems shall be supported directly from the structure above.

5. Outlet and / or junction boxes shall not be supported by grid or fixture hanger wires at any locations.

3.2 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. General:

1. Install junction or pull boxes where required to limit bends in conduit runs to not more than 360 degrees or where pulling tension achieved would exceed the maximum allowable for the cable to be installed. Note that these boxes are not shown on the Drawings.

2. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes in concealed locations above accessible ceilings or exposed in electrical rooms, utility rooms or storage areas.

3. Install raised covers (plaster rings) on boxes in stud walls or in furred, suspended or exposed concrete ceilings. Covers shall be of a depth to suit the wall or ceiling finish.

4. Leave no unused openings in any box. Install close-up plugs as required to seal openings.

5. Identify circuit numbers and panel on cover of junction box with black marker pen.

B. Box Layouts:

1. Boxes above hung ceilings having concealed suspension systems shall be located adjacent to openings for removable recessed lighting fixtures.

C. Supports:

1. Boxes installed in metal stud walls shall be equipped with brackets designed for attaching directly to the studs or shall be mounted on specified box supports.

2. Boxes installed in suspended ceilings of gypsum board or lath and plaster construction shall be mounted to 16 gauge metal channel bars attached to main ceiling runners.

3. Boxes installed in suspended ceilings supporting acoustical tiles or panels shall be supported directly from the structure above.


4. Boxes mounted above suspended acoustical tile ceilings having exposed suspension systems shall be supported directly from the structure above.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 26 05 42 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Conduits, Raceways and Fittings

SECTION 26 05 42

CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing conduits, raceways and fittings as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work in this section:

1. 260543 Underground Ducts

2. 260519 Line Voltage Wire and Cable

3. 260533 Junction and Pull Boxes

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS

A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Couplings shall be compression or set-screw type.

B. Flexible Conduit: Flexible metal conduit shall be galvanized steel.

C. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS) shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Couplings shall be threaded type.

D. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit: Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be PVC Schedule 40 (PVC-40 or NEMA Type EPC-40) conduit approved for underground use and for use with 90˚ C wires.

2.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Supports for individual conduits shall be galvanized malleable iron one-hole type with conduit back spacer.

B. Supports for multiple conduits shall be hot-dipped galvanized Unistrut or Superstrut channels, or approved equal. All associated hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized.


C. Supports for EMT conduits shall be galvanized pressed steel single hole straps.

D. Clamp fasteners shall be by wedge anchors. Shot in anchors shall not be allowed.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Provide threaded-type couplings and connectors for rigid steel conduits; provide steel compression (watertight), or steel set-screw type for EMT, (die-cast zinc or malleable iron type fittings are not allowed). Provide threaded couplings and Meyers hubs for rigid steel conduit exposed to weather.

B. Fittings for flexible conduit shall be Appleton, Chicago, IL, Type ST, O-Z Gedney Series 4Q by General Signal Corp., Terryville, CT, T & B 5300 series, or approved equal.

C. Fittings for use with rigid steel shall be galvanized steel or galvanized cast ferrous metal; access fittings shall have gasketed cast covers and be Crouse Hinds Condulets, Syracuse, NY, Appleton Unilets, Chicago, IL, or approved equal. Provide threaded-type couplings and connectors; set-screw type and compression-type are not acceptable.

D. Fittings for use with rigid non-metallic conduit shall be PVC and have solvent-weld-type conduit connections.

E. Union couplings for conduits shall be the Erickson type and shall be Appleton, Chicago, IL, Type EC, O-Z Gedney 3-piece Series 4 by General Signal Corp., Terryvile, CT, or approved equal. Threadless coupling shall not be used.

F. Bushings:

1. Bushings shall be the insulated type.

2. Bushings for rigid steel shall be insulated grounding type, O-Z Gedney Type HBLG, Appleton Type GIB, or approved equal.

G. Conduit Sealants:

1. Fire Retardant Types: Fire stop material shall be reusable, non-toxic, asbestos-free, expanding, putty type material with a 3-hour rating in accordance with UL Classification 35L4 or as specified on the Drawings.


3.1 CONDUIT, RACEWAY AND FITTING INSTALLATION

A. For conduit runs exposed to weather provide rigid metal (GRS).

B. For conduit run underground, in concrete or masonry block wall and under concrete slabs, install minimum ¾” size nonmetallic (PVC) with PVC elbows. Where conduits


transition from underground or under slab to above grade install wrapped rigid metal (GRS) elbows and risers.

C. For conduit runs concealed in steel or wood framed walls or in ceiling spaces or exposed in interior spaces above six feet over the finished floor, install EMT.

D. Flexible metal conduit shall be used only for the connection of recessed lighting fixtures and motor connections unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Liquid-tight steel flexible conduit shall be used for motor connections.

E. The minimum size raceway shall be 1/2-inch unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

F. Installation shall comply with the CEC.

G. From pull point to pull point, the sum of the angles of all of the bends and offset shall not exceed 360 degrees.

H. Conduit Supports: Properly support all conduits as required by the NEC. Run all conduits concealed except where otherwise shown on the drawings.

1. Exposed Conduits: Support exposed conduits within three feet of any equipment or device and at intervals not exceeding NEC requirements; wherever possible, group conduits together and support on common supports. Support exposed conduits fastened to the surface of the concrete structure by one-hole clamps, or with channels. Use conduit spacers with one-hole clamps.

a. Conduits attached to walls or columns shall be as unobtrusive as possible and shall avoid windows. Run all exposed conduits parallel or at right angles to building lines.

b. Group exposed conduits together. Arrange such conduits uniformly and neatly.

2. Support all conduits within three feet of any junction box, coupling, bend or fixture.

3. Support conduit risers in shafts with Unistrut Superstrut, or approved equal, channels and straps.

I. Moisture Seals: Provide in accordance with NEC paragraphs 230-8 and 300-5(g).

J. Where PVC conduit transitions from underground to above grade, provide rigid steel 90’s with risers. Rigid steel shall be half-lap wrapped with 20 mil tape and extend minimum 12” above grade.

K. Provide a nylon pull cord in each empty raceway.

L. Provide galvanized rigid steel factory fittings for galvanized rigid steel conduit.


M. Slope all underground raceways to provide drainage; for example, slope conduit from equipment located inside a building to the pull box or manhole located outside the building.

N. Conduits shall be blown out and swabbed prior to pulling wires, or installation of pull cord in empty conduits.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 26 24 13 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Switchboards, 600 Volts And Below

SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS, 600 VOLTS AND BELOW PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Description of Work: The work of this Section consists of providing switchboards, as

shown on the Drawings and as described herein. 1.02 Related Work:

A. See the following Specification Sections for work related to the work in this Section.


2. 262200 Transformers

3. 262816 Circuit Breakers 1.03 Submittals:

A. Shop Drawings - As specified in Section 260500 and Division 01. For each switchboard furnished under this Contract, submit manufacturer's name, catalog data, and the following information:

1. Switchboard type. 2. Main bus and terminal connection sizes. 3. Location of line connections. 4. Section dimensions. 5. Gutter space. 6. Gauge of boxes and fronts. 7. Finish data. 8. Voltage rating. 9. Breaker manufacturer, types, trip ratings, and interrupting ratings.

B. Before construction of the main (service) switchboard, the contractor shall deliver two

or more copies of the switchboard submittal to P.G.&E. for their approval. The contractor shall deliver one P.G.&E. approved copy of the submittal to the Electrical Engineer for record.

C. Submit operation and maintenance data for switchboards, and circuit breakers including nameplate data, parts lists, manufacturer's circuit breaker time current coordination curves, factory and field test reports, recommended maintenance


procedures and typewritten as-built panel and switchboard schedules. Submit in accordance with Division 01.

1.04 Warranty

A. Manufacturer shall warrant equipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the lesser of one (1) year from date of installation or eighteen (18) months from date of purchase

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 Switchboards:

A. General: Switchboards shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with applicable portions of the latest NEMA, EUSERC, and Underwriter Laboratories standards and the latest requirements of the California Electrical Code. All sections and devices shall be UL listed and labeled.

1. Switchboards shall be dead front, completely self-supporting structure of the

required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one metal, totally enclosed, switchboard. Sides, top, and rear covers shall be code gauge steel, bolted to the switchboard structure.

2. The switchboard shall be furnished with phase and neutral busses of the amps,

volts and phase shown on the Drawings. The bus shall extend the full length of the switchboard. Tapered bus is not acceptable. The switchboard sections, when called for on the plans, shall be as follows:

a. Metering Section and landing lugs; Fully Pacific Gas & Electric Company

compatible.

b. All sections shall include full capacity busing between sections.

c. All sections shall be front aligned and shall have front-connected devices.

3. All buses shall be silver plated copper, supported with high impact, non-tracking insulating material, braced to withstand the mechanical forces exerted during short circuit conditions. The current density of the bus shall not exceed 1000 amperes per square inch of cross section area or the switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area to meet UL standard 891 for temperature rise. Provisions shall be provided for future splicing of additional sections from either end. The neutral bus shall be 100% rated.

4. A ground bus shall be furnished secured to each vertical section structure, and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. The ground bus shall be sized per UL standard 891 and be of the same material as the through bus.

5. The neutral bus in the feeder sections shall be not further than 20 inches from the front of the switchboard.


6. Vertical main bus bars shall be furnished full height to accommodate future branch devices.

7. The switchboard shall be furnished and installed complete with all underground pull sections, utility sections, main device and feeder sections as indicated on the Drawings. Underground pull sections, utility cable termination, transformer and metering sections shall be in accordance with Pacific Gas and Electric Company requirements.

8. The main device, where indicated to be individually mounted, shall be completely isolated from the utility and the feeder sections of the switchboard, both in the device section and the cable section of the switchboard cubicle. The cable section shall also be isolated from the main horizontal bus. The main device cubicle shall have UL service equipment label.

9. Feeder devices shall be group-mounted and be front accessible, furnished with vertical wiring gutter on the front of the distribution sections. Wiring gutters shall be furnished with hinged, code gauge steel formed covers. Unused device space shall be covered with blank code gauge steel covers.

10. All vertical sections comprising the switchboard shall be aligned front and rear.

11. Switchboards for outdoor installation shall be furnished in [stainless steel] NEMA 3R non-walk-in enclosures provided with thermostatically controlled space heaters in each vertical section. Space heaters shall be powered from a circuit breaker protected circuit originating within the switchboard and shall be sized adequately to prevent the formation of condensation. Space heater shall be suitable for operation at 120V AC.

12. All steel surfaces are to be chemically cleaned and treated, providing a bond between paint and metal surfaces to help prevent the entrance of moisture and formation of rust under the paint finish. Switchboard exterior shall be furnished with a grey enamel finish color over a rust inhibiting primer, unless otherwise noted.

B. Circuit Breakers

1. Circuit breakers, unless otherwise indicated, shall be the molded case type with

ratings as indicated on the Drawings. Circuit breakers shall meet the requirements specified under Section 262816 - Circuit Breaker.

2. Main circuit breakers, where indicated to be Molded case type, shall be 80 [100] percent rated, with the frame size and trip plug ratings shown.

C. Customer Metering

1. Instrument Transformers

a. Current transformers shall be window type conforming to, one per phase,

Square D Company Class 4210, General Electric JAG-O or equal.


b. Potential transformers shall be fixed mounted, type Square D Company Class 4210, General Electric JVM, or equal.

2. Power Monitors and Meters

a. The Customer Metering equipment shall be manufactured by Square D

Company, General Electric or equal.

b. Substitutions: substitutions shall be made only after proper verification

c. The switchboard shall be metered using:

i. [Square D Type PM 650] [Square D Type CM 2350]

ii. [Square D Type PM 650]

(A). Digital Power Meter with 0.25% accuracy with the following features: (B). A, V, kW, kVAR, kVA, PF, F, kWh, kVARh, kVAh, KYZ, RS-485

communications, THD, Demand, kWd, kVARd, kVAd, date/time stamping,

(C). predicted power demand, onboard alarms, min/max. readings, data

log, event log

iii. [Square D Type CM 2350]

(A). Digital Circuit Monitor with 0.2% accuracy with the following features: (B). A, V, kW, kVAR, kVA, PF, F, THD, K-Factor, kWh, kVARd, kVAd,

kVARh, kVAh, KYZ output, RS-485 communication port, kWd, kVARd, kVAd, date/time stamping, predicted power demand, onboard alarms, min/max. readings, data log, event log, extend memory (100k), wave form capture, and disturbance monitoring

D. Manufacturer

a. The switchboard shall be Square D, Siemens or I.E.M.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 Installation:

A. Switchboards shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. A 1” conduit shall be installed for new PG& E services from the PG& E Metering Section to the Main Telephone Terminal Board.


C. At switchboards located indoors, a 2” conduit and pull tape shall be installed from outside the switchboard meter cabinet to a location on the exterior of the building. The installation shall meet PG&E Green Book requirements.

3.02 Mounting:

A. Switchboards shall be mounted on a concrete pad, as indicated on the drawings. Reinforcing shall be as shown on the Drawings. The top surface of the pad shall be 2 inches above the surrounding surface.

B. The switchboard shall be bolted to the pad with ½ inch diameter bolts minimum at

each corner of each section unless otherwise noted. C. The switchboard shall be seismically qualified to withstand potential seismic forces up

to UBC Seismic Zone 4. 3.03 Padlocks:

A. Exterior switchboard shall be provided with padlocks keyed as directed by the Owner's Representative. Padlocks shall be supplied by the contractor.

3.04 Field Tests:

A. Insulation resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on circuits to be energized with a line-to-neutral voltage of 120 volts or more. Make these tests after all equipment has been connected, except that equipment which may be damaged by the test voltage shall not be connected. Test the insulation with 500V dc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The insulation resistance shall be 2 megohm or more. Submit results for review.

B. Grounding: Grounding shall conform to Section 260526. C. Continuity: Switchboard circuits shall be tested for continuity prior to energizing.

continuity tests shall be conducted using a dc device with a bell or buzzer. END OF SECTION 26 24 13

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 26 24 16 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Panelboards

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The work of this Section consists of providing panelboards and circuit breakers as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. See the following specification sections for work related to the work in this Section.


2. 260526 Grounding

3. 262816 Circuit Breakers

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings - As specified in Division 01 and Section 260500. For each panelboard and distribution panel furnished under this Contract, submit manufacturer's name, catalog data, and the following information:

1. Panelboard / distribution panel type. 2. Main bus and terminal connection sizes.

3. Location of line connections.

4. Cabinet dimension.

5. Gutter space.

6. Gauge of boxes and fronts.

7. Finish data. 8. Voltage rating.

9. Breaker manufacturer, types, trip rating, and interrupting ratings.

10. When information is available on the Drawings, show breaker circuit numbers

and locations along with trip ratings on a panelboard layout.


B. Single Submittal - A single complete submittal is required for all products covered by this Section.

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit operation and maintenance data for panelboards and circuit breakers including nameplate data, parts lists, factory and field test reports, recommended maintenance procedures and typewritten as-built panel schedules. Submit in accordance with Division 01.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS

A. General: Lighting and Receptacle Panelboards shall be the automatic circuit breaker type. The number and arrangement of circuits, trip ratings, spares and blank spaces for future circuit breakers shall be as shown on the Drawings or, if not shown, 42 circuits. All circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, bolt-on type (unless otherwise noted on drawings ), with 1, 2 or 3 poles a shown, each with a single operating handle. Tandem or piggy-back breakers shall not be used.

B. Nameplates:

1. Each panelboard shall have a field mounted identifying, rigid, plastic nameplate giving the panel identification as shown on the Drawings.

2. Each panelboard shall have a manufacturer's nameplate showing the voltage,

bus rating, number of phases, frequency and number of wires.

C. Construction:

1. Door and trim shall be finished to match finish type and color of surrounding wall. Box shall be hot-dip galvanized, field finished to match the front.

2. Panelboards and enclosures shall conform to requirements of all relevant codes.

Panelboards shall be suitable for use as service equipment.

3. Panelboards shall be furnished with hinged trim fronts with key latch and a typed directory card and holder. Panelboard circuits shall be arranged with odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the right. Provide weatherproof, NEMA type 3R enclosures for outdoor installation.

D. Busbars: Panelboard busbars shall be phase sequence type suitable for bolt-on circuit breakers. All busbars shall be copper.

E. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be the molded case type with trip and interrupting ratings as shown on the Drawings.

F. Manufacturer:


1. Panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer as the switchboard.


3.1 INSTALLATION: Panelboards shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 MOUNTING

A. Panelboards shall be mounted with the top of the box 6'-6" above the floor. Panelboards shall be plumb within 1/8-inch. The highest breaker operating handle shall not be higher than 72 inches above the floor.

3.3 FIELD TESTS

A. Insulation Resistance Tests: Perform insulation resistance tests on circuits with #2 AWG and larger conductors to be energized with a line-to-neutral voltage of 120 volts or more. Make these tests after all equipment has been connected, except that equipment which may be damaged by the test voltage shall not be connected. Test the insulation with a 500Vdc insulation resistance tester with a scale reading 100 megohms. The insulation resistance shall be 2 megohms or more. Submit results for review.

B. Grounding: Grounding shall conform to Section 260526.

C. Continuity: Panelboard circuits shall be tested for continuity prior to energizing. Continuity tests shall be conducted using a dc device with a bell or buzzer.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 26 28 16 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Circuit Breakers

SECTION 26 28 16

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work of this Section consists of providing circuit breakers as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK: See the following Specification Sections for work related to the work in this Section.

A. 260500 General Electrical Requirements

B. 262416 Panelboards

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings - Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 260500 and Division 01. For each circuit breaker furnished under this Contract, submit manufacturer's name, catalog data, and the following information:

1. Terminal connection sizes.

2. Voltage rating.

3. Breaker manufacturer, types, trip ratings and interrupting ratings.

B. Single Submittal - A single complete submittal is required for all products covered by this Section.

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with and Section 260500, operation and maintenance data for circuit breakers including nameplate data, parts lists, manufacturer's circuit breaker timer, current, coordination curves, factory and field test reports and recommended maintenance procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CIRCUIT BREAKER: Each circuit breaker shall consist of the following:

A. A molded case breaker with an over center toggle-type mechanism, providing quick-make, quick-break action. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Multipole circuit breakers shall have variable magnetic trip elements which are set by a single

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 26 28 16 – Page 2 Calaveras Head Start Building Circuit Breakers

adjustment to assure uniform tripping characteristics in each pole. Circuit breakers shall be of the bolt-on type unless otherwise noted.

B. Breaker shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40°C.

C. Each circuit breaker shall have trip indication by handle position and shall be trip-free.

D. Three pole breakers shall be common trip.

E. The circuit breakers shall be constructed to accommodate the supply connection at either end of the circuit breaker. Circuit breaker shall be suitable for mounting and operation in any position.

F. Breakers shall be rated as shown on Drawings.

G. Circuit breaker and/or Fuse/circuit breaker combinations for series connected interrupting ratings shall be listed by UL as recognized component combinations for use in the end use equipment in which it is installed. Any series rated combination used shall be marked on the end use equipment per CEC section 110-22.

H. Breakers shall be UL listed. Circuit breakers shall have removable lugs.

I. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors.

J. Breakers shall be UL listed for installation of mechanical screw type lugs.

K. Circuit breakers serving HACR rated loads shall be HACR type. Circuit breakers serving other motor loads shall be motor rated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MOUNTING

A. The highest breaker operating handle shall not be higher than 72 inches above the floor.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 27 00 00 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Structured Cabling

SECTION 27 00 00

STRUCTURED CABLING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Division 26, Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this

section.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS:

A. ANSI/TIA-492.AAAC-B – Detail Specification for 850-nm Laser-Optimized, 50-um Core Diameter/125-um Cladding Diameter Class 1a Graded-index Multimode Optical Fibers (OM3/OM4). Current Edition

B. ANSI TIA-492.CAAB – Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers with Low Water Peak. Current Edition

C. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 – Generic Communications Cabling for Customer Premises.

D. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 – Commercial Building Communications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements.

E. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 – Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards

F. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 – Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard

G. ANSI/TIA-569-C – Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

H. ANSI/TIA-606-B – Administration Standard for the Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure.

I. ANSI/JSTD-607-B – Commercial Building Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) Requirements for Telecommunications.

J. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).

K. BICSI – TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)


1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The extent of telephone/data system work is indicated and is hereby defined to include, but not be limited to cable, raceway, outlet boxes, device plates, backboard, cabinets, grounding and miscellaneous items required for complete system.

B. Provide complete cable and outlet system as indicated and described herein. Work includes cable, jacks, terminal blocks, wire management, labeling, transient voltage surge suppression, patch cords, and all terminations. Every cable, conductor and fiber strand installed under this Project shall be properly terminated at both ends and tested.

C. Refer to other Division sections for requirements for raceways, boxes and fittings, wiring devices (plates), and supporting devices, and other sections, as applicable.

D. Provide system testing as described herein.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type products used and installation of components. Provide products and materials, which have been UL-listed and labeled. Comply with NEMA standards for low loss extended frequency cable and EIA/TIA TSB-36. Comply with EIA/TIA 568-A, EIA/TIA 569 and manufacturer's recommendations. Comply with EIA/TIA testing standards for horizontal cabling.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Submit manufacturer’s data and installation details for all devices, plates, cable, terminal blocks, patch cords, TVSS, wire management, labels and similar equipment.

B. Submit a copy of certification documents.

C. Any substitution requests must be submitted in writing, and approved by Owner or Owner’s Representative in writing prior to acceptance of bid.

D. Substitution requests may only be made for products equal to or better than as specified in this document. Proof of “equal or better” status is imposed on the contractor, not the Owner.

E. Where a specific manufacturer is called out by name, this is the preferred standard. If substitutions are allowed, they are at the discretion of the Owner and based on performance, suitability, quality, administrational requirements, warranty and other factors deemed important to the Owner.

F. For the purposes of this Specification, “or approved equal” is implied for all specified, named products.


1.6 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS AND TRAINING:

A. The contractor shall be fully conversant and capable in the cabling of low voltage applications such as, but not limited to data, voice and imaging network systems. The Contractor shall at a minimum possess the following qualifications:

1. Possess those licenses/permits required to perform telecommunications

installations in the specified jurisdiction. 2. Provide references of the type of installation detailed in this specification. 3. Personnel trained and certified in fiber optic cabling, splicing, termination and

testing techniques. Personnel must have experience using a light meter and OTDR.

4. Personnel trained in the installation of pathways and support for housing horizontal

and backbone cabling. 5. Personnel knowledgeable in local, state, province and national codes, and

regulations. All work shall comply with the latest revision of the codes or regulations. When conflict exists between local or national codes or regulations, the most stringent codes or regulations shall be followed.

6. Be in business a minimum of five (5) continuous years with a Contractor’s license

in the state where the project is located, and appropriate for the type of work expected herein.

7. Member in good standing of the Certified Installer network associated with the

products listed in this Specification and authorized for use in this Project. Contractor must be a member of this installer program before, during, and through completion of the system installation. Supporting documentation will be required as part of the submittal.

8. Maintain a certified RCDD on staff and utilize certified BICSI Installers for this

project.

1.7 WARRANTY:

A. A Limited Lifetime Product & Performance Warranty covering all components, equipment and workmanship shall be provided to the Owner, submitted in writing with system documentation. The warranty period shall begin on the system's first use by the owner.

1. Horizontal channels shall be completed with end to end solutions, such as the

Berk-Tek Leviton Technologies Solutions. Factory-terminated copper and/or fiber optic patch cords from the solutions provider must be used in order to be eligible for the applicable channel performance guarantees.


2. The Contractor must pre-register the project with the Manufacturer before installation has begun. Following project completion, contractor is responsible for completing all warranty registration procedures on behalf of Owner.

3. Should the cabling system fail to perform its expected operation within this

warranty period due to inferior or faulty material and/or workmanship, the contractor shall promptly make all required corrections without cost to the owner.

B. Certified Installer shall provide labor, materials, and documentation in accordance with Manufacturer requirements necessary to ensure that the Owner will be furnished with the maximum available Manufacturer’s Warranty in force at the time of this project.

C. The installed structured cabling system shall provide a warranty guaranteeing a minimum channel performance above the ANSI/TIA 568-C requirements for all category-rated solutions in this Specification. See Products section for performance criteria. Standards-compliant channel or permanent link performance tests shall be performed in the field with a Manufacturer-approved certification tester in the appropriate channel or permanent link test configuration.

D. Necessary documentation for warranty registration shall be provided to the

manufacturer by the installer (within 10 days) following 100 percent testing of cables.

1. Installer shall submit test results to Manufacturer in the certification tester’s original software files.

2. Installer shall ensure that the warranty registration is properly submitted, with all

required documentation within 10 days of project completion.

3. Certified Contractor/Integrator must adhere to the terms and conditions of the

respective manufacturer’s warranty programs.

E. Installer shall ensure that the Owner receives the manufacturer issued project warranty certificate within 60 calendar days of warranty registration.

1.8 BACKBONE SUBSYSTEMS:

A. Cabinets, patch panels, rack mounting kits for switch and hubs, wire management components, and patch cables shall be furnished and installed by Contractor.

B. No splicing of cables will be required or allowed between endpoints. Armored cable must be grounded at both ends if run outdoors. With armored fiber, no innerduct will be required. Check plans for clarification or exceptions.

1.9 WORK AREA SUBSYSTEM:

A. The connection between the information outlet and the station equipment in the work area is provided by the Work Area Subsystem. It consists of cords, outlets, adapters, and other filters/impedance matching devices.


1.10 HORIZONTAL SUBSYSTEM:

A. The Horizontal Subsystem is the portion of the telecommunications cabling system that extends from the work area telecommunications outlet/connector to the horizontal cross-connect in the telecommunications room/closet. It consists of the telecommunications outlet/connector, the horizontal cables, optional consolidation point, wireless access point cabling, and that portion of the cross-connect in the telecommunications room/closet serving the horizontal cable. Each floor of a building should be served by its own Horizontal Subsystem.

1.11 ADMINISTRATION SUBSYSTEMS:

A. The Administration Subsystem links the Horizontal Subsystem and the Backbone Subsystem together. It consists of labeling hardware for providing circuit identification and patch cords or cross connect wire used for creating circuit connection at the cross connects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL:

A. Provide complete raceway, outlet boxes and miscellaneous items as required.

B. Provide minimum 4-11/16" square outlet box at each outlet location with single gang plaster or tile ring and 1" conduit to cable tray, backboard, or accessible ceiling or floor space.

C. Provide a complete data cabling and device system as described herein. 2.2 HORIZONTAL CABLING SYSTEMS:

A. NETWORK DATA CABLES

1. Provide 4-pair, 100-Ohm balanced unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Cables for each data outlet designated.

2. All UTP cables passing through air handling space shall be PLENUM-rated

(CMP). Cables not passing through air handling spaces may be PVC (CMR) jacketed. Some buildings will require the use of Plenum cable. The contractor is solely responsible for verifying the construction requirements and installing the correct cable. Failure to provide CMP cable in Plenum required spaces will result in the contractor removing and replacing the cable at their own expense.

3. CAT6 UTP cable shall conform to the following requirements:

a. All cables shall be made in the USA of solid annealed copper conductors, 23 AWG, with four individually twisted pairs in a single round cable sheath.

b. Characterized to 750 MHz, 250 MHz greater than the standard c. Outer diameter 0.300" (7.6mm), CMP d. Be made by an ISO 9001 and 14001 Certified Manufacturer.


e. Channel margin guarantees for ANSI/TIA 568-C.2 CAT6 and ISO/IEC 11801 Class EA (margin vs. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 and margin guarantees are for a standard 2-connector channel).

Insertion Loss 3% NEXT 2 dB PSNEXT 3 dB ACR-F (ELFEXT) 5 dB PSACR-F (PSELFEXT) 6 dB Return Loss 1 dB ACR-N 4 dB PSACR-N 5 dB

Approved Products: Berk-Tek BLUE LANmark 10G2 Category 6 CMP cable Berk-Tek BLUE LANmark 10G2 Category 6 CMR cable

B. DATA INFORMATION OUTLETS:

1. COPPER PATCH PANELS

a. Integrated 110-style patch panels shall exceed requirements for Category 6A described in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 and Class EA and Class E component requirements (respectively) as described in ISO/IEC 11801 in a typical standard-density (48 ports per 2RU) configuration.

b. Integrated 110-style patch panels shall be available in flat or angled styles, 24 ports per RU in an un-staggered horizontal layout.

c. Modular (unloaded) patch panels shall accept the same Universal jacks as are used at the workstation area outlets. No special “panel jacks” shall be required.

d. Modular patch panels shall be available in flat, angled, Recessed and recessed angled varieties, in 1RU 24 and 48-port versions or 2RU 48 and 72-port configurations.

e. Patch panels shall be sized to fit an EIA standard, 19 inch relay rack, and made of 16-gauge steel and powder-coated black with white silkscreened lettering.

Approved Product examples: Leviton CAT6 110-style Flat 1RU 24-port Patch Panel Leviton CAT6 110-style Angled 2RU 48-port Patch Panel Leviton QuickPort® 1RU Flat 48-port Patch Panel, # 49255-Q48

2. CAT6 JACKS: Provide modular type Category 6 information outlets for 23-AWG

copper cable. These Category 6 (CAT6) connectors shall be individual snap-in style, and exceed compliance with TIA/EIA-568-C.2 specifications. The connectors shall comply with the following: a. Be 8-position/ 8 conductor (8P8C, RJ45-style) modular jacks.


b. Utilize a universal Keystone-style insertion footprint as the manufacturer’s main “flagship” line of products.

c. Comply with FCC Part 68; UL listed and CSA Certified. Verified to exceed all channel performance requirements in TIA-568-B.2-10 from 1 MHz to 500MHz to support the IEEE 802.an standard for 10 Gigabit Ethernet over UTP Cable.

d. Each 10G connector is to feature an injection molded Cone of Silence™ technology to eliminate alien crosstalk (AXT).

e. Every 10G connector to include polymer springs above the tines (“Retention Force Technology” or similar functionality) to promote return of tines to original position and protect against deformation due to stress of patch cords or inappropriate materials insertion

f. Connector shall have Pair Separation Towers on IDC to facilitate quick, easy terminations without a complete untwist of each pair of conductors.

g. The connector shall be rear 110-type insulation displacement connectors (IDC) with solder-plated phosphor bronze contacts, configured in a 180° orientation such that the punch down field is in the back, allowing for rear termination.

h. The connector shall provide a ledge directly adjacent to the 110-style termination against which the wires can be directly terminated and cut in one action by the installation craftsperson.

i. Connector wiring label shall provide installation color codes for both T568A and T568B wiring schemes on separate labels.

Approved Products:

Leviton eXtreme CAT6 QuickPort Module # 6110G-R*6 Where * = one of 13 colors. See drawings or check with Owner for application.

3. FACEPLATES: Faceplates provide information outlets to the work area.

Contractor shall provide and install single gang faceplate kits to allow up to six data or voice jacks as required for all work area outlets, workstation base feeds, and unused telecom backboxes and furniture openings. Faceplates shall: a. Utilize a Quickport (“keystone”-style) footprint to match the approved

connectivity manufacturer, and be made by the same manufacturer as the connectors.

b. Match colors and materials of the power wiring device plates. c. Support any connectivity media type, including fiber and copper

applications. d. Have write-on designation labels for circuit identification together with a

clear plastic cover. e. Be available in single-gang and double-gang configurations. f. Have surface-mount boxes and standoff rings available for both single and

double gang faceplates. g. Have single-port matching color blank inserts available in packs of 10. h. Shall be stainless steel when installed above accessible ceiling.

Approved Products:

Leviton QuickPort Single-Gang, Plain, # 41080-#xP Leviton QuickPort Single-Gang with ID Windows, # 42080-#xS


Leviton QuickPort Blank Inserts, pack of 10, # 41084-BxB Leviton QuickPort Stainless Steel wallphone plate, # 4108W-0SP

Where: # = number of ports: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 x = color: White (W), Ivory (I), Light Almond (T), Gray (G), Black (E)

2.3 BACKBONE CABLING SYSTEMS

A. BACKBONE CABLES:

1. GENERAL

a. The cable route within a building, connecting closet to closet or closet to the equipment room is the Intrabuilding Backbone Subsystem. It links the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) in the equipment room to Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) and Horizontal Cross-connects (HC) in the Telecommunications Room/Closets (TC). It consists of the backbone transmission media between these locations and the associated connecting hardware terminating this media. These fiber optic cables are typically Multimode.

b. Cables allowed for use in the backbone shall support voice, data, video,

wireless and building infrastructure applications. The bending radius and pulling strength requirements of all backbone cables shall be observed during handling and installation. All cables shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. These cables include:

1) 4-pair 100-ohm unshielded twisted-pair 100% annealed-copper solid-

conductor cables, 100-ohm UTP multi-pair copper cables 2) 50/125µm (micron) Laser-Optimized Multi-Mode Fiber (LOMMF)

cables (OM3 or better) 3) 8.3µm low-water peak singlemode optical fiber cables compliant with

ITU-T G.652D (OS2). 2. VOICE COPPER BACKBONE CABLE

a. Power-Sum Multi-Pair Category 3 cable, 24 AWG solid-copper conductors

in 25-pair binder groups to support 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T and Analog Voice communications at 16Mhz.

Approved Products:

Berk-Tek # 10032111, 25-pr CMP, Gray. Berk-Tek # 10032396, 25-pr CMR, Gray Other multiples of 25 acceptable (50, 100, 200, 300 pair as

required)

3. MULTIMODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE – FIELD TERMINATED

a. See plans and scope of work for total strand count between locations.


Approved Manufacturers

Berk-Tek Indoor Plenum tight buffered cable, 12-strand OM3 Armored, # PDPK012EB3010/25 Berk-Tek Indoor Plenum tight buffered cable, 24-strand OM3 Armored, # PDPK024EB3010/25 Berk-Tek Adventum Indoor/Outdoor Plenum cable, 12 strand, # LTP012AB0403 Berk-Tek OSP cable, Loose Tube 12-strand, # OPD012AB0403 Leviton 12-fiber, 24” fan-out Kit, # 49887-12S

4. MULTIMODE FIBER OPTIC CABLES – FACTORY PRETERMINATED

a. Optical fiber cables shall meet all of the requirements delineated within the specifications of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A. Cables must be a minimum of 24 strands of 50/125µm (micron) OM3 Laser-Optimized Multi-Mode Fiber (LOMMF) for backbone cabling. Cables must be appropriate for the environment in which it is installed (Indoor, Indoor/Outdoor, OFNP or OFNR) but are not suitable for Outside Plant (aerial or underground). Backbone cables may be used rack-to-rack, MDF-to-IDF, or similar intrabuilding applications.

b. Backbone cables will utilize the MTP® connector, employing a multi-strand ferrule capable of supporting 1G, 10G, 40G or 100G Ethernet and beyond. The MTP® connector is not a field-installable connector, and must be factory polished and tested to ensure precise fiber alignment and finish.

c. All optical fiber backbone cables (trunks) shall be factory terminated, dry loose tube, armored jacket, Laser Optimized 50 micron OM4+ for plenum-rated applications. All trunks shall be labeled on both ends with machine labeling and bar coded with unique numbers. Labels shall be highly visible with white background and black lettering, and shall list origination and destination on both ends before break of individual legs. All Fiber Trunk assemblies shall possess the following characteristics at a minimum: 1) Meet or exceed TIA 568-C.0 for OM4 performance at 550 meters for

10 Gigabit and 150 meters for 40 Gigabit or 100 Gigabit transmissions.

2) Optical fiber jackets shall be durable jacketed construction utilizing loose tube design, aramid yarn, and fiberglass strength members for protection.

3) Optical fiber cable trunks shall have a minimum breakout of 3 feet. All fiber trunks shall utilize a heat shrink at the ends of all breakouts to create a smooth breakout of the fiber subunit legs.

4) Optical fiber subunits shall utilize a round construction. Ribbon construction is not acceptable.

5) All fiber connectors must meet TIA 604.X for compatibility. 6) All Multimode optical fiber subunits of 24 strands shall utilize the 24-

strand MTP connector. Optical Fiber subunits of 12 strands shall utilize a 12-strand MTP connector. No optical fiber subunits shall be smaller than 12 strands except for fiber optic jumpers used within the same racks.

7) Multimode fiber optic trunks shall utilize female MTP connectors. 24-


strand MTP connectors shall have a Red boot, and 12-strand MTP shall use a Black boot.

8) Singlemode MTP connectors shall be 12-strand, Angle-Polish, and shall have a Green boot.

9) Manufacturer shall provide MTP® brand connectors for specific superior performance characteristics. Generic MPO-style connectors are not acceptable quality. Use of only ferrules or other essential components will not be acceptable, but only the complete MTP system of components used at each connector assembly.

10) All MTP connectors shall be laser cleaved to increase hardness of tip and precision of end product.

11) All Multimode Fiber Optic Trunks shall utilize Method B Polarity. Singlemode fiber optic trunks shall utilize Method C.

12) All optical fiber cabling trunks shall have a unique identifying label with a bar code for quick identification. The label shall state Manufacturer, trunk length and serial number. Custom labeling shall be available from the manufacturer as an option to aid in deployment during construction.

13) A pulling eye shall be installed on one end of all trunks to help facilitate installation.

14) All optical fiber trunks shall be shipped to project site with a number on the box that will correspond to the layout of the facility for easy identification by the Vendor. All fiber trunks shall include a printed summary test file of all fiber strands inside the box for the Vendor. Additionally, the Manufacturer shall hold all full test data until the project is complete and provide them to Owner along with the applications assurance warranty after the project is completed

15) Installation contractor will re-test all fiber trunks upon completed installation and provide test results to Manufacturer for completion of full product warranty requirements.

16) The contractor shall be responsible for the correct fiber trunk lengths, configuration, and ordering. Fiber Trunk part numbers shall be generated from Leviton.com Online Configurator and must be verified with the Manufacturer prior to ordering.

Approved Products: Leviton Unity Part # FT-EC024JJ100F36C36CY-NNBS (sample part #, actual part # TDB as required)

Where: FT Fiber trunk E (G=OM3) C Dry loose tube OFNP Plenum, Armored jacket 024 24-strand fiber cable (012 = 12 strand) JJ Female 24-strand MTP® on each end (SS= 12-strand MTP/APC) 100F 100’ (use 3-digit length and M for meters) 36 36” breakout, end 1 C 3mm jacketed fiber breakout leg 36C 26” breakout, 3mm tubing, end 2 Y Pulling eye (Yes) NN Staggered ends, 1st and 2nd end both (YY, NN, YN, NY options)


B Polarity Method (B for MM, B for SM) S Standard labeling (C for Custom, supply spreadsheet with order)

B. COPPER TERMINATION BLOCKS

1. Provide termination blocks for Category 3 Backbone Cabling Systems that support up to Category 5e applications and facilitate cross-connection using twisted pair wiring.

2. The connecting hardware block shall support the appropriate Category 3 to 5e

voice (non-VOIP) applications and facilitate cross-connection and/or inter-connection using cross-connect wire. The cross-connect hardware shall be of 66-type (telephone) AND:

3. The cross-connect shall be Category 5e 110-style wiring bases, mountable to wall

or backboard to provide 110 termination capable of supporting voice, security, and Category 5e data applications, including high megabit and shared-sheath applications when used with Category 5e rated cabling.

4. The components shall be UL listed and ANSI/TIA-568-C compliant. Bases shall

support 50, 100 or 300 pair densities with provision for ANSI/TIA-606-B compliant labeling. Plastic bases and blocks shall be made of fire-retardant plastic rated UL 94V-0.

5. Cross-connect blocks shall be available in a variety of insulation displacement

clips (IDC) with and without tails, and support wire sizes: Solid: Wire Ranges 22-26 AWG (0.64mm - 0.40mm).

Approved Products:

Leviton 110 Connecting Block, 100-pair w/legs # 41AW2-100 Leviton Wire Manager w/legs, # 41A10-HCM

C. FIBER OPTIC ENCLOSURES, PANELS AND TRAYS 1. All Fiber interconnect centers, panels, enclosures and trays (units) shall provide

cross-connect, inter-connect, and splicing capabilities and contain cable management for supporting and routing the fiber cables/jumpers.

2. Rack-Mounted, High Density Fiber Interconnect Center: The high density, rack

mounted fiber interconnect center shall:

a. Fiber enclosure shall be available in 1, 2 and 4RU versions to accommodate termination and splicing of fiber. Enclosure depth shall be 17”.

b. Enclosure shall feature a sliding tray which removes completely, front or rear, from enclosure to facilitate field terminations and splicing.

c. Rack-mount enclosure shall have removable transparent hinged doors and slide away covers allow easy access during install and visibility of interior after install.


d. Fiber Adapter Plates (bulkheads) shall accept SC and LC connectors, MTP® adapters, and plug-n-play MTP modules/cassettes.

e. Fiber cable management for routing, storage, and protection shall accept patch cords, tight-buffer fiber, and backbone cables. Rear fiber cable management rings shall be stackable and configurable in ¼, ½, or full ring arrangements. Enclosure shall be constructed of 16-gauge steel with a powder-coated black finish and be mountable in a 19" rack or cabinet frame. An optional locking door feature shall be available.

f. Enclosure shall be available either empty or in custom pre-loaded configurations, with or without locking doors.

Approved Products:

Leviton Opt-X Ultra Rack-Mount 1RU Enclosure, # 5R1UH-S03 Leviton Opt-X Ultra Rack-Mount 2RU Enclosure, # 5R2UH-S06 Leviton Opt-X Ultra Rack-Mount 4RU Enclosure, # 5R4UH-S12 Leviton lock and key # 5L000-KAL Leviton armored cable ground kit, # DPGRD-KIT

3. FIBER OPTIC WALL-MOUNT ENCLOSURES

a. The enclosure shall mount on a wall in an 8"x13", 12"x14" or 17"x15" footprint.

b. Adapters shall be mounted in metal mounting plates and attached to the enclosure using plastic plungers.

c. There shall be cable entrance ports in the top and bottom of the patch panel on both the distribution and patch sides.

d. Cable entrance ports are designed with a strain relief post with a slot capable of holding a tie wrap.

e. The enclosure shall provide strain relief in the form of a grounding lug and multiple tie wrap points.

f. The enclosure shall have a plastic fiber management ring made of high impact UL 94V-0 rated fire-retardant plastic. This ring shall be stackable and adjustable. A port identification label/card shall be provided.

g. The enclosure shall be made of 16-gauge steel powder coated black.

Approved Manufacturers

Leviton Wall Mount Fiber Enclosure, 2-panel, split-metal door w/key, # 5W120-00N, or larger size as appropriate.

D. FIBER TERMINATION PRODUCTS 1. FIBER ADAPTER PLATES

a. Fiber Adapter Plates shall be used to present field-terminated or pre-terminated discrete, single-strand connectors (e.g. LC) to a fiber enclosure panel.


b. The fiber adapter plate shall be modular and functional for use in either a wall-mount or rack-mount enclosure. The adapter plate shall be provided in LC styles, in 12- or 24-fiber configurations. 12-fiber adapter plates are used to terminate 12-fiber cables, and 24-fiber adapter plates are used to terminate 24-fiber (or greater) cables. Avoid deployment of adapter plates with unused ports at the rear.

c. The adapter plate shall be compliant to TIA-568-C.3 (for performance) and respective TIA-604-X (for intermateability) standards. Adapter plates shall use zirconia ceramic sleeves and be offered in standard fiber type colors pursuant to TIA-568-C.3 standards.

d. LC adapter plates shall be precision-molded in the USA and integrated to eliminate “rattle” and loose fit. All ferrules shall be zirconia-ceramic. Adapter plates shall be offered in standard fiber type colors. Singlemode colors are typically BLUE, Multimode are typically AQUA.

Approved Products:

Leviton Opt-X Fiber Adapter Plate, 12 LC SM Blue, #5F100-2LL Leviton Opt-X Fiber Adapter Plate, 24 LC SM Blue, #5F100-4LL Leviton Opt-X Fiber Adapter Plate, 12 LC MM Aqua, #5F100-2QL Leviton Opt-X Fiber Adapter Plate, 24 LC MM Aqua, #5F100-4QL

2. FIBER CONNECTORS

a. The fiber optic connector shall meet or exceed the requirements described in ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 and ANSI/TIA-604-3 (LC) Connector Intermateablity Standards

b. Connector shall be pre polished and field installable to eliminate the need for hand polishing, bonding, or epoxy in the field.

c. Connector shall be provided in LC, single-mode or multimode (laser optimized) configurations, terminated on 250 or 900 μm buffered fiber and/or 2mm or 3 mm jacketed fiber.

d. Maximum connector insertion loss shall be no greater than 0.5 dB, with an average of 0.1 dB (MM) or 0.2dB (SM). Typical connector return loss shall be 35 dB (multimode) and 56 dB (single mode). All versions shall allow continuity to be verified by use of a visual fault locator (VFL).

e. Connector shall utilize a precision zirconia ceramic ferrule, and be re-terminable up to 3 times during testing without loss of performance.

f. Connector shall require the use of a cleaver with a guaranteed maximum cleaving angle of 2 degrees for multimode and 1 degree for singlemode fibers.

Approved Products:

Leviton FastCAM LC Singlemode, # 49991-SLC Leviton FastCAM LC Multimode, # 49991-LLC Leviton / Lynx cleaver # 49886-LNX or equal

3. MTP® MODULES FOR PRE-TERMINATED CABLES


a. 24-strand Multi-Mode Fiber optic MTP-MTP configured trunks which terminate in LC connectors will land on a 24-strand (12 LC Duplex Port) MTP-LC Cassette module and will utilize a 24-strand MTP connector at each end of the trunk. 12-strand Multi-Mode Fiber optic MTP-MTP configured trunks which terminate in LC connectors will land on a 12-strand (6 LC Duplex Port) MTP-LC Cassette module using 12-strand MTP connectors.

b. 24-strand Multi-Mode Fiber optic MTP-MTP configured trunks which terminate in MTP 40G connectors will land on an MTP - MTP Cassette module with (3) 8-strand MTP connectors on the front. Trunks utilizing 2 or more 24-strand MTP connectors may land on a MTP module displaying (2) 24-strand MTP connectors in the rear, and (6) 8-strand (40G) MTP connectors in the front. Multiple modules may be required if trunk cables are configured with greater strand counts or connectors.

c. The MTP modules shall meet the following requirements: 1) Insertable directly into fiber enclosure panel openings with a push-

pin/grommet latch. 2) Rated for Laser Optimized Multi-mode OM3 optical fiber. 3) Shall utilize a Red male MTP connection at the rear to designate the

24-strand MTP. 4) Shall utilize Method B Polarity. 5) Shall require one Core module at one end of a fiber trunk segment,

and one Edge module at the second end to maintain correct polarity across the system.

6) Core modules will be used at the MDF and Edge modules at the IDF ends of the cable for consistency of design.

7) 40G MTP connector housings at front of module shall be Black.

Approved Products: Leviton Method B polarity, 24-fiber MTP to LC, OM3, Core module # FM-E024CDC0BC Leviton Method B polarity, 24-fiber MTP to LC, OM3, Edge module # FM-E024CDC0BE Leviton Method B polarity, 24-fiber MTP to 3x8-fiber MTP, OM3 module # FM-E024NDC0E Leviton Method B polarity, 2x24-fiber MTP to 6x8-fiber MTP, OM3 module # FM-F048NDC0B

4. SPLICE TRAYS AND CASSETTES

a. Fiber splice trays shall mount to rear of enclosure for terminating bulk fiber optic cable to factory terminated fiber optic pigtails. 1) Splice trays shall be offered in mini and high density versions with

removable clear covers for viewing and inspection of fibers. 2) Incoming fiber shall be secured utilizing a ratchet action foam rubber

padding clamp feature or tie-down points to minimize crushing of fiber.

3) The trays shall accommodate slack management of both single-mode and multimode 250 or 900μm fiber and protection of (up to)


12 or 24 fiber heat shrink style fusion splices. 4) Heat shrink splice sleeves shall be included. Splice tray shall be

made by the fiber enclosure manufacturer.

b. Fiber pigtail fusion splice modules shall mount to front of fiber enclosure for terminating bulk fiber optic cable to factory terminated fiber optic pigtails, and shall be front-removable. 1) Splice Modules shall be offered in 12- or 24-fiber LC for OS2

(Singlemode) and OM3 (Multimode) fiber types. Construction of module shall be of 14-gauge aluminum for robustness and light weight.

2) Splice Modules shall be pre-loaded and routed with respective 3-meter, color-coded, 12-strand pigtail assembly.

3) Individual pigtails shall have maximum insertion loss of 0.4 dB and 0.35 dB for OM3 and OS2 fiber types, respectively. Return Loss shall be greater than 25 dB (for OM3), 55 dB (for OS2/UPC), and 60 dB (for OS2/APC).

4) Individual compartments in splice module shall provide slack storage and bend radius protection for incoming backbone fibers, 900 μm tight-buffer fibers, and fusion-spliced fibers. Incoming 250 μm backbone fibers shall be protected by an included braided mesh sleeve. Heat shrink style splice sleeves and tie wraps shall also be included with module.

Approved Products: Leviton Mini Splice Tray, 12-strand # T5PLS-12F Leviton High-Density Mini Splice Tray, 24-strand # T5PLS-24F Leviton LC 12-Fiber pigtail kit, OS2, #UPPLC-KIT Leviton LC 12-Fiber pigtail kit, OM3, #5LPLC-KIT Or Leviton Opt-X 12-Fiber LC OS2 Splice Module # SPLCS-12L Leviton Opt-X 24-Fiber LC OS2 Splice Module # SPLCS-24L Leviton Opt-X 12-Fiber LC OM3 Splice Module # SPLCS-12A Leviton Opt-X 24-Fiber LC OM3 Splice Module # SPLCS-24A

E. COPPER AND FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS 1. CAT6A PATCH CORDS

a. Provide factory terminated and tested patch cords from the manufacturer of

the structured cabling components. Patch cords must meet or exceed all criteria specified in the horizontal cabling standard subsection above.

b. Copper patch cords shall exhibit the following characteristics: 1) Slimline, integrated snag-less plug design without incorporating the

use of a rubber molded boot. 2) A narrow profile for less congestion in higher density applications

and a strain relief boot ensures long-term network performance 3) Copper Category 6A patch cords shall be Component-rated per TIA

568-C.2-10 for CAT 6 and CAT6A component performance and Independently tested and verified by Intertek (ETL).


4) Outside diameter of 0.225” (CAT6) or 0.240” (CAT6A). 5) 26 AWG stranded conductors for maximum flexibility 6) CAT6A cord complies with TIA 568-C.2-10 component requirements

for connecting hardware from 1 MHz to 500 MHz, ISO 11801 Class EA, IEEE 802.3an to support 10GBASE-T networks and cULus listed.

7) Available Lengths: 3', 5', 7', 10', 15', or 20'

c. Provide factory assembled patch cords meeting or exceeding all criteria specified in the horizontal cabling standard subsection above, in the following quantities: 1) (1) 10’ CAT 6A patch cable per outlet location/faceplate (drop) for

use at the workstation. 2) (1) 5’ (average) CAT 6A patch cable per outlet location/faceplate

(drop) for use at the network switch in the MDF and IDF. 3) (1) 3’ CAT 6A patch cable per outlet location/faceplate (drop) for use

at wireless access points.

Approved Products: Leviton Slimline CAT6A Component-rated Patch Cord, #6AS10-xx* Leviton Slimline CAT6 Patch Cord, # 6D460-xx*

Where:

xx = Length in Feet * = color: White (W), Yellow (Y), Red (R), Blue (L), Green (G), Grey (S),

Black (E)

2. FIBER JUMPERS AND ARRAY CORDS a. Fiber optic LC-LC patch cords, or jumpers, will make LC connections from

the rack termination points to the equipment. The jumpers will meet the following requirements: 1) Factory-manufactured using 50/125 µm Laser Optimized Multi-Mode

OM3 optical fiber. Field terminations on fiber jumpers are not acceptable.

2) Shall utilize A-B polarity. 3) Shall exhibit <0.3 dB insertion loss and -25 dB return loss. 4) Shall be thin, round, 2-strand 2mm fiber cable with duplex “Uni-boot”

reversing polarity LC connector at both ends to minimize congestion at rack and in cable managers.

5) Shall be available in standard lengths of 1, 2, 3, 5 and 10 meters and custom-orderable up to any length of feet or meters

b. Fiber-Optic MTP-MTP “array cords” shall utilize 8-strand MTP (female) to

8-strand MTP (male) connectors in a 3mm breakout jacket. The array cords will meet the following requirements: 1) Array cords shall meet an optical insertion loss not to exceed 0.35

dB per mated connector pair.


2) Array cords shall be available in 1-, 2-, 3-, 5-, and 10-meter lengths. 3) Array cords shall be compliant with TIA-568-C.3 and IEEE 802.3ba

and available in UL Riser or Plenum rated cables (Riser is acceptable for in-rack patching)

4) Meets TIA-568-C.3 and IEEE 802.3ba standards (40/100GbE), and adheres to TIA-942 data center design guidelines.

5) Boot color for 8-strand MTP array cords shall be Dark Gray. 6) MTP shall be pinned on one end, unpinned on the other, and utilize

Method B polarity. c. Provide factory assembled patch cords meeting or exceeding all criteria

specified in the horizontal cabling standard subsection above, in the following quantities: 1) (2) 2m LC duplex fiber jumper for each backbone cable terminated in

IDF and MDF 2) (2) 2m MTP-MTP 8-strand fiber array cord for each backbone cable

terminated in MTP ports at IDF or MDF 3) Verify quantities and configuration with owner prior to delivery.

Approved Products: Leviton LC-LC OM3 Reversing Uniboot duplex jumper, #FPC-

M3RR1VVxxxMAB Leviton LC-LC SM Reversing Uniboot duplex jumper, #FPC-

S2RR1VVxxxMAB Leviton 8-Fiber MTP(f)-MTP(m) Method B OM3 array cord, #5L8MN-

BxxM

Where: xxx or xx = Length in Meters, for example, 010 or 03 as required

F. WIRE MANAGEMENT

1. Provide wiring spindles and channels as necessary to allow neat bundling of all wire and cable on backboard. Provide wiring channel (horizontal) above and/or below each termination block or patch panel, or on the side (vertical) as appropriate. Provide wiring channels by same manufacturer of termination blocks or patch panels. Provide nylon or Velcro type ties for all cables at telephone backboard not run in conduit or channels.

2. Provide 1RU ring-style horizontal wire managers between every 2 patch panels as space allows. Provide 2RU horizontal wire manager between the Orange and Blue sets of patch panels if in the same rack, and above and below each similarly-apportioned bank of patch panels.

a. Cable managers shall be flat, open ring style. b. Do not coil or wind patch cords inside ring-style wire managers. c. Use recessed flat wire manager as needed within enclosed cabinets to

route patch cords to opposite sides, where the rings of the flat wire managers would interfere with cabinet door closure.

Approved Products:

Leviton Horizontal manager, 1RU, # 49253-LPM


Leviton Horizontal manager, 2RU, # 49253-BCM Leviton Recessed Flat Horizontal manager, 1RU, # 49253-RCM

3. Provide full height, front-and-rear, 8” wide Vertical Wire Managers at the side of and between each 2-post and/or 4-post termination rack or frame. If space will not allow, the 5” wide wire manager may be substituted at row ends only, leaving the 8” vertical wire manager between each rack. Owner approval in writing is required prior to this substitution. a. The vertical cable management system shall be cULus listed, PCI rated for

94V-O, ABS rated for UL94HB, and compliant with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B standards.

b. Mounting hardware shall be included to insure the proper installation to infrastructure. It shall mount onto a standard TIA/EIA recognized equipment rack.

c. The management system shall offer an assortment of accessories, including a bend radius slack loop organizer, cable retainers, and shall accommodate top, bottom, side and pass-through cable routing. Dual hinged, cable concealing covers shall be included.

Approved Products:

Leviton Vertical 80"L x 8"W x 8"D channel, black cover, #8980L-VFR 4. For enclosed cabinets, provide horizontal wire management as specified above

and vertical or integrated vertical wire management as described below, pertinent to the cabinet manufacturer.

G. Power Distribution Units (PDU)

1. Provide (2) vertical PDU per rack or wall cabinet. Unswitched, non-surge suppressed. 30” length for wall cabinets and 48” for floor-mounted cabinets.

2. Utilize plug and receptacle style appropriate for installation circuits and equipment interfaces. Approved Products

Leviton P1000 series # P1042-10L Leviton P1000 series # P1044-10L

H. LABELING:

1. The contractor shall provide tags, straps, and adhesive labels. These tags, straps, and adhesive labels shall be of high quality that will endure heat, water, and time.

2. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure, and adhesion requirements of UL

969. 3. Shall be pre-printed using a mechanical means of printing. 4. Where used for cable marking, provide vinyl substrate with a white printing area

and a clear “tail” that self laminates the printed area when wrapped around the cable. The cable marking shall be immediately visible and within two inches from termination point.


5. Where insert type labels are used, provide clear plastic cover over label. 6. Copper patch panel labeling shall be completed with adhesive labeling kit

specifically designed for the panel, Leviton 49257-QHD. 7. Labeling P-touch font size 4MM bold, black on White, 3/8” labeling tape on all

work stations, panels and devices. 8. A round Avery label green in color Product Number: 5463 and a station label

utilizing the same font size as on work station face plate must be installed on ceiling grid below each wireless cable location for identification. See type “D” Wireless Location Detail.

9. Labels shall be numbered consecutively and separate for each type of use. Refer

to Work Station Details for additional information. 10. The contractor shall develop and submit for approval a labeling scheme for the

cable installation. The Owner will negotiate an appropriate labeling scheme with the successful contractor. At a minimum, the labeling system shall clearly identify all components of the system: racks, cables, panels and outlets. The labeling system shall designate the cables origin and destination and a unique identifier for the cable within the system. Racks and patch panels shall be labeled to identify the location within the cable system infrastructure. All labeling information shall be recorded on the as-built drawings and all test documents shall reflect the appropriate labeling scheme. Labeling shall conform to the owner’s Labeling Grammar and the TIA/EIA-606A standard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM:

A. Install raceway and cable system and specified equipment as indicated to comply with NEC and recognized industry practices.

B. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE: 1. Schedule a conference a minimum of five calendar days prior to beginning work

of this section.

2. Agenda: Clarify questions related to work to be performed, scheduling, coordination, etc.

3. Attendance: Communications system installer, General Contractor, Owners

Representatives and any additional parties affected by work of this section.

4. Copy of Manufacturer warranty pre-application, RCDD qualifications, and other material not include in submittals will be provided by Contractor at this time.

C. WARRANTY:


1. A lifetime performance warranty covering all components, equipment and

workmanship shall be submitted in writing with system documentation. The warranty period shall begin on the systems first use by the Owner.

2. The project must be pre-registered with Manufacturer before installation has begun.

3. Should the cabling system fail to perform within its expected operation within this

warranty period due to inferior or faulty material and/or workmanship, the Contractor shall promptly make all required corrections without cost to Owner.

D. PATHWAYS AND TOPOLOGY: 1. Prior to placing any cable pathways or cable, the contractor shall survey the site

to determine job conditions will not impose any obstructions that would interfere with the safe and satisfactory placement of the cables. The arrangements to remove any obstructions with the Project Manager need to be determined at that time.

2. Provide NEC-sized pullboxes for any run greater than 100 feet, or with more than

two ninety-degree bends.

3. Maintain a distance of at least 12 inches from all power conduits and cables, and 6 inches from all fluorescent lighting fixtures. Do not install power feeders 100 amps or greater above or within 5 feet of telecommunications backboard. Do not install telecommunications conduits above power panels or switchboards.

4. The backbone subsystem shall include cable installed in a vertical manner between floor telecommunications room/closets (TCs or IDFs) and the main or intermediate cross-connect in a multi-story building and cable installed horizontally between telecommunications room/closets and the main or intermediate cross-connect in a long single story building.

5. Unless otherwise recommended by the Owner, all fiber cables will be encased in interlocking armor. All fibers will be terminated in the Telecom Rooms or Cabinets in new fiber enclosures equipped with sufficient ports, slack storage space and splice trays if required to terminate and secure all fibers.

6. Adequate riser sleeve/slot space shall be available with the ability to ingress the

area at a later date in all Telecommunications rooms/closets, such that no drilling of additional sleeves/slots is necessary.

7. The backbone cables shall be installed in a star topology, emanating from the

main cross-connect to each telecommunications room/closet. An intermediate cross-connect may be present between the main cross-connect and the horizontal cross-connect. This is known as a hierarchical star topology.


8. Backbone pathways shall be installed or selected such that the minimum bend radius of backbone cables is kept within manufacturer specifications both during and after installation.

9. Do not run fiber cables in conduits which are less than 2” in diameter.

10. All horizontal cables, regardless of media type, shall not exceed 90 m (295 ft) from the telecommunications outlets in the work area to the horizontal cross connect.

11. The combined length of jumpers, or patch cords and equipment cables in the

telecommunications room/closet and the work area shall not exceed 10m (33 ft).

12. Horizontal pathways shall be installed or selected such that the minimum bend radius of horizontal cables is kept within manufacturer specifications both during and after installation.

13. For voice or data applications, 4-pair UTP or fiber optic cables shall be run using

a star topology from the telecommunications room/closet serving that floor to every individual information outlet.

14. The Contractor shall observe the bending radius and pulling strength

requirements of the 4-pair UTP and fiber optic cable during handling and installation.

15. Each run of UTP cable between horizontal portions of the cross-connect in the

telecommunication closet and the information outlet shall not contain splices.

16. In a false ceiling environment, a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) shall be observed between the cable supports and the false ceiling.

17. All horizontal pathways shall be designed, installed and grounded to meet

applicable local and national building and electrical codes.

18. J-hooks shall be provided for all suspended cable, at a semi-irregular spacing not to exceed 5 feet between supports.

19. Install ¾” x 4’ x 8’ fire-rated plywood across all walls in telecom rooms, from 6”

AFF to 8’-6” AFF. Coat with 2 coats of white paint. Do not paint over fire rating stamp.

20. Contractor shall firestop all used pathways which enter or leave the telecom

rooms via conduit, cable tray or slot. Contractor is responsible for installing sleeves at each wall or partition penetration, and firestopping all fire-rated penetrations. Intumescent caulk shall be applied around the outside of each sleeve, and intumescent putty inside the sleeve or conduits around the cables. Appropriate fill ratios must be followed when penetrating fire rated walls.

E. GROUNDING:

1. All grounding / earthing and bonding shall be done to applicable codes, standards and regulations.


2. Telecom Contractor shall bond and ground all telecom room metals. Telecom

Contractor shall provide and install TIA-rated Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) at all MDF and IDF locations, and an in-cabinet grounding busbar at each remote wall-mounted cabinet or telecom enclosure. All ground lugs shall be 2-hole make-up.

3. Electrician will provide connection between TGB and building ground; Telecom

contractor (if separate, otherwise electrician) will provide a busbar and ground all equipment and telecom metals to the busbar.

4. Telecom installer will ground and bond all armored and/or shielded cables, racks,

cabinets, cable tray, ladder racking, and shielded panels to telecom grounding busbar.

5. All grounding and bonding conductors shall be copper and may be insulated.

When conductors are insulated, the sheath shall be green or marked with a distinctive green color, and shall be listed for the application. The minimum bonding conductor size shall be #6 AWG.

6. The Telecommunications Ground Busbar (TGB) shall be dedicated and pre-drilled

copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard sized lugs. This busbar shall have minimum dimensions of .25 inch thick, 4 inches wide, and be variable in length.

7. Two-hole compression ground lugs shall be Chatsworth 40162-901, 40162-904,

40162-909, and 40162-911, or equal, based on the size of the copper conductor to be terminated.

8. All low voltage systems in this project shall be grounded and bonded.

F. CABLES AND TERMINATIONS: 1. Check plans and symbology for final determination of faceplate constitution or

consult with Owner prior to bid.

2. Install additional cables as indicated on the drawings. Do not exceed manufacturers’ recommendations for maximum allowable pulling tension, side wall pressure or minimum bending radius. Use pulling compound as recommended by cabling manufacturer.

3. Install CAT6A cables for Wireless Access Points and cameras, and CAT6

everywhere else unless otherwise noted.

4. Provide a full-size service loop (at least once around the inside edge of the box) in each J-box in the communications system.

5. Install all cable in plenum spaces with J-hooks of at least 1” in width to disperse the weight on the bottom cables. Homerun all cable to nearest TR Cabinet.

6. Coordinate with EIA/TIA 569 tables 4.4-1 and 4.4-2 for conduit and splice box

sizing.


7. Install modular jacks at all outlets shown; one data jack for each data cable at

each faceplate or termination point. Install additional cables and modular jacks as indicated on the drawings.

8. Terminate cables at each jack location and at termination board or patch panel.

Follow industry guidelines and manufacturers’ recommendations and procedures as required. All termination hardware shall be rated to exceed Category 6 specifications as specified above.

9. Label and identify each outlet and cable for data circuits. Label at outlet end and

at termination board or patch panel with matching designations.

10. Provide data outlets in surface raceway at 26” on center unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS:

A. Arrange all terminal blocks in a manner that allows natural wiring progression and minimizes crossing of wires.

3.3 PATCH CORDS:

A. Contractor to provide fiber and copper patch cords in quantities as described as outlined above in section 2.4.G. Neatly install (minimum) one 3’, 5’ or 7’ CAT6 or CAT6A patch cord (as appropriate to reduce unnecessary length in wire managers) at the equipment cabinet between patch panel and owner-provided switches for each classroom and computer location. Dress and bundle patch cords as appropriate for final installation. Provide unused patch cables to Owner upon completion of project.

B. Patch cables and fiber optic jumpers must be supplied and installed by the vendor for all terminated data drops, between network switches, building hubs, etc. so that building-wide networking will be operational once all installation is complete.

C. All fiber patch cords and required workstation/equipment patch cords not installed shall be provided in hand to Owners Representative prior to project closeout.

3.4 LABELING:

A. Provide labels appropriate for all components supplied and installed.

B. Each faceplate, cable or data outlet (drop) will be numbered with a unique identifier based on coordination with Owner prior to labeling. Contractor must present labeling system for approval, with all shop drawings, prior to start of construction.

3.5 TESTING:

A. Test all equipment and each outlet, horizontal cable, termination block, patch cords, etc. to verify compliance with requirements. Testing shall consist of attenuation and


NEXT across all splices and devices installed in the field and shall meet latest requirements of EIA/TIA. Re-terminate any cable or connection found to be defective.

B. Tester is to be configured with the specific cable installed, and the Permanent Link test will be performed according to the CAT6A standard methodology. All parameters must exhibit a PASS test result prior to project completion. PASS*, FAIL* or FAIL test results will not be accepted.

C. Repair and resolve any shortcomings in the test results. Mitigation efforts may require re-termination or replacement of the jack, outlet or cable. Repairs or attempts to resolve test failures will be completed solely at the expense of the Contractor.

D. Provide test results to Manufacturer and Owner representative in native Tester format. Upon request, provide a copy of the tester software and license, if needed, at no charge to Owner representative.

E. Include PDF of full test results, summary index in electronic format on CD or memory stick in the O&M package upon project completion.

Approved Tester Products:

Fluke DTX or VERSIV platform Cable Certification testers Linkware Record Management Software

3.6 PROJECT CLOSEOUT:

A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be submitted prior to testing of the system. A total of (4) manuals shall be delivered to the Owner. Manuals shall include all service, installation, and programming information.

B. Provide a full set of “as-built” (redline) drawings in AutoCAD DWG and PDF format. Drawings to depict final location and drop/cable identification numbers and labels which match the test reports. Include (1) hard copy paper format of all as-builts in 30”x42” size or equivalent.

C. Contractor to provide all warranty information to Leviton for processing. Leviton will send warranty document direct to Owner.

3.7 TRAINING:

A. Provide four (8) hours training on the operation and installation of the data system, at job site, at no cost to owner.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 27 41 19 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Assistive Listening System

SECTION 27 41 19

ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Portable assistive listening system.


1. Section 10 14 00 “Signage” for assistive listening signage.


A. Product Data: For assistive listening system. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties, including operational features and functions, and electrical power requirements.


A. Operational and Maintenance Instructions: For assistive listening system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer’s authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.


A. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for delivery, storage, and handling of assistive listening system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of assistive listening system, and related items, as a complete system from a single manufacturer.



A. Provide a complete and operable assistive listening system, meeting the following requirements

1. Sound pressure level shall be 110 dB minimum and 118 dB maximum with a dynamic range on the volume control of 50 dB.

2. Signal-to-noise ratio for internally generated noise shall be 70 dB minimum.

3. Peak clipping shall not exceed 18 dB of clipping relative to the peaks of speech.

2.3 PORTABLE ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM

A. General: Portable assistive listening system, consisting of transmitter with tabletop microphone, portable hand-held/waist-mount receivers with plug-in listening devices, recharging station for receivers, and carrying case.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide assistive listening system by one of the following:

a. Listen Technologies Corporation.

i) Transmitter: LT-84-01.

ii) Tabletop Microphone: LA-277.

iii) Tripod for Transmitter: LT-338.

iv) Receivers: LR-4200-IR.

v) Ear Speakers: LA-401.

vi) Neck Loops: LA-430.

vii) Recharging Station for Receivers: LA-423.

viii) Carrying Case for Transmitter, Receivers, Listening Devices, Recharging Station, and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard.

b. Williams Sound LLC.

i) Transmitter: IR T2.

ii) Tabletop Microphone: MIC 049.

iii) Tripod for Transmitter: STD 007.

iv) Receivers: WIR RX22-4N.

v) Ear Speakers: EAR 022.

vi) Neck Loops: NKL 001.

vii) Recharging Station for Receivers: CHG 3502.

viii) Carrying Case for Transmitter, Receivers, Listening Devices, Recharging Station, and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard.

2. Transmission Type: Infrared.

3. Transmission Range: 18,000 square feet minimum.


4. Components:

a. Transmitter:

i) Number of Channels: Two.

a) Frequencies: 2.3 and 2.8 MHz, or 3.3 and 3.8 MHz.

ii) Input Signal: From manufacturer’s tabletop microphone.

iii) Power Supply: Manufacturer’s standard unit compatible with transmitter.

a) Electrical Power Requirement: 110V AC, 1 amp maximum.

iv) Tabletop Tripod Stand: Manufacturer’s standard tripod stand for supporting and positioning transmitter unit when in use.

b. Receivers: Battery-powered (rechargeable); capable of receiving number of channels and frequencies broadcast from transmitter.

i) Quantity: 2 minimum.

ii) Provide power on/off and volume control.

iii) Provide LED display indicating channel information, volume level, and battery charge status.

iv) Ear Speakers: Over-the-ear, cleanable design; plug-in connector to receiver.

a) Quantity: 2 minimum.

v) Neck Loops: For use with hearing aids; safety breakaway design in event of neck loop becoming entangled with object in motion; plug-in connector to receiver.

a) Quantity: 1 minimum.

c. Recharging Station: Charging station for individual battery-powered receivers.

i) Capacity: 2 receivers, minimum.

ii) Electrical Power Requirement: 110V AC.

d. Carrying Case: Manufacturer’s carrying case for transmitter, receivers, listening devices, and recharging station; locking latches; hard-shell exterior with interior foam lining.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Test transmitter and each receiver and listening device for proper operation. Make adjustments per manufacturer’s written instructions to achieve a properly operating system.

B. Deliver portable assistive listening system to Owner.


3.2 TRAINING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to operate and maintain assistive listening system.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 28 31 00 – Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Fire Alarm/Voice Evacuation System

SECTION 28 31 00

FIRE ALARM/VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Division 26, Basic Materials and Methods Sections.

B. Division 21, Fire Suppression System.

1.2 DESCRIPTION:

A. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard 72 for Pro-tected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors.

B. The facility shall have an emergency voice alarm communication system. Digitally

stored message sequences shall notify the building occupants that a fire or life safety condition has been reported. Message generator(s) shall be capable of automatically distributing up to eight (8) simultaneous, unique messages to appropriate audio zones within the facility based on the type and location of the initiating event. The Fire Command Center (FCC) shall also support Emergency manual voice announcement capability for both system wide or selected audio zones, and shall include provisions for the system operator to override automatic messages system wide or in selected zones.

C. The system shall be support additional, alternate Fire Command Centers, which shall

be capable of simultaneous monitoring of all system events. Alternate Fire Command Centers shall also support an approved method of transferring the control functions to an alternate Fire Command Center when necessary. All Fire Command Centers shall be individually capable of assuming Audio Command functions such as Emergency Paging, audio zone control functions, and Firefighter's Telephone communication func-tions.

D. Each designated zone shall transmit separate and different alarm, supervisory and

trouble signals to the Fire Command Center (FCC) and designated personnel in other buildings at the site via a multiplex communication network.

E. The fire alarm system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001:2008 certified company

and meet the requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994

F. The FACP and peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100% by a single U.S. manu-facturer (or division thereof). It’s acceptable for peripheral devices to be manufac-tured outside of the U.S. by a division of the U.S. based parent company.


G. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the installation shall be in compliance with the UL listing.

H. The installing company shall employ NICET (minimum Level III Fire Alarm Technolo-

gy) technicians on site to guide the final checkout and to ensure the systems integrity.

1.3 SCOPE:

A. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be in-stalled in accordance to the project specifications and drawings.

B. Basic Performance:

1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall

be encoded on NFPA Style 4 (Class B) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). 2. Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style D) as part of an

addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit. 3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style Z) as

part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit. 4. On Style 6 or 7 (Class A) configurations a single ground fault or open circuit on

the system Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm.

5. Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure (or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.

6. Speaker circuits may be controlled by NAC outputs built into the amplifiers, which shall function as addressable points on the Digital Audio Loop.

7. NAC speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is a minimum of one speaker circuit per floor of the building or smoke zone whichever is greater.

8. Audio amplifiers and tone generating equipment shall be electrically supervised for normal and abnormal conditions.

9. NAC speaker circuits and control equipment shall be arranged such that loss of any one (1) speaker circuit will not cause the loss of any other speaker circuit in the system.

Two-way emergency telephone communication circuits shall be supervised for open and short circuit conditions.

Speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is a minimum of one speaker circuit per smoke zone.

Speaker circuits shall be electrically supervised for open and short circuit conditions. If a short circuit exists on a speaker circuit, it shall not be possible to activate that circuit.

10. Audio amplifiers and tone generating equipment shall be electrically supervised for abnormal conditions. Digital amplifiers shall provide built-in speaker circuits, field configurable as four Class B (Style Y), or two Class A (Style Z) circuits.

11. Digital amplifiers shall be capable of storing up to two minutes of digitally recorded audio messages and tones. The digital amplifiers shall also be capable of supervising the connection to the associated digital message generator, and upon loss of that connection shall be capable of one of the following system responses:


a. The digital amplifier shall automatically broadcast the stored audio message.

b. The digital amplifier shall switch to a mode where a local bus input on the digital amplifier will accept an input to initiate a broadcast of the stored message. This bus input shall be connected to a NAC on a local FACP for the purpose of providing an alternate means of initiating an emergency message during a communication fault condition.

c. Speaker circuits shall be either 70VRMS. Speaker circuits shall have 20% space capacity for future expansion or increased power output requirements.

d. Two-way emergency telephone (Fire Fighter Telephone) communication shall be supported between the Audio Command Center and up to seven (7) remote Fire Fighter's Telephone locations simultaneously on a telephone riser.

e. Means shall be provided to connect FFT voice communications to the speaker circuits in order to allow voice paging over the speaker circuit from a telephone handset.

f. The digital audio message generator shall be of reliable, non-moving parts, and support the digital storage of up to 32 minutes of tones and emergency messages, shall support programming options to string audio segments together to create up to 1000 messages, or to loop messages and parts of messages to repeat for pre-determined cycles or indefinitely.

1.4 GUARANTY:

A. The fire alarm control panel, voice panels and any head-end equipment shall have a manufacturer’s warranty of a minimum of 3 years.

1.5 POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE:

A. Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire detection system shall be available from a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty.

B. As part of the bid/proposal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all maintenance, required tests, and list pricing for any replacement products included on the bill of materials, along with the list pricing for products not on the bill of materials; if test and inspection rates are different than full service rates the bid/proposal shall include pricing for all levels for a minimum period of five (5) years Rates and costs shall be valid for the period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty.

C. Include also a quote for unscheduled maintenance/repairs, including hourly rates for technicians trained on this equipment, and response travel costs for each year of the maintenance period. Submittals that do not identify all post contract maintenance costs will not be accepted. Rates and costs shall be valid for the period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty.


1.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if applicable.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:

No. 13 Sprinkler Systems No. 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems No. 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems No. 2001 Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems No. 70 National Electric Code No. 90A Air Conditioning Systems No. 92A Smoke Control Systems No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA: No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 2572 Mass Notification Systems No. 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station No. 228 Door Closers - Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes No. 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 1076 Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances No. 2017 Standard for General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems No.60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

D. Local and State Building Codes.

E. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

1.7 APPROVALS:

A. The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies:

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc FM Factory Mutual FM 6320 Factory Mutual Gas Detection System CSFM California State Fire Marshal


B. The system shall be certified for seismic applications in accordance with the International Building Code (IBC).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL OR NETWORK NODE:

A. Main FACP or network node shall be a FIRELITE, Model MS9200UDLS and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU) and power supply. The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices.

B. In conjunction with intelligent Loop Control Modules and Loop Expander Modules, the main FACP shall perform the following functions:

1. Supervise and monitor all intelligent addressable detectors and monitor modules

connected to the system for normal, trouble and alarm conditions. 2. Supervise all initiating signaling and notification circuits throughout the facility by

way of connection to addressable monitor and control modules. 3. Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the alarm

condition. Operate all notification appliances and auxiliary devices as programmed. In the event of CPU failure, all SLC loop modules shall fallback to degrade mode. Such degrade mode shall treat the corresponding SLC loop control modules and associated detection devices as conventional two-wire operation. Any activation of a detector in this mode shall automatically activate associated Notification Appliance Circuits.

2.2 SYSTEM CAPACITY AND GENERAL OPERATION:

A. The FACP shall be capable of communicating over a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN) utilizing a peer-to-peer, inherently regenerative communication format and protocol. The network shall support communication speed up to 100 Mb and support up to 200 panels / nodes per network.

B. The control panel shall be capable of expansion via up to 10 SLC loops. Each module shall support up to 318 analog/addressable devices for a maximum system capacity of 3180 points. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit 640-character liquid crystal display, individual, color coded system status LEDs, and a keypad for the control of the fire alarm system. Said LCD shall also support graphic bit maps capable of displaying the company name and logo of either company.

C. All the existing program in the system shall be achieved without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm control panel.

D. The FACP shall be able to provide the following software and hardware features:

1. Pre-signal and Positive Alarm Sequence: The system shall provide means to cause alarm signals to only sound in specific areas with a delay of the alarm from


60 to up to 180 seconds after start of alarm processing. In addition, a Positive Alarm Sequence selection shall be available that allows a 15-second time period for acknowledging an alarm signal from a fire detection/initiating device. If the alarm is not acknowledged within 15 seconds, all local and remote outputs shall automatically activate immediately.

2. Smoke Detector Pre-alarm Indication at Control Panel: To obtain early warning of incipient or potential fire conditions, the system shall support a programmable option to determine system response to real-time detector sensing values above the programmed setting. Two levels of Pre-alarm indication shall be available at the control panel: alert and action.

3. Alert: It shall be possible to set individual smoke detectors for pre-programmed pre-alarm thresholds. If the individual threshold is reached, the pre-alarm condition shall be activated.

4. Action: If programmed for Action and the detector reaches a level exceeding the pre-programmed level, the control panel shall indicate an action condition. Sounder bases installed with either heat or smoke detectors shall automatically activate on action Pre-Alarm level, with general evacuation on Alarm level.

5. The system shall support a detector response time to meet world annunciation requirements of less than 3 seconds.

6. Device Blink Control: Means shall be provided to turn off detector/module LED strobes for special areas.

7. NFPA 72 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Test: The system shall provide an automatic smoke detector test function that meets the sensitivity testing requirements of NFPA 72.

8. Programmable Trouble Reminder: The system shall provide means to automatically initiate a reminder that troubles exist in the system. The reminder will appear on the system display and (if enabled) will sound a piezo alarm.

9. On-line or Off-line programming: The system shall provide means to allow panel programming either through an off-line software utility program away from the panel or while connected and on-line. The system shall also support upload and download of programmed database and panel executive system program to a Personal Computer/laptop. A single change to one CPU database shall not require a database download to other CPUs.

10. History Events: The panel shall maintain a history file of the last 4000 events, each with a time and date stamp. History events shall include all alarms, troubles, operator actions, and programming entries. The control panels shall also maintain a 1000 event Alarm History buffer, which consists of the 1000 most recent alarm events from the 4000 event history file.

11. Smoke Control Modes: The system shall provide means to perform FSCS mode Smoke Control to meet NFPA-92A and 90B and HVAC mode to meet NFPA 90A.

12. The system shall provide means for all SLC devices on any SLC loop to be auto programmed into the system by specific address. The system shall recognize specific device type ID's and associate that ID with the corresponding address of the device.

13. Passwords and Users: The system shall support two password levels, master and user. Up to 9 user passwords shall be available, each of which may be assigned access to the programming change menus, the alter status menus, or both. Only the master password shall allow access to password change screens.

14. Block Acknowledge: The system shall support a block Acknowledge for Trouble Conditions


15. Sensitivity Adjust: The system shall provide Automatic Detector Sensitivity Adjust based on Occupancy schedules including a Holiday list of up to 15 days.

16. Environmental Drift Control: The system shall provide means for setting Environmental Drift Compensation by device. When a detector accumulates dust in the chamber and reaches an unacceptable level but yet still below the allowed limit, the control panel shall indicate a maintenance alert warning. When the detector accumulates dust in the chamber above the allowed limit, the control panel shall indicate a maintenance urgent warning.

17. Custom Action Messages: The system shall provide means to enter up to 100 custom action messages of up to 160 characters each. It shall be possible to assign any of the 100 messages to any point.

18. Local Mode: If communication is lost to the central processor the system shall provide added survivability through the intelligent loop control modules. Inputs from devices connected to the SLC and loop control modules shall activate outputs on the same loop when the inputs and outputs have been set with point programming to participate in local mode or when the type codes are of the same type: that is, an input with a fire alarm type code shall activate an output with a fire alarm type code.

19. Read status preview - enabled and disabled points: Prior to re-enabling points, the system shall inform the user that a disabled device is in the alarm state. This shall provide notice that the device must be reset before the device is enabled thereby avoiding activation of the notification circuits.

20. Custom Graphics: When fitted with an LCD display, the panel shall permit uploading of a custom bit-mapped graphic to the display screen.

21. Multi-Detector and Cooperating Detectors: The system shall provide means to link one detector with up to two detectors at other addresses on the same loop in cooperative multi-detector sensing. There shall be no requirement for sequential addresses on the detectors and the alarm event shall be a result of all cooperating detectors chamber readings.

22. ACTIVE EVENT: The system shall provide a Type ID called FIRE CONTROL for purposes of air-handling shutdown, which shall be intended to override normal operating automatic functions. Activation of a FIRE CONTROL point shall cause the control panel to (1) initiate the monitor module Control-by-Event, (2) send a message to the panel display, history buffer, installed printer and annunciators, (3) shall not light an indicator at the control panel, (4) Shall display ACTIVE on the LCD as well a display a FIRE CONTROL Type Code and other information specific to the device.

23. NON-FIRE Alarm Module Reporting: A point with a type ID of NON-FIRE shall be available for use for energy management or other non-fire situations. NON-FIRE point operation shall not affect control panel operation nor shall it display a message at the panel LDC. Activation of a NON-FIRE point shall activate control by event logic but shall not cause any indication on the control panel.

24. Mass Notification Override: The system shall be UL 2572 listed for Mass Notification and shall be capable, based on the Risk Analysis, of being programmed so that Mass Notification/Emergency Communications events take precedence over fire alarm events.

25. Security Monitor Points: The system shall provide means to monitor any point as a type security.

26. One-Man Walk Test: The system shall provide both a basic and advanced walk test for testing the entire fire alarm system. The basic walk test shall allow a single operator to run audible tests on the panel. All logic equation automation


shall be suspended during the test and while annunciators can be enabled for the test, all shall default to the disabled state. During an advanced walk test, field-supplied output point programming will react to input stimuli such as CBE and logic equations. When points are activated in advanced test mode, each initiating event shall latch the input. The advanced test shall be audible and shall be used for pull station verification, magnet activated tests on input devices, input and output device and wiring operation/verification.

27. Control By Event Functions: CBE software functions shall provide means to program a variety of output responses based on various initiating events. The control panel shall operate CBE through lists of zones. A zone shall become listed when it is added to a point's zone map through point programming. Each input point such as detector, monitor module or panel circuit module shall support listing of up to 10 zones into its programmed zone map.

28. Permitted zone types shall be general zone, releasing zone and special zone. Each output point (control module, panel circuit module) can support a list of up to 10 zones including general zone, logic zone, releasing zone and trouble zone. It shall be possible for output points to be assigned to list general alarm. Non-Alarm or Supervisory points shall not activate the general alarm zone.

29. 1000 General Zones: The system shall support up to 1000 general purpose software zones for linking inputs to outputs. When an input device activates, any general zone programmed into that device's zone map will be active and any output device that has an active general zone in its map will be active. It shall also be possible to use general zone as arguments in logic equations.

30. 1000 Logic Equations: The system shall support up to 1000 logic equations for AND, OR, NOT, ONLY1, ANYX, XZONE or RANGE operators that allow conditional I/O linking. When any logic equation becomes true, all output points mapped to the logic zone shall activate.

31. 100 trouble equations per device: The system shall provide support for up to 100 trouble equations for each device, which shall permit programming parameters to be altered, based on specific fault conditions. If the trouble equation becomes true, all output points mapped to the trouble zone shall activate.

32. Control-By-Time: A time based logic function shall be available to delay an action for a specific period of time based upon a logic input with tracking feature. A latched version shall also be available. Another version of this shall permit activation on specific days of the week or year with ability to set and restore based on a 24 hour time schedule on any day of the week or year.

33. Multiple agent releasing zones: The system shall support up to 10 releasing zones to protect against 10 independent hazards. Releasing zones shall provide up to three cross-zone and four abort options to satisfy any local jurisdiction requirements.

34. Alarm Verification, by device, with timer and tally: The system shall provide a user-defined global software timer function that can be set for a specific detector. The timer function shall delay an alarm signal for a user-specified time period and the control panel shall ignore the alarm verification timer if another alarm is detected during the verification period. It shall also be possible to set a maximum verification count between 0 and 20 with the "0" setting producing no alarm verification. When the counter exceeds the threshold value entered, a trouble shall be generated to the panel.

E. Network Communication


1. The FACP shall be capable of communicating over a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN) utilizing a peer-to-peer, inherently regenerative communication format and protocol. The network shall support communication speed up to 100 Mb and support up to 200 panels/nodes per network.

F. Central Processing Unit

1. The Central Processing Unit shall contain and execute all control-by-event (including Boolean functions including but not limited to AND, OR, NOT, ANYx, and CROSSZONE) programs for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Such control-by-event programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost with system primary and secondary power failure.

2. The Central Processing Unit shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation, to the second, of all system events. The time-of-day and date shall not be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail.

3. The CPU shall be capable of being programmed on site without requiring the use of any external programming equipment. Systems that require the use of external programmers or change of EPROMs are not acceptable.

4. The CPU shall provide an EIA-232 interface between the fire alarm control panel and the UL Listed Electronic Data Processing (EDP) peripherals.

5. The CPU shall provide two EIA-485 ports for the serial connection to annunciation and control subsystem components.

6. The EIA-232 serial output circuit shall be optically isolated to assure protection from earth ground.

G. Display

1. The system display shall provide a 640-character backlit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). It shall also provide eleven Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs) that indicate the status of the following system parameters: AC POWER, FIRE ALARM, PREALARM, SECURITY, SUPERVISORY, SYSTEM TROUBLE, OTHER EVENT, SIGNALS SILENCED, POINT DISABLED, CONTROLS ACTIVE, and CPU FAILURE.

2. The system display shall provide a keypad with control capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field programming. Two different password levels with up to ten (one Master and nine User) passwords shall be accessible through the display interface assembly to prevent unauthorized system control or programming.

H. Loop (Signaling Line Circuit) Control Module:

1. The Loop Control Module shall monitor and control a minimum of 318 intelligent addressable devices. This includes 159 intelligent detectors (Ionization, Photoelectric, or Thermal) and 159monitor or control modules.

2. The Loop Control Module shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be capable of operating in a local/degrade mode (any addressable device input shall be capable of activating any or all addressable device outputs) in the unlikely event of a failure in the main CPU.

3. Each Loop shall be capable of operating as a NFPA Style 4 (Class B) circuit.


4. The SLC interface board shall receive analog or digital information from all intelligent detectors and shall process this information to determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble conditions exist for that particular device. Each SLC Loop shall be isolated and equipped to annunciate an Earth Fault condition. The SLC interface board software shall include software to automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector. The analog information may also be used for automatic detector testing and the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements.

I. Digital Voice Command Center

1. The Digital Voice Command Center located with the FACP, shall contain all equipment required for all audio control, emergency telephone system control, signaling and supervisory functions. This shall include speaker zone indication and control, telephone circuit indication and control, digital voice units, microphone and main telephone handset.

2. Function: The Voice Command Center equipment shall perform the following functions:

a. Operate as a supervised multi-channel emergency voice communication system.

Operate as a two-way emergency telephone system control center.

b. Audibly and visually annunciate the active or trouble condition of every speaker circuit and emergency telephone circuit.

c. Audibly and visually annunciate any trouble condition for digital tone and voice units required for normal operation of the system.

d. Provide all-call Emergency Paging activities through activation of a single control switch.

e. As required, provide vectored paging control to specific audio zones via dedicated control switches.

f. Provide a factory recorded "library" of voice messages and tones in standard WAV. File format, which may be edited and saved on a PC running a current Windows® operating system.

g. Provide a software utility capable of off-line programming for the DVC operation and the audio message files. This utility shall support the creation of new programs as well as editing and saving existing program files. Uploading or downloading the DVC shall not inhibit the emergency operation of other nodes on the fire alarm network.

h. Support an optional mode of operation with four analog audio outputs capable of being used with UL 864 fire-listed analog audio amplifiers and SLC controlled switching.

i. The Digital Voice Command shall be modular in construction, and shall be capable of being field programmable without requiring the return of any components to the manufacturer and without requiring use of any external computers or other programming equipment.

j. The Digital Voice Command and associated equipment shall be protected


against unusually high voltage surges or line transients.

L. Audio Message Generator (Prerecorded Voice)/Speaker Control:

1. Each initiating zone or intelligent device shall interface with an emergency voice communication system capable of transmitting a prerecorded voice message to all speakers in the building.

2. Actuation of any alarm initiating device shall cause a prerecorded message to sound over the speakers. The message shall be repeated four (4) times. Pre- and post-message tones shall be supported.

3. A built-in microphone shall be provided to allow paging through speaker circuits. 4. System paging from emergency telephone circuits shall be supported. 5. The audio message generator shall have the following indicators and controls to

allow for proper operator understanding and control:

a. Lamp Test b. Trouble c. Off-Line Trouble d. Microphone Trouble e. Phone Trouble f. Busy/Wait g. Page Inhibited h. Pre/Post Announcement Tone

M. Controls with associated LED Indicators:

1. Speaker Switches/Indicators

a. The speaker circuit control switches/indicators shall include visual indication of active and trouble status for each speaker circuit in the system.

b. The speaker circuit control panel shall include switches to manually activate or deactivate each speaker circuit in the system.\

2. Emergency Two-Way Telephone Control Switches/Indicators

a. The emergency telephone circuit control panel shall include visual

indication of active and trouble status for each telephone circuit in the system.

b. The telephone circuit control panel shall include switches to manually activate or deactivate each telephone circuit in the system.

N. Remote Transmissions:

1. Provide local energy or polarity reversal or trip circuits as required. 2. The system shall be capable of operating a polarity reversal or local energy or fire

alarm transmitter for automatically transmitting fire information to the fire department.

3. Provide capability and equipment for transmission of zone alarm and trouble signals to remote operator's terminals, system printers and annunciators.


4. Transmitters shall be compatible with the systems and equipment they are connected to such as timing, operation and other required features.

O. Field Programming

1. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the need for special tools, laptop computers, or other electronic interface equipment. There shall be no firmware changes required to field modify the system time, point information, equations, or annunciator programming/information.

2. All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory.

P. Specific System Operations

1. Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: A means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all addressable intelligent detectors in the system from the system keypad. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window and have a minimum of 9 levels.

2. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the system may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector. The alarm verification delay shall be programmable from 0 to 60 seconds and each detector shall be able to be selected for verification. The FACP shall keep a count of the number of times that each detector has entered the verification cycle. These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands.

Q. System Point Operations:

1. Any addressable device in the system shall have the capability to be enabled or disabled through the system keypad or video terminal.

2. System output points shall be capable of being turned on or off from the system keypad or the video terminal.

3. Point Read: The system shall be able to display the following point status diagnostic functions without the need for peripheral equipment. Each point shall be annunciated for the parameters listed:

a. Device Status. b. Device Type. c. Custom Device Label. d. Software Zone Label. e. Device Zone Assignments. f. Analog Detector Sensitivity. g. All Program Parameters.

4. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall

contain a history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 4000 system events. Each of these events will be stored, with time and date stamp, until an operator requests that the contents be either displayed or printed. The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed; one event at a time, and the actual


number of activations may also be displayed and or printed. History events shall include all alarms, troubles, operator actions, and programming entries.

5. The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems which use volatile memory for history storage are not acceptable.

6. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall automatically interrogate each intelligent system detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time.

7. If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is below or above normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the particular Intelligent Detector will be annunciated on the system display, and printed on the optional system printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.

8. The system shall include the ability (programmable) to indicate a "pre-alarm" condition. This will be used to alert maintenance personal when a detector is at 80% of its alarm threshold in a 60 second period.

2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS:

A. Portable Emergency Telephone Handset Jack

1. Portable emergency telephone handset jacks shall be flush mounted on stainless steel plates as indicated on plans. Handset jacks shall be approved for emergency telephone system application.

2. Insertion of a remote handset plug into a jack shall send a signal to the fire command center which shall audibly and visually indicate the on-line condition, and shall sound a ring indication in the handset.

3. The two-way emergency telephone system shall support a minimum of seven (7) handsets on line without degradation of the signal.

B. Fixed Emergency Telephone Handset

1. The telephone cabinet shall be painted red and clearly labeled emergency telephone. The cabinets shall be located where shown on drawings.

2. The handset cradle shall have a switch connection such that lifting the handset off of the cradle shall send a signal to the fire command center which shall audibly and visually indicate its on-line (off-hook) condition.

3. The two-way emergency telephone system shall support a maximum of seven (7) handsets on line (off hook) without degradation of the signal.

C. Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (UDACT). The UDACT is an interface for communicating digital information between a fire alarm control panel and an UL-Listed central station.

1. The UDACT shall be compact in size, mounting in a standard module position of

the fire alarm control cabinet. Optionally, the UDACT shall have the ability for remote mounting, up to 6,000 feet from the fire alarm control panel. The wire connections between the UDACT and the control panel shall be supervised with one pair for power and one pair for multiplexed communication of overall system status. Systems that utilize relay contact closures are not acceptable.


2. The UDACT shall include connections for dual telephone lines (with voltage detect), per UL/NFPA/FCC requirements. It shall include the ability for split reporting of panel events up to two different telephone numbers.

3. The UDACT shall be capable of transmitting events in 4+2, SIA, and Contact ID. 4. Communication shall include vital system status such as:

a. Independent Zone (Alarm, trouble, non-alarm, supervisory) b. Independent Addressable Device Status c. AC (Mains) Power Loss d. Low Battery and Earth Fault e. System Off Normal f. 12 and 24 Hour Test Signal g. Abnormal Test Signal (per UL requirements) h. EIA-485 Communications Failure i. Phone Line Failure

5. The UDACT shall support independent zone/point reporting when used in the

Contact ID format. In this format the UDACT shall support transmission of up to 3,064 points. This enables the central station to have exact details concerning the origin of the fire or response emergency.

6. The UDACT shall be capable of being programmed with the same programming utility as the host FACP, and saved, edited and uploaded and downloaded using the utility. UDACT shall be capable of being programmed online or offline. The programming utility shall also support upgrading UDACT operating firmware.

7. The UDACT shall be capable of generating Central Station reports providing detailed programming information for each point along with the central station point address.

8. An IP or IP/GSM Communicator option shall be available to interface to the UDACT and be capable of transmitting signals over the internet/intranet or Cellular (GSM) network to a compatible receiver.

D. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks

1. For ease of service all panel I/O wiring terminal blocks shall be removable, plug-in types and have sufficient capacity for #18 to #12 AWG wire. Terminal blocks that are permanently fixed are not acceptable.

F. Smoke Control Annunciator

1. On/Auto/Off switches and status indicators (LEDS) shall be provided for monitoring and manual control of each fan, damper, HVAC control unit, stairwell pressurization fan, and smoke exhaust fan. To ensure compliance the units supplied shall meet the following UL categories: UUKL, PAZX, UDTZ, QVAX as well as the requirements of NFPA 90A, HVAC, and NFPA 92A & 92B, Smoke Control. The control System shall be field programmable for either 90A operation or 92A/B operation to allow for future use and system expansion.

2. The OFF LED shall be Yellow, the ON LED shall be green, the Trouble/Fault LED shall be Amber/Orange for each switch. The Trouble/Fault indicator shall indicate a trouble in the control and/or monitor points associated with that switch. In addition, each group of eight switches shall have two LEDS and one momentary switch which allow the following functions: An Amber LED to indicate an OFF-


NORMAL switch position, in the ON or OFF position; A Green LED to indicate ALL AUTO switch position; A Local Acknowledge/Lamp Test momentary switch.

3. Each switch shall have the capability to monitor and control two addressable inputs and two addressable outputs. In all modes, the ON and OFF indicators shall continuously follow the device status not the switch position. Positive feedback shall be employed to verify correct operation of the device being controlled. Systems that indicate on/off/auto by physical switch position only are not acceptable.

4. All HVAC switches (i.e., limit switches, vane switches, etc.) shall be provided and installed by the HVAC contractor.

5. It shall be possible to meet the requirements mentioned above utilizing wall mounted custom graphic.

2.4 GATEWAY & WEBSERVER OPTIONS:

A. Common Alerting Protocol (CAP) Gateway: The system shall support an optional CAP Gateway (Common Alerting Protocol). The CAP Gateway translates fire system messages to industry standard CAP messages for integration with CAP-compliant clients. A CAP gateway shall be available from the fire alarm control panel manufacturer.

B. LEDSIGN Gateway: The system shall support an optional and proprietary LEDSIGN Gateway to interface to LED signs that will automatically display emergency messages. The signs shall be capable of storing up to 100 messages that can be activated via system programming with the ability to be manually overridden. The Sign Gateway shall support up to 10 independent signs, each sign capable of playing an independent message. Multiple LEDSIGN Gateways can be used in network applications. An LEDSIGN gateway shall be available from the fire alarm control panel manufacturer.

C. BACnet Interface Gateway: The system shall be capable of being interfaced with BACNet compliant clients. A BACnet interface supporting BACnet/IP communication shall be available from the fire alarm control panel manufacturer.

D. MODbus Interface Gateway: The system shall be capable of being interfaced with MODbus compliant clients. A MODbus interface supporting MODbus/TCP communication shall be available from the fire alarm control panel manufacturer.

E. Noti-Fire-Net Gateway: The system shall support an IP based gateway to enable the panel or local Noti-Fire-Net to be connected to an ONYXWorks workstation via the Internet or Intranet. This gateway shall also support the ability to integrate the system to an interactive firefighter’s display. The Noti-Fire-Net Gateway shall be available from the fire alarm control manufacturer.

F. Webserver: The system shall support a webserver allowing remote connection via the Internet or Intranet. Authorized users will have the ability to view panel/network history, event status and device properties. The webserver shall also support sending event information via email or text to up to 50 registered users, the webserver shall be available from the fire alarm control panel manufacturer.


G. Web Portal Interface: The system shall be capable of being interfaced with a web portal to integrate with Inspection and Service Manager utilities. The web portal and inspection and service manager utilities shall be available from the fire alarm control panel manufacturer.

2.5 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES:

A. Addressable Devices – General 1. Addressable devices shall provide an address-setting means using rotary decimal

switches. Addressable devices that require the address be programmed using a programming utility are not an allowable substitute.

2. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade, decimal address switches. Devices shall be capable of being set to an address in a range of 001 to 159.

3. Addressable devices, which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as a DIP-switch, are not an allowable substitute. Addressable devices that require the address be programmed using a special tool or programming utility are not an allowable substitute.

4. Addressable devices, which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as a DIP-switch, are not an allowable substitute. Addressable devices that require the address be programmed using a special tool or programming utility are not an allowable substitute.

5. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel Signaling Line Circuits.

6. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash green under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady red illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the system program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.

7. The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming of the system. The panel on a time-of-day basis shall automatically adjust sensitivity.

8. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72.

9. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with tamper proof feature. Base options shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7 applications. The system shall also support an intelligent programmable sounder base, the programmable sounder base shall be capable of providing multiple tones based on programming and at a minimum be capable of providing a Temp-4 tone for CO (Carbon Monoxide) activation and a Temp-3 tone for fire activations and be capable of being synchronized with other programmable sounder bases and common area notification appliances; 85 DBA minimum.


10. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL).

11. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real-time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of each detector.

12. Addressable devices shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device.

13. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall report an indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold.

14. Addressable modules shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box. An optional surface mount Lexan enclosure shall be available.

B. Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Box (manual station)

1. Addressable manual fire alarm boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status; NOTIFIER model # NBG-12LX. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key.

2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset.

3. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger.

C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector: The intelligent photoelectric smoke detector shall be NOTIFIER model # FSP-851 and shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density.

D. Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector: The intelligent ionization smoke detector shall be NOTIFIER model # FSI-851 and shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measure products of combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of products of combustion.

E. Intelligent Thermal Detectors: The intelligent thermal detectors shall be NOTIFIER FST- series addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. A high heat thermal detector rated at 190 degrees Fahrenheit shall also be available. The thermal detectors shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit.

F. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module


1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm control panel SLCs. The addressable monitor module shall be NOTIFIER model # FMM-1 (Class A or B) or FMM-101 (Class B)

2. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Style D/Class A or Style B/Class B operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.

3. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be no larger than 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1-1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). This version need not include Style D or an LED.

4. For multiple dry contact monitoring a module shall be available that provides 10 Style B or 5 Style D input circuits; NOTIFIER model # XP10-M.

G. Addressable Control Module

1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional circuit of compatible Notification Appliances, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio/visual notification appliances; NOTIFIER model # FCM-1

2. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with a current rating of 2 Amps for Style Z and 3 Amps for Style Y;

3. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised circuit from the main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised UL listed remote supply.

4. For multiple circuit control a module shall be available that provides 6 Style Y (Class B) or 3 Style Z (Class A) control circuits; NOTIFIER model # XP6-C.

H. Addressable Releasing Control Module

1. An addressable FlashScan releasing module shall be available to supervise and control compatible releasing agent solenoids; NOTIFIER model # FCM-1-REL.

2. The module shall operate on a redundant protocol for added protection. 3. The module shall be configurable for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) and support

one 24 volt or two 12 volt solenoids. Add FMM-4-20

I. Addressable Relay Module:

1. Addressable Relay Modules shall be available for HVAC control and other network building functions; NOTIFIER model # FRM-1.

2. The module shall provide two form C relays rated at up to 3 Amps resistive and up to 2.0 Amps inductive.

3. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary devices energize at the same time on the same pair of wires;

4. For multiple relay control a module shall be available that provides 6 programmable Form-C relays; NOTIFIER model # XP6-R.

J. Addressable Two-In / Two-Out Monitor/Relay Module:

1. An addressable Two-In / Two-Out module shall be available; NOTIFIER model # FDRM-1.


2. The two-in/two-out module shall provide two Class B/Style B dry-contact input circuits and two independent Form-C relays rated at up to 3 Amps resistive and up to 2.0 Amps inductive.

K. Isolator Module: Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on an SLC Class A or Class B branch. The isolator module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC loop segment or branch. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protected zone of the building; NOTIFIER model # ISO-X.

1. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit

(disconnect) the SLC. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section.

2. The isolator module shall not require address-setting, and its operations shall be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its normal operation.

3. The isolator module shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated.

L. Serially Connected Annunciator Requirements

1. The annunciator shall communicate to the fire alarm control panel via an EIA 485 (multi-drop) two-wire communications loop. The system shall support two 6,000 ft. EIA-485 wire runs. Up to 32 annunciators, each configured up to 96 points, may be connected to the connection, for a system capacity of 3,072 points of annunciation.

2. An EIA-485 repeater shall be available to extend the EIA-485 wire distance in 3,000 ft. increments. The repeater shall be UL864 approved.

3. Each annunciator shall provide up to 96 alarm and 97 trouble indications using a long-life programmable color LED's. Up to 96 control switches shall also be available for the control of Fire Alarm Control Panel functions. The annunciator will also have an "ON-LINE" LED, local piezo sounder, local acknowledge and lamp test switch, and custom zone/function identification labels.

4. The annunciator may be field configured to operate as a "Fan Control Annunciator". When configured as "Fan Control," the annunciator may be used to manually control fan or damper operation and can be set to override automatic commands to all fans/dampers programmed to the annunciator.

5. Annunciator switches may be programmed for System control such as, Global Acknowledge, Global Signal Silence, Global System Reset, and on/off control of any control point in the system.

6. An optional module shall be available to utilize annunciator points to drive EIA-485 driven relays. This shall extend the system point capacity by 3,072 remote contacts.

7. The LED annunciator shall offer an interface to a graphic style annunciator and provide each of the features listed above.

M. Speakers

1. The Speaker appliance shall be Wheelock Exceeder models as noted on drawings. The speaker shall be listed to UL 1480 for Fire Protective Signaling


Systems. It shall be a dual-voltage transformer speaker capable of operation at 25.0 or 70.7 nominal Vrms. The speaker shall have a frequency range of 400 to 4,000 Hz and shall have an operating temperature between 32°F and 120°F. It shall mount to a 4 x 4 x 2 1/8-inch back box.

2. A universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall speaker products. The notification appliance circuit and amplifier wiring shall terminate at the universal mounting plate.

3. Speakers shall be plug-in and shall have the ability to check wiring continuity via a shorting spring on the universal mounting plate. The shorting spring shall also provide tamper resistance via an open circuit if the device is removed. Speaker design shall isolate speaker components to reduce ground fault incidents.

4. The speaker shall have power taps (from ¼ watt to 2 watts) and voltage that are selected by rotary switches. All models shall have a maximum sound output of 86 dB at 10 feet and shall incorporate an open back construction.

5. All notification appliances shall be backward compatible.

N. Speaker Strobes

1. The Speaker Strobe appliance shall be Cooper Wheelock Exceeder, models as noted on drawings. The speaker strobe shall be listed to UL 1971 and UL 1480 and be approved for fire protective signaling systems. It shall be a dual-voltage transformer speaker strobe capable of operation at 25.0 or 70.7 nominal Vrms. The speaker shall have a frequency range of 400 to 4,000 Hz and shall have an operating temperature between 32°F and 120°F. It shall mount to a 4 x 4 x 2 1/8-inch back box.

2. A universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall speaker strobe products. The notification appliance circuit and amplifier wiring shall terminate at the universal mounting plate. Speaker strobes shall be powered from a non-coded notification appliance circuit output and shall operate on a nominal 24 volts (includes fire alarm panels with built in sync). 24-volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 16.5 to 33 volts. If the notification appliances are not UL 9th edition listed with the corresponding panel or power supply being used, then refer to the compatibility listing of the panel to determine maximum devices on a circuit.

3. Speaker strobes shall be plug-in and shall have the ability to check wiring continuity via a shorting spring on the universal mounting plate. The shorting spring shall also provide tamper resistance via an open circuit if the device is removed. Speaker strobe design shall isolate speaker components to reduce ground fault incidents.

4. The speaker strobe shall have power taps (from ¼ watt to 2 watts) and voltage that are selected by rotary switches. All models shall have a maximum sound output of 86 dB at 10 feet and shall incorporate an open back construction. The strobe shall consist of a xenon flash tube with associated lens/reflector system and operate on 24V. The strobe shall also feature selectable candela output, 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 110, or 115 when operating on 24V. The strobe shall comply with NFPA 72 and the Americans with Disabilities Act requirement for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe’s entire operating voltage range.

5. All notification appliances shall be backward compatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1. INSTALLATION:

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.

B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage.

C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.

D. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting as shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor.

3.2. TEST:

The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72.

A. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.

B. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.

C. Verify activation of all waterflow switches.

D. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.

E. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.

F. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.

G. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.

H. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.

I. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the walk test.

J. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.


K. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual shall be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.

3.3. FINAL INSPECTION:

A. At the final inspection, a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect.

3.4. INSTRUCTION:

A. A documentation cabinet shall be installed adjacent to the FACP/ECS panel and all record documentation shall be stored in the cabinet. The documentation cabinet shall be labeled “SYSTEM RECORD CABINET” and shall be accessible by authorized personnel only.

B. Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided.

B. The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation."


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 31 00 00 - Page 1Calaveras Head Start Building Earthwork

SECTION 31 00 00

EARTHWORK

1.00 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Principal work in this Section:

1. All excavating, filling, backfilling, compacting and grading required for the Project.

2. Adjusting manhole rims, grates, valve boxes, etc. to finished grade indicated.

3. Pumping, draining, shoring, cribbing and other protective measures.

4. Importing fill materials.

5. Shoring and cribbing.

6. Removing excess and unsatisfactory excavated materials from the site.

B. Related work in other Sections:

1. Selective Demolition: Section 02 41 13.

2. Site Clearing: Section 31 10 00.

2. Trenching, backfilling and compacting for utilities: Section 31 23 33.

3. Disconnecting utilities: Section 02 41 13.

4. Re-routing utilities: Sections 33 00 00, 33 10 00, 33 30 00 and 33 40 00.

5. Aggregate base under asphalt paving: Section 32 12 16.

6. Finish grading for landscaping and asphalt paving: Section 32 12 16.


A. Lines and levels: All construction staking shall be provided by Contractor.

B. Inspections and tests: The Owner will employ a Geotechnical Consultant to inspect and test the work of this Section. At completion of this work, the Geotechnical Consultant will be required to submit written report certifying that the site was developed with acceptable materials in accordance with these Specifications and/or the recommendations of the Soil Investigation Report.


1. The Geotechnical Consultant will:

a. Make the tests and inspections of the structural subgrades required by the nature of the subsurface conditions discovered during the progress of the earthwork operations.

b. Approve for use of imported fill material.

c. Inspect all filling, backfilling, and compacting of the soils.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Imported fill materials: Submit samples of proposed imported materials, minimum 40 lbs., tagged with source location and manufacturer to the Owner's Representative at least 15 days prior to import. Material shall not be imported to job site without written approval by the Owner's Representative.

1.04 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION

A. A geotechnical investigation report has been prepared for the site by BAGG Engineers (650) 852-9133, dated May 30, 2017; Job No. SCCOE-05-00, and is available for the Contractor's review from the Owner, the Owner's Representative or the Geotechnical Engineer. All grading, excavation, compaction, and expansive soil remediation shall be per the geotechnical investigation report.

B. Neither the Owner nor the Owner's agents assume any responsibility for conclusions the Contractor may draw from the soil investigation report. The investigation is not a guarantee of subsurface conditions other than at the boring locations. The Contractor/Bidder shall examine the site and determine all conditions affecting the performance of the work.

C. In case of conflict between these Specifications and the recommendations of the geotechnical investigation, the geotechnical investigation shall govern.

2.00 PRODUCTS

2.01 FILL MATERIALS

A. Select (porous) fill under building slab-on-grade and behind retaining and basement walls: Clean gravel or crushed rock complying with CalTrans Standard Specifications, Section 68, Class 2.

B. Imported fill materials and on-site select materials shall be granular in nature, non-expansive, free of organic materials, with a plasticity index of less than 12, and an expansion index of less than 20 and graded as follows:

Sieve Size Percentage Passing Sieve3" 100No. 4 60 - 100


No. 200 Less than 20

C. On-site materials, less debris and organic matter, shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

D. Import shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

3.00 EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTIVE MEASURES

A. Underground utilities: Report any lines encountered that are not indicated, or are in location other than indicated, on the Drawings to the Engineer's attention who will issue instruction for proceeding with the work.

B. Moisture control: Remove water and debris, which would interfere with construction, from excavated areas and keep working areas dry when work is in progress. Grade perimeter of excavations so that water run-off drains away from the excavations.

1. Keep excavations free from loose material and water while fill is placed and compacted.

2. Dispose of water resulting from dewatering operations in a manner that will not cause damage to public or private property, or constitute a nuisance or menace to the public.

3. Make sure that debris and dirt generated by this work does not block existing storm drain system. Keep adjacent paving (outside Contract area) broom clean and free of debris and dirt. Clean any existing facilities that become plugged.

C. Shoring, cribbing and bracing: Provide and install shoring, cribbing and bracing of the excavations as necessary to prevent cave-ins and to support and protect adjacent construction in accordance with Federal, State and local laws. Contractor shall be completely responsible for adequacy and safety of shoring design, construction, and removal.

D. Benchmarks and monuments: Protect benchmarks, monuments and other reference points against displacement and damage. Repair or replace benchmarks, monuments and other permanent survey data that becomes displaced or damaged due to the performance of the work of this Section.

E. Dust palliation: Keep down dust at the site by intermittent watering and sprinkling while the work of this Section is being performed. Earthwork operations shall be conducted so as to prevent windblown dust and dirt. Assume liability for all claims related to windblown dust and dirt. Apply water in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 17 of California Transportation Standard Specifications and with Section 1590 (e) of CAL/OSHA, Title 8.


F. Protection of existing facilities and landscape: Protect all trees, plants, utilities and existing improvements to remain from injury and damage resulting from the work of this Section. Replace all damaged landscaping, improvements or utilities in kind. Refer to Section 31 10 00 for additional requirements on tree protection. Clean staging and other use areas of debris and dust upon completion of project. Re-stripe portions of parking lot where, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, the striping was damaged or destroyed by Contractor's operations.

G. Protection of completed work:

1. Protect finished areas from weather damage to prevent erosion of graded areas.

2. Hauling and other activities on prepared grades which will deform them from required cross sections will not be permitted. Repair and re-compact damage to prepared grades caused by such operations at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.02 EXCAVATING AND FILLING

A. Site clearing is specified in Section 31 10 00 and/or soils report. Verify that existing paving, curbs, light posts and other improvements, and all debris are removed from the site.

B. After site has been properly cleared, stripped, and excavations to rough grade have been made, exposed surface soils in those areas to receive engineered fills, concrete slabs-on-grade, or pavements should be scarified to a depth of 12 inches, moisture conditioned, and compacted (see D). In building areas to receive concrete slabs-on-grade, sub-grade preparation shall extend at least 5 feet beyond the limits of the proposed structures and any adjoining flat work. In pavement areas and for exterior flatwork not connected to buildings, sub-grade preparation shall extend at least 2 feet beyond the back of the curbs or outside limits of flatwork.

C. Any portions of the site which are disturbed or softened by standing water shall be re-graded and re-compacted to 90% of maximum density (ASTM D-1557) as recommended by the Owner's Representative. Portions of the site which show evidence of "pumping" or movement under load shall be excavated, dried out, or filled with bridging rock or other material determined to be suitable by the Owner's Representative, then recompacted to the above standards. All this work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Place fill materials in loose lifts no more than 8" in uncompacted thicknesses. Compaction of fill should be accomplished by mechanical means only. Compact engineering fills consisting of expansive clay soil between 88% to 93% relative compaction at soil moisture content of between 3 and 5 percent above the laboratory optimum moisture content. Compact on-site or imported soils with low expansion potential to at least 90% relative compaction at soil moisture content of


between 1 and 3 percent above the laboratory optimum moisture content. In pavement areas, the upper 12 inches of sub-grade shall be compacted to at least 95% percent relative compaction at soil moisture content 1 to 3 percent above optimum value. Aggregate base material in pavement areas shall be compacted slightly above the optimum moisture content to at least 95% relative compaction. Behind retaining walls, care should be taken to avoid over-compaction of the backfill materials. Avoid excessive wall movements and lateral pressures use lightweight hand-operated equipment to compact backfill within 3 feet behind retaining walls.

E. Do not place fill during unfavorable weather conditions. If work is interrupted by heavy rain, do not resume operations until the proper moisture content and density of the materials have been achieved.

F. Earth and rock, regardless of character and subsurface conditions, shall be excavated to depths shown on Drawings and to the neat dimensions of the footings wherever practicable, to permit pouring of footings and grade beams without use of side forms, except at slab perimeters.

3.04 BACKFILLING

A. Place backfill in loose layers not exceeding 8" thick, as construction operations permit, but not before work to be covered has been inspected and approved, and loose soils and debris have been removed from the excavations.

B. Do not place backfill during unfavorable weather conditions as specified for fill above.

C. Compact backfill to 95% of maximum density (ASTM D1557).

D. Where backfill is required on both sides of a structure, place it simultaneously so that the height of fill remains approximately equal on both sides at all times.

E. Brace construction which has not been designed to withstand eccentric loading during backfilling.

F. Backfill only after the structure to be backfilled against has attained its design strength or has been properly braced, to resist the load of the backfill. No compacting by jetting permitted.

G. Keep rollers and other heavy equipment at least 4 feet from footings, foundations, piers and walls of building and appurtenances.

3.05 GRADING

A. The locations and elevations of all construction are indicated on the Drawings and, unless inconsistencies are brought to the Owner's Representatives attention prior to commencement of work, the Contractor will be held responsible for the proper location and elevations of the completed work.


B. Grade all areas to the lines and levels required. Keep grades straight between changes in elevations. Finish grading tolerance shall not exceed plus or minus one half inch (½") of required elevations, if evenly distributed.

C. The required subgrade elevation shall be such that when subbase and indicated construction are added, the final elevations will be those shown on the Drawings.

3.07 FRAMES, COVERS, GRATES AND VALVE BOXES

A. Adjust frames, grates, valve boxes, and covers of existing manholes, inlets, or other facilities to grade in conformance with Sections 15 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

B. A structure located in a paved area shall not be constructed to final grade until the adjacent pavement or surfacing has been compacted.

3.08 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND UNSUITABLE EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Remove these materials from the Owner's site and dispose of them in a legal manner; this includes materials resulting from all excavations including elevator cylinder, concrete piles and utility excavations. Burning and burying materials on-site is prohibited.


A. Field density tests: To check the degree of compaction of native soils and fill will be taken by the Owner's Representative. The location and frequency of the tests will be at the Owner's Representative discretion.

B. Verification of elevations: Owner will provide the services of a licensed Civil Engineer or Land Surveyor upon completion of earthwork operations to verify that grades are within the tolerances specified. Should the grades be found to be out of tolerance, the site shall be reworked and resurveyed by the Owner at the Contractor's expense.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 31 10 00 - Page 1Calaveras Head Start Building Site Clearing

SECTION 31 10 00

SITE CLEARING

1.00 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Protection of existing trees.

2. Removalof trees and other vegetation.

3. Topsoil stripping.

4. Clearing and grubbing.

5. Removing above-grade improvements.

6. Removing below-grade improvements.

B. Related work in other Sections: The following sections are noted as containing requirements that relate to this Section, but may not be limited to this listing.

1. Earthwork: Section 31 00 00.

2. Selective Site Demolition: Section 02 41 13.


A. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities, unless otherwise noted, without permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place.

1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property.

2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners.


C. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing.

1. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations.

2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch diameter that are cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating, formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible.

3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain which are damaged by construction operations, in a manner acceptable to Architect. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damages to trees and shrubs.

4. Replace trees which cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by arborist.

D. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing removal and alteration work on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner prior to award of contract.

1. Extent of work on adjacent property is indicated on Drawings.

E. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged (to remain property of Owner), and store on Owner's premises where indicated or directed.

2.00 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

3.00 EXECUTION

3.01 SITE CLEARING

A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions as required to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. "Removal" includes digging out and off-site disposing of stumps and roots or other material.

1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner, where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.


B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material.

1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material.

2. Stockpile suitable topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion.

3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil same as specified for disposal of waste material, or use for fill if approved by Architect or Soils Engineer.

C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing.

1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface.

2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain.

3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

D. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on civil, plumbing, mechanical or electrical drawings. Removal of abandoned underground piping or conduit is included under this Section.

2. Back-filling of underground trenches resulting from removal of piping or conduits shall be completed as follows per specification section 31 23 33.

3.02 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property.

B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from Owner's property, except as otherwise noted.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 31 23 33 - Page 1Calaveras Head Start Building Trenching, Backfilling & Compacting

SECTION 31 23 33

TRENCHING, BACKFILLING & COMPACTING

1.00 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


1. Trenching, backfilling and compacting.

2. Surface restoration.


1. Selective demolition: Section 02 41 13 .


3. Storm Drainage Utilities: Section 33 40 00.

4. Piped Utilities: Section 33 00 00.

5. Sanitary Sewerage Utilities: Section 33 30 00.

6. Water Utilities: Section 33 10 00.


A. Reference standards: The applicable provisions of the following govern the work of this Section.

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

a. D1556: Density of Soil in Place by Sand Cone Method.

b. D1557: Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using a 10 lb (4.5 kg) Rammer and 18" (457mm) drop.

2. California Department of Transportation (CDT).

a. Standard Specifications.

b. Standard Test Methods: No. 202, 216, and 231.

3. CAL/OSHA Regulation for Construction: Section 29 CFR.


B. The degree of compaction specified herein shall be determined by California Test Method No. 216 or No. 231. Unless otherwise noted, the percentage specified shall be the minimum allowable.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Product Data under 2.01 Materials, certifying that each material item complies with specified requirements.

1.04 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Comply with OSHA Construction Safety Orders, and specifically with those provisions dealing with trenching and underground construction.

1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Definitions:

1. A trench is defined as an excavation in which the depth is greater than the width of the bottom of the excavation.

2. Excavations for appurtenant structures, such as but not limited to manholes, transition structures, junction structures, vaults, valve boxes, catch basins, thrust blocks, and boring pits shall be deemed to be in the category of trench excavation.

B. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, excavation for pipelines shall be open cut.

2.00 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Select backfill material:

1. Sand or granular materials, free from organic matter, of the quality herein specified. Select backfill material shall have a size and gradation falling within the following limits when determined by California Test No. 202:

Sieve Size Percentage Passing Sieve1" 100No. 4 50-100No. 200 5 max.

2. The minus 200 portion of the material expressed as a percentage multiplied by the Plasticity Index shall not exceed 100.

B. Detectable tape: Detectable tape shall be 5.0 mil composition film containing metalized foil laminated between layers of inert plastic film, such as Detectable


Terra Tape or approved equal. The tape shall be highly resistant to alkalis and acids found in the soil. The tape, when buried 4' deep, shall be detectable by buried pipe or cable locating equipment. The tape shall be 3" wide and bear a continuous printed message warning of the type of utility buried beneath.

3.00 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. General:

1. Prior to trenching excavate at locations where new lines cross other utilities of uncertain depth and determine the elevation of the utility in question to ensure that the new line will clear the potential obstruction.

2. If, after excavation, the crossing utility does present an obstruction, then the line and grade of the new line will be adjusted as directed by the Engineer to clear the utility.

3.02 TRENCHING

A. General:

1. Trenching shall include removal of all water and materials that interfere with construction. Remove water which may be encountered in the trench by pumping or other methods during the pipe laying, bedding and backfill operations. Material shall be sufficiently dry to permit approved jointing.

2. Excavation shall include the construction and maintenance of bridges required for vehicular and pedestrian traffic, support for adjoining structures and where necessary, the rearrangement and repair of adjoining utilities.

3. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to direct vehicular and pedestrian traffic through or around his work area at all times.

4. Except as specified in other Sections, the Contractor shall relocate, reconstruct, replace or repair, at his own expense, existing utilities, walls, fences, services, other structures or improvements of what ever nature, which are in the line of construction or which may be damaged, removed, disrupted or otherwise disturbed by the Contractor whether specifically identified on the Drawings or not. The Contractor shall connect such utilities to existing systems and leave all in a workable and operating condition.

5. Tree roots over 2" in diameter and crossing pipelines shall be protected by using hand excavation; refer to Section 31 10 00. Hand excavation shall mean excavation using the smallest piece of motorized equipment available in combination with manual use of hand equipment, with the intent to minimize the damage to low hanging tree limbs, tree roots and utilities.


B. Existing paving and concrete: The following supplements the requirements of Section 31 10 00.

1. Existing pavement over trench shall be sawcut, removed and hauled away from the job. Existing pavement shall be neatly sawcut along the limits of excavations. If a longitudinal pavement joint or edge of pavement is located within 3' of the limit of excavation, all intervening pavement shall be removed and replaced after completion of backfilling.

2. Existing concrete over the trench shall be sawcut to a minimum depth of 1½" in straight lines either parallel to the curb or at right angles to the alignment of sidewalk. No section to be replaced shall be smaller than 30" in either length or width. If the sawcut would fall within 30" of a construction joint, expansion joint, or edge, or within 12" of a score mark, the concrete shall be removed to the joint, edge or mark.

3. Place boards or other suitable material under backhoe outrigging to prevent damage to paved surfaces.

C. Trench Width:

1. The maximum allowable trench widths at the top of the pipe shall be the following:

Pipe Type Trench Width (Max.)

Cast-iron Outside diameter of barrel plus 18"Ductile-iron Outside diameter of barrel plus 18"PVC Outside diameter of barrel plus 18"VCP Outside diameter of barrel plus 18"Concrete cylinder Outside diameter of barrel plus 18"Welded steel Outside diameter of barrel plus 18"Corrugated metal Outside diameter of barrel plus 18"RCP Outside diameter of barrel plus 18"

a. The maximum trench width shall be inclusive of all shoring.

b. If the maximum trench width is exceeded, the Architect may direct the Contractor to embed or cradle the pipe in concrete at no additional charge to the Owner.

2. In no case shall the free working space on each side of the pipe barrel be less than 6".

D. Open trench:

1. The maximum length of open trench shall be 300' or the distance necessary to accommodate the amount of pipe installed in a single day, whichever is greater. No trench shall be left open at the end of the day.


2. Provisions for trench crossings and free access shall be made at all street crossings, driveways, water gate valves and fire hydrants.

E. Excavation bracing:

1. The excavation shall be supported and excavation operations conducted in accordance with the California Industrial Accident Commission, State of California, Division of Industrial Safety requirements, and OSHA.

2. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish, put in place, and maintain such sheeting and bracing as may be required to support the sides of all excavations (whether above or below the pipe grade), and to prevent any movement which could in any way diminish the required trench section or otherwise injure or delay the work. The sheeting and bracing shall be withdrawn to prevent any earth movement that might overload the pipe.

F. Excavated material:

1. Material excavated and not required for backfill shall be immediately removed and properly disposed of off the Owner's site.

2. Material excavated in streets and roadways shall be laid alongside the trench and kept trimmed to minimize inconvenience to public traffic.

3. Provisions shall be made whereby all storm and wastewater can flow uninterrupted in gutters or drainage channels.

4. Excavated material shall not be stored on landscaping.

3.03 PIPE BEDDING

A. Bedding excavation: Excavate the trench below the grade of the pipe bottom to the following minimum depths:

Pipe Type Depth

Cast-iron 6"Ductile-iron 6"PVC 6"VCP 6"Concrete cylinder 4"Welded steel 4"Corrugated metal 3"RCP 3"

B. Stabilization of trench bottom: When the trench bottom is unstable due to wet or spongy foundation, trench bottom shall be stabilized with gravel or crushed rock. The Engineer will determine the suitability of the trench bottom and the amount of


gravel or crushed rock needed to stabilize a soft foundation. Soft material shall be removed and replaced with gravel or crushed rock when ordered by the Soils Consultant.

C. Placement of bedding material: Sufficient select backfill material as specified in Paragraph 2.01 A (above) shall be placed in trench and tamped to bring trench bottom up to grade of the bottom of pipe. The relative compaction of tamped material shall be not less than 90% as determined by ASTM D1556 or California Test 216. It is the intent of these Specifications to provide uniform bearing under the full length of pipe to a minimum width of 60% of the external diameter.

3.04 TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Initial backfill:

1. Prior to trench backfill, the Owner's Representative will inspect the condition of the trench and laying of pipe.

2. Select backfill material as specified in Paragraph 2.01 A (above) shall be used for initial backfill. After the pipe has been properly laid and inspected, select backfill material shall be placed on both sides of the pipe and compacted to final depth as follows:

Pipe Type Depth

Cast-iron 12" above top of pipeDuctile-iron 12" above top of pipePVC 12" above top of pipeVCP 12" above top of pipeConcrete cylinder 12" above top of pipeWelded steel 12" above top of pipeCorrugated metal ½ outside diameter of pipeRCP (Pipe spring line)

3. Compaction:

a. Initial backfill compaction shall be by mechanical means. The initial backfill material shall be hand tamped in layers not exceeding 4" in uncompacted depth and shall be brought up uniformly on both sides of the pipe to avoid bending or distortional stress. After hand tamping, the relative compaction of the initial backfill material shall be not less than 90%.

b. Compaction testing will be in accordance with one or more of the following methods: California Test No. 216, California Test No. 231, ASTM 1556, or ASTM 1557.

B. Detectable Tape: In trenching continuing non-metallic pipes, detectable tape shall be placed on top of the initial backfill, except with reinforced concrete pipe where the tape shall be placed 12" above top of pipe.


C. Subsequent Backfill:

1. Above the level of initial backfill, the trench shall be backfilled with native material from trench excavation or with select imported material. Subsequent backfill shall be free of vegetable matter, stones, or lumps exceeding 3" in greatest dimension, and other unsatisfactory material. The Soil Engineer shall approve the backfill material prior to replacement.

2. Subsequent backfill compaction shall be by mechanical means. The backfill material shall be placed in layers not exceeding 6" in loose depth, and each layer shall be thoroughly compacted before succeeding layers are placed. The use of machine tampers, except manually held types, shall not be permitted.

3. Relative compaction shall be at least 90%.

D. Backfill Cap: trench backfill shall be capped with 12 inches of backfill compacted to 95% of relative compaction. Lift shall be no more than 6".

3.05 TRENCH SURFACING

A. General: In areas to be improved under separate contract, the trench shall be backfilled and graded to the level of adjacent surfaces. No mounds of earth shall be left along the trench.

B. Temporary surfacing in areas to remain in use by the public:

1. Temporary surfacing shall be 2½" of cut back asphalt on 12" of Class 2 aggregate base.

2. Temporary surfacing shall be laid within one day after backfilling.

3. Before the trenching area is opened to traffic, excess dirt, rock and debris shall be removed and the street surface shall be swept clean.

4. Temporary surfacing shall be maintained to prevent the occurrence of mudholes and prevent the surface from settling below 1" or rising more than 1" from the existing pavement grade.

3.06 INSPECTION

A. Pipes shall be inspected/tested prior to backfilling and compaction, tests as required shall be performed to ensure compliance with these Specifications. The test(s) shall be conducted at no cost to the Owner.

B. A final inspection upon completion of the paving operation shall be made to ensure conformity with the existing pavement surface.

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 32 12 16 - Page 1Calaveras Head Start Building Asphalt Concrete Paving

SECTION 32 12 16

ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING

1.00 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


1. Aggregate base material.

2. Prime coating.

3. Paint binder as required herein.

4. Asphalt concrete.

5. Seal coat.


1 Earthwork: Section 31 00 00.

2 Curbs and gutters: Section 32 16 00.

3 Pavement marking and accessories: Section 32 17 23.


A. Reference standards: Applicable provisions of the following govern the work of this Section.

1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), M 288-96 or Latest Version Thereof.

2. California Department of Transportation (CDT).a. Standard Specifications: Sections 26, 37, 39, 92, 93, and 94.

b. Standard Test Method No. 399A.

B. All work in this Section shall conform to Sections 26, 37, 92, 93, and 94 of the Standard Specifications (CDT).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates: Submit the following:


1. Two copies of material certificates signed by the material producer and the Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds specified requirements.

2. Certified weight or load slip to the Owner's representative for each load of material used in the construction of the asphalt concrete pavement.

1.04 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Prime coat, seal coat and paint binder.

1. Apply only when the ambient temperature is above 50°F and when temperature has not been below 30°F for 12 hours immediately prior to application.

2. Do not apply when base or surfaces are wet or contain an excess of moisture.

B. Construct asphalt concrete surface course only when atmospheric temperature is above 40°F and when base is dry.

2.00 PRODUCTS

2.01 AGGREGATE BASE

A. Class 2 aggregate base, three quarter inch (¾") maximum size, as specified in Section 26 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

B. Mineral aggregate shall be Type B mineral aggregate as specified in Section 39 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

C. Grading of combined aggregates for new pavement shall be ½" maximum size, medium grading, except asphaltic concrete for overlaying existing paved surfaces shall be 3/8" maximum size.

D. Liquid asphalt for prime coat: Grade SC-70 in conformance with Section 93 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

E. Asphaltic emulsion for paint binder and fog seal coat: Emulsified asphalt, Type SS-1h, conforming to Section 94 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

3.00 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Subgrade: The upper 12" of subgrade shall be compacted to 95% per Section 31 00 00 of these Specifications.


B. Crack sealing:

1. Before sealing, cracks shall be cleared of dirt, dust, soil vegetation debris, and other deleterious materials by means of air blowing to a depth of ¼" to ½".

2. Cracks 1/8" in width and greater in existing AC paving to be overlaid and shall be sealed.

3. Applications of crack sealer shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations or as directed by the Owner's representative.

3.02 AGGREGATE BASE

A. Place, spread and compact in conformance with Section 26 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

3.03 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING

A. Proportion, mix, place, spread and compact in conformance with Section 39 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

B. Before placing asphalt concrete on untreated base, apply liquid asphalt prime coat to base course in conformance with Section 39 of the CalTrans Standard Specifications. Apply prime coat at the rate of 0.25 gallons per square yard.

C. Before placing asphalt concrete, apply an asphalt emulsion tack coat (paint binder) to vertical surfaces of existing pavement, curbs, gutters, construction joints and existing pavement to be surfaced, in conformance with Section 39 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

D. Spread and compact asphalt concrete in accordance with Section 39 of CDT Standard Specifications.

E. Apply seal coat to all finished surfaces of asphalt concrete pavement in accordance with Section 37 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

F. After seal coat has been applied, allow ample time for drying before traffic is allowed on the pavement or paint striping is applied.


A. Aggregate Base: The surface of finished aggregate base shall vary no more than 0.05' above or below the grade indicated.

B. Asphalt Concrete Paving:

1. The finished asphalt pavement, where not controlled by adjacent structures or features, shall not vary more than 0.05 feet above or below the planned


grade, providing it is uniform and free of sharp breaks and does not pond water.

2. The cross section of the finished pavement shall be free of ridges and valleys and shall not vary more than 0.03' above or below the theoretical section at any point on the cross section.

3. The specified thickness of the finished pavement shall be the minimum acceptable.

4. Conforms shall form a smooth, pond free, transition between existing and new pavement.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 32 13 13 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Site Concrete

SECTION 32 13 13

SITE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following site concrete items:

1. Concrete paving.

2. Concrete curbs and gutters.

3. Concrete ramps and steps.

4. Cast-in-place concrete for exposed vertical surfaces.

5. Concrete footings for site elements.

6. Reinforcing for site concrete.

7. Formwork for site concrete.

8. Aggregate base course under concrete paving.


1. Section 02 41 19 “Selective Site Demolition” for sawcutting and removal of existing concrete paving.

2. Section 31 00 00 “Earthwork” for grading and subgrade preparation for site concrete paving.

3. Section 32 17 13 “Wheelstops” for precast concrete wheelstops.

4. Section 32 12 16 “Asphalt Concrete Paving” for asphalt paving and base course.

5. Section 32 17 23 “Pavement Markings” for painted striping and markings on paved surfaces and curbs.

6. Section 32 17 26 “Tactile Warning Surfaces” for prefabricated tactile warning surface panels cast into freshly poured site concrete paving substrates.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. AASHTO M 182: Specification for Burlap Cloth Made From Jute or Kenaf.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI 117: Specifications for Tolerances Concrete Construction and Materials.

2. ACI 301: Specification for Structural Concrete.

3. ACI 306.1: Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.


C. ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials):

1. ASTM A 185: Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete.

2. ASTM A 615: Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

3. ASTM C 31: Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.

4. ASTM C 33: Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

5. ASTM C 39: Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

6. ASTM C 94: Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

7. ASTM C 143: Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.

8. ASTM C 150: Specification for Portland Cement.

9. ASTM C 171: Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

10. ASTM C 172: Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.

11. ASTM C 231: Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.

12. ASTM C 260: Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

13. ASTM C 309: Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.

14. ASTM C 494: Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

15. ASTM C 881: Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete.

16. ASTM C 920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

17. ASTM C 1017: Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete.

18. ASTM C 1028: Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

19. ASTM C 1059: Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete.

20. ASTM C 1064: Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete.

21. ASTM C 1116: Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete.

22. ASTM C 1193: Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.

23. ASTM C 1315: Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete.

24. ASTM D 1557: Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/ft3)

25. ASTM D 1751: Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).


D. State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans):

1. Standard Specifications.

E. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):

1. Manual of Standard Practice.

F. United States Department of Justice:


1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement and finishing of site concrete with installation of tactile warning surface cast-in-place panels as specified in Section 32 17 26 “Tactile Warning Surfaces.”


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to site concrete, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Concrete mixture design.

b. Quality control of concrete materials and site concrete construction practices.

c. Cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures.

d. Concrete finishes and finishing.

e. Joints and joint-filler strips.

f. Curing procedures.

g. Concrete protection.

2. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with site concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor’s superintendent.

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.

c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

d. Site concrete Installer.

e. Decorative concrete system manufacturer’s representative.


A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.


B. Concrete Mix Designs: For each site concrete mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. All mix designs shall be identified by a mix design identification number, and selected by a registered Civil Engineer with experience in concrete mix design. Mix design report shall be sealed and signed by qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation.

C. Formwork Shop Drawings: Show formwork construction including form liner joints, rustications, construction and control joints, reveals, edge conditions, form joint sealant details, form tie locations and patterns, inserts and embedments, and other items that affect visual appearance of cast-in-place site concrete.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials:

1. Aggregates.

C. Material Certificates: From manufacturers, certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.

3. Fiber reinforcement.

4. Admixtures.

5. Curing compounds.

6. Applied finish materials.

7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.

8. Joint fillers.

D. Concrete Batch Plant Tickets: Load identification tickets for each load of concrete delivered to site. Batch ticket shall bear the following information:

1. Design mix number.

2. Signature or initials of concrete plant representative.

3. Time of batching.

4. Weight of cement, aggregates, water and admixtures in each batch with maximum aggregate size.

5. Total volume of concrete in each batch.

6. Notation indicating equipment was checked for contamination prior to batching.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.


B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following:

1. ACI 301, “Specification for Structural Concrete,” unless modified by requirements in Contract Documents.

2. “Finishing Concrete Slabs with Color and Texture.”

C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for typical joints, surface finishes, textures, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.

1. Build mockups of the following:

a. Full-thickness sections of concrete paving to demonstrate each type of joint, surface finish, texture, and color.

i) Where pouring concrete adjacent to existing concrete, add carbon black to concrete mixture in amount as required to match tint of existing concrete.

b. Each type of cast-in-place vertical concrete surface finish and color.

i) Include patching of form tie holes.

ii) For each form liner texture, include one horizontal and one vertical form liner joint.

2. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

3. Notify Architect 5 working days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

4. Obtain Architect’s approval of mockups before starting construction.

a. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved in writing by Architect.

5. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed pavement.

6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of class of cementitious material of the same brand from same manufacturer’s plant, and obtain each aggregate from a single source.



B. Concrete Curing Compounds and Sealers: Provide concrete curing compounds and sealers that comply with VOC limits in Table 1 of the California Air Resources Board (ARB) Architectural Coatings Suggested Control Measure, unless more stringent local limits apply.


A. Design and fabricate concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 347..

1. Formwork shall be capable of withstanding all loads imposed during construction, including weight of equipment, uncured concrete, and other pressures and loads occurring prior to curing of concrete.

2.4 BASE COURSE

A. Base Course Aggregate: Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag, stone, or slag screenings. Comply with Caltrans Standard Specification, Section 26 for Class 2 base, 3/4 inch maximum aggregate size and minimum R value of 78.

1. Recycled Content of Base Course Aggregate: As specified in “LEED v4 Requirements” Article.

2.5 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, true, smooth exposed concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practical sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not use notched or bent forms.

B. Form Joint Tape: Compressible, foam tape; pressure sensitive; AAMA 800, “Specification 810.1, Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape”; minimum 1/4 inch thick.

C. Form Joint Sealant: Elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type M or Type S, Grade NS, that adheres to form joint substrates.

D. Chamfer Strips: Metal, rigid plastic, rubber strips, or dressed wood, 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch, unless indicated otherwise; in longest practicable lengths.


E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties with tapered tie cone spreaders that, when removed, will leave holes 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Wire ties are not acceptable.

F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60; deformed.

C. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

1. Dowel Sleeve: Rigid polypropylene sleeve, 5/8-inch diameter by 9 inches long, with reusable base, designed for attachment to face of concrete form.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

i) Speed Dowel.

ii) Equal product in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded-wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:

1. Equip bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2. Where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use gray, all-plastic bar supports.

2.7 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 gray portland cement, Type II/V.


B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4M coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches, except as noted below.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Where used, provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

F. Carbon Black: Tinting agent for darkening concrete mix as required to match tint of existing concrete.

2.8 CURING AND SEALING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz/sq yd, dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; MasterKure ER50.

b. Euclid Chemical Company; Eucobar.

c. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre.

d. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm.

e. Equal product in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.



E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.


a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.

b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Clear Resin Cure J11W.

c. Euclid Chemical Company; Kurez DR VOX.

d. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; 1100 Clear.

e. Equal product in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.


2.9 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA, and not classified as “restricted use” for locations and conditions of application. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

B. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, in preformed strips.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersable, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements; Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.


a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; MaserEmaco ADH 1420.

b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Bond J58.

c. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Rezi-Weld 1000.

d. Equal product in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.

E. Sealant: Joint sealant designed for use in horizontal pedestrian traffic bearing joints in exterior concrete construction.

1. Comply with ASTM C 920 as follows:

a. Grade: NS or P (suitable for sloping surfaces up to 10 percent).

b. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic).

c. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M



a. Pecora Corporation; DynaTred.

b. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; MasterSeal SL 2.

c. Tremco, Inc.; THC-901.


3. Color: Match color of adjacent paving, unless indicated otherwise.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete as determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that comply with or exceed requirements.

B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 days): 3000 psi.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.55.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 3 percent plus or minus 1 percent.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.

E. Chemical Admixtures: use admixtures according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Use admixtures as required for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

F. Carbon Black: Where pouring concrete adjacent to existing concrete, add carbon black to concrete mixture in amount as required to match tint of existing concrete.

1. Obtain Architect’s approval of mockup panel with tint to match existing concrete, as specified in Quality Assurance Article.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.


1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrade surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

1. Refer to Section 31 20 00 “Earthwork” for preparation of subgrade.

B. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing base course and concrete materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive base course and paving, and is free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer’s recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry prepared subgrade or surface of base course.

C. Protect adjacent construction from discolorations and spillage during application of color hardeners, release agents, stains, curing compounds, and sealers.

3.3 PLACEMENT OF BASE COURSE

A. Place and compact aggregate base course to thicknesses required for each section. Comply with requirements of Caltrans Standard Specification Section 26.

1. Placement Layers:

a. Place base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

b. Place base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.

2. Shape base course to required elevations and grades.

3. Compact aggregate base course at optimum moisture content to 95 percent relative compaction according to ASTM D 1557.

4. Proof-roll prepared base course surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected are ready to receive paving.

B. Remove loose material from compacted base course surface immediately before placing concrete.


3.4 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION – ON GRADE CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances:

1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.5 FORMWORK CONSTRUCTION – EXPOSED VERTICAL CONCRETE SURFACES

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, unit structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete elements are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, straight, and true to line and level, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Construct forms to result in cast-in-place concrete that complies with ACI 117.

D. Form Ties: Ties shall not leave fractures, spalls, depressions, or other surface disfigurations.

1. Ties shall not leave metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed surface.

E. In addition to ACI 303.1 limits on form panel deflection, limit cast-in-place architectural concrete irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch.

F. Construct forms tight to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

G. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Seal form joints and penetrations at form ties with form joint tape or form joint sealant to prevent cement paste leakage.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

3. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms, only.

H. Chamfer exposed outside corners and edges where indicated on Drawings, to produce smooth form lines and tight edge joints.


I. Limit deflection of form-facing panels so as not to exceed ACI 303.1 requirements.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer’s written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

M. Remove forms without damage to concrete. Comply with ACI 347.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

1. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, expansion, control, and isolation joints, and tool edges true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated.


3. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Expansion Joints at Paving: Form expansion joints, sectioning concrete paving into areas as indicated.

1. Install doweled joint assemblies where indicated, parallel to slab, and perpendicular to joint, using one of the following:

a. Install dowel sleeve and dowel at slab mid-depth in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

b. Install dowel bars and support assemblies. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

2. Extend fiber expansion joint filler strip full width and depth of joint, with top edge of filler strip 1/2 inch below finished concrete surface.

3. Furnish joint filler in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.

4. Do not extend reinforcing across expansion joints.

5. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Control Joints at Paving: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete paving into areas as indicated. If not indicated, provide control joints at a maximum spacing of 6 feet. Construct control joints to a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4 inch radius. Repeat grooving of control joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

E. Control Joints at Cast-In-Place Vertical Surfaces: Form weakened-plane control joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of cast-in-place concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

F. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed fiber joint filler strips abutting curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, or other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Extend fiber expansion joint filler strip full width and depth of joint, with top edge of filler strip 1/2 inch below finished concrete surface.

2. Furnish joint filler in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.

3. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.


3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing site concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

D. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

E. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

F. Concrete Paving:

1. Remove snow, ice, or frost from base course surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

2. Moisten base course to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

3. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

4. Screed paving surfaces with a straightedge and strike off.

a. Where concrete is being poured adjacent to existing concrete, strike off flush with existing concrete.

5. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

6. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.

G. Cast-In-Place Vertical Surfaces: Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness not to exceed formwork design pressure, and such that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.


H. Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators.

I. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor’s option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and base course just before placing concrete. Keep base course moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

J. Tactile Warning Surfaces: Form blockouts in concrete for installation of tactile warning surface panels specified in Section 32 17 26 “Tactile Warning Surfaces.” Screed surface of concrete where panels are to be installed to elevation, so that edges of installed panels will be flush with surrounding concrete paving. Refer to Section 32 17 26 “Tactile Warning Surfaces” for installation of tactile warning surface panels.

3.9 CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS

A. Construct concrete curbs, gutters, and sidewalks in conformance with requirements of Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 73.

B. Steel trowel surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Provide expansion joints at 20 feet on center maximum.

1. Fill expansion joint with joint filler material, shaped to match cross-section of curb, with outer edge of filler material 1/2 inch below finished concrete surface.

2. Where joints occur in adjacent paving, joints in curb to align with joints in paving.


3.10 CONCRETE CURB RAMPS

A. Construct concrete curb ramps in conformance with requirements of United States Justice Department’s 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, and California Building Code (Title 24, Part 2).

B. Form safety grooves as indicated in “Concrete Paving Finish” Article.

3.11 CONCRETE STEPS

A. Form safety grooves as indicated in “Concrete Paving Finish” Article.

3.12 CONCRETE PAVING FINISH

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Surfaces With a Slope of 6 Percent or Less: Medium textured broom finish.

a. Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

i) Static Coefficient of Friction for Wet Surfaces, as tested per ASTM C 1028: 0.60 minimum.

2. Surfaces With a Slope of Greater Than 6 Percent: Coarse textured broom finish.

a. Draw a stiff bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, striated texture, 1/16-inch deep.

i) Static Coefficient of Friction for Wet Surfaces, as tested per ASTM C 1028: 0.80 minimum.

3. Areas Being Patched Into Existing Concrete: Match finish texture of existing concrete.

C. Final Tooling: Tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, planters, joints, and other exposed edges formed in fresh concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius.. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

D. Safety Grooves:

1. Form safety grooves at concrete steps and curb ramps as indicated, using a jointer while concrete is still fresh.

2. Cut uniform grooves to dimensions and spacing as indicated.

3. Strike grooves before and after brooming.

slip resistant

slip resistant


E. Apply sealant over joint fillers. Do not apply sealant before concrete staining, sandblasting, and sealing operations are complete.

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, grease, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer’s written instructions.

a. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.

2. Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

a. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

b. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

c. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

3. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

a. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

b. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

c. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

3.13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE VERTICAL SURFACE FINSHES

A. Exposed Concrete Finish, General: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects with portland cement to match finish of exposed concrete.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.

1. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

2. Final Tooling: Tool edges of curbs, planters, joints, and other exposed edges formed in fresh concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius.. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

C. Vertical Surfaces: Except where sandblasting is indicated, at exposed vertical surfaces, provide smooth rubbed finish not later than one day after form removal.

1. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part Portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white Portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match surrounding concrete. Scrub grout


into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3.14 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 105.1 for hot-weather protection during curing.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq ft per hour before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer’s written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods for Non-Decorative Concrete: Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by moisture curing, moisture-retaining cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows.

1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and end lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

F. Curing Method for Decorative Concrete: Apply curing/sealing compound in accordance with written instructions of manufacturer of decorative concrete system.

3.15 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch.

2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.


3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.

4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12 inches of tie-bar.

5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch.

6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch.

7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per 12 inches of dowel.

8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.

9. Control Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Notify Owner’s testing agency at least 2 working days prior to date when observation and testing services are needed.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.

3. Verification of use or required design mixture.

4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 will be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Provide at least one composite sample for each 50 cu yds or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day’s pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day’s pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.


5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; cast and laboratory-cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one specimen to be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

D. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

H. Remove and replace site concrete that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with specified requirements.

I. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

J. Concrete Batch Plant Tickets.: Submit to Project Inspector, load identification tickets for each load of concrete delivered to site. Refer to Part 1 “Submittals” Article for required information for batch tickets.

3.17 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace site concrete that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive. Filled areas to match surrounding concrete in surface treatment and color.

C. Remove base rock and concrete spillage from all planting areas.


D. Clean exposed site concrete surfaces carefully. Brushing and cleaning, if used, to be preceded and followed with a thorough rinsing of clear water. Sandblasting not allowed for cleaning purposes.

E. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

F. Maintain site concrete free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete paving not more than 2 days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.


Headstart Calavars ES

© 2016 IBI Group

SECTION 32 16 00

CURBS AND GUTTERS

1.00 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


1. Construction of concrete curbs, gutters, walks, driveway cuts, pedestrian ramps and other concrete surfacing as required.

2. Concrete retaining wall.



2. Asphalt concrete paving: Section 32 12 16.


A. Reference standards: The applicable provisions of the following govern the work of this section.

1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).

a. A615: Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

b. C150: Portland Cement.

2. California Department of Transportation (CDT), Standard Specifications: Sections 51, 52, 73 and 90.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. If requested, submit mill test reports on the cement, reinforcement bars and aggregates, showing compliance with the respective specifications. The Owner's Testing Agency may make concrete test cylinders and slump tests as deemed necessary to determine compliance with Specifications.

2.00 PRODUCTS

2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC)


© 2016 IBI Group

A. Concrete: Class A (6 sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete) conforming to Section 90 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

B. Cement: Type II conforming to ASTM C150 as modified by Section 90 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

C. Aggregate: ¾" maximum size conforming to Section 90 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

D. Water: Clear and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances.

E. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, intermediate grade, deformed in accordance with Section 52 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

F. Filled Joints: Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings 1/2" thick, the full depth of the concrete section and conforming to Section 51 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

G. Joint Filler: bitumen-treated fiber board per CDT Standard Specifications, Section 51. Premolded expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements in ASTM Designation D 1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

H. Waterproof Joint Sealant: flexible polyurethane.

I. Carbon black shall be added to concrete for curbs, gutters and sidewalks as required to match existing work.

J. No admixtures will be allowed without Owner's Representative approval.

K. Maximum water cement ratio (w/c) of 0.50.

L. Maximum slump of 4".

M. Aggregate Base: Class 2 aggregate base, three quarter inch (¾") maximum size, as specified in Section 26 of the CalTrans Standard Specifications.

3.00 EXECUTION

3.01 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

A. Concrete shall be mixed in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 90 of the CDT Standard Specifications.


© 2016 IBI Group

B. Construction of concrete substances shall conform to applicable provisions of Section 51 of the CDT Standard Specifications. Unless noted otherwise in these Specifications, exposed surfaces of structure shall have Class 1 surface finish.

C. Construct concrete curbs and sidewalks in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 73 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

D. Curing shall conform to applicable portions of Section 90 of the CDT Standard Specifications. Do not use pigment in curing compounds.

E. All work shall be subject to inspection. No concrete shall be placed until the Owner's Representative has approved the forms and reinforcement.

F. Place expansion joints on curbs, gutters and walks at 20' on center, adjacent to structures, and at all returns, and fill with joint filler. Score joints shall be formed at 10' on center; the score shall be 1" deep.

G. Do not drop concrete freely where reinforcing bars will cause segregation, nor more than 6'-0" vertically. Use spouts, elephant trunks, or other approved means to prevent segregation.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 32 17 13 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Wheelstops

SECTION 32 17 13

WHEELSTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes

1. Precast concrete wheelstops.


1. Section 32 12 16 “Asphalt Concrete Paving” for asphalt paving surfaces to receive wheelstops.

2. Section 32 17 23 “Pavement Markings” for paint striping and marking on paving surfaces.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for precast concrete wheelstops.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE WHEELSTOPS

A. Concrete Wheelstops: Precast, steel-reinforced, air-entrained concrete, 4000 psi minimum compressive strength. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots at underside, with a minimum of two factory-formed or –drilled vertical holes through wheelstop for anchoring to substrate.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Oldcastle Precast.; #36755WS.

b. Equal product in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.

2. Dimensions: 3 feet long by 7-1/2 inches wide by 5 inches high, with beveled top edges.

3. Cross-Sectional Profile: Half octagonal.

4. Surface Appearance: Free of pockets, sand streaks, honeycombs, and other defects. Corners shall be uniform, straight, and sharp.

5. Epoxy setting adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer of wheelstops.

6. Setting Dowels: Galvanized steel, 1/2 inch diameter, 15 inch minimum length.

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 32 17 13 - Page 2 Calaveras Head Start Building Wheelstops

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for proper installation and conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that paving surfaces are dry and fully cured.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Securely anchor wheel stops to pavement in accordance with written instructions of manufacturer.

1. Install wheelstops in full bed of epoxy adhesive before anchoring.

2. Securely anchor wheelstops to pavement with setting dowels in each preformed vertical hole in wheelstop. Recess head of hardware beneath top of wheelstop.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 32 17 23 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Pavement Markings

SECTION 32 17 23

PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes: edit following list to suit project

1. Removal of existing painted striping and markings from asphalt paving.

2. Parking lot pavement striping.

3. Accessible parking loading zone striping and parking symbol.

4. Painting of curbs.


1. Section 09 91 00 ”Painting” for general exterior and interior painting.

2. Section 10 14 00 ”Signage” for pole-mounted parking and traffic control signs.

3. Section 32 12 16 Asphalt Concrete Paving” for asphalt concrete paving.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A117.1: Standard on Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

B. California Building Code (CBC) – California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2.

C. State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans): Specification No. PTWB-01, Paint, Waterborne Traffic Line, White, Yellow and Black.

D. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

1. 40 CFR, Part 59, Subpart D: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards.

E. Federal Standard 595B: Colors.

F. United States Department of Justice:


1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. VOC: Volatile Organic Compound.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of paint product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For colors indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Label each Sample for location and application area.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying pavement striping and markings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups as follows:

a. Typical removal of existing striping and markings.

b. Typical parking stall striping.

c. 5-foot length of curb.

2. Obtain Architect’s approval of mockups prior to starting pavement striping and marking.

3. Approved mockups may become part of completed Work.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer’s original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer’s name and label and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material.

2. Product description.

3. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture.

4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.

5. Thinning instructions.

6. Application instructions.

7. Color name and number.

8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area within temperature range required by manufacturer. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.



A. Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 50 deg F, and not exceeding 95 deg F, or within other temperature ranges as recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

B. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Accessibility Requirements: Pavement markings for parking stalls designated as accessible, to be in compliance with applicable provisions of the following:

1. California Building Code (Title 24, Part 2), Chapters 11A and 11B.


2.2 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT

A. Latex, water-borne product, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with Caltrans State Specification No. PTWB-01.

1. VOC Content: No more than that allowed by local and federal regulations when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Colors:

a. Parking stall striping and accessible parking symbols: White, unless indicated otherwise.

b. Striping for accessible parking stall access aisle: Blue (No. 15090 per AMS Standard 595A) at perimeter border and diagonal hatching.

c. Accessible parking symbol background: Blue (No. 15090 per AMS Standard 595A).

d. Curbs at accessible parking stalls: Blue (No. 15090 per AMS Standard 595A).


a. Dunn-Edwards Corporation; VIN-L-STRIPE Traffic Marking Paint W801.

b. Frazee Paint; 506 Traffic Paint.

c. Kelly-Moore Paints; 1450 Mark Right, Latex Marking Paint.


C

C

C


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application.

1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator’s acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.

3.2 REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRIPING AND MARKINGS

A. Remove existing painted pavement striping and marking layout as indicated, by applying black pavement marking paint over existing striping and markings. Allow black pavement marking paint to cure for minimum time as recommended in writing by paint manufacturer before applying striping and marking paint for new parking layout.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Allow paving to cure for a minimum time period of 45 days prior to start of pavement striping and marking, or for minimum time period as recommended in writing by traffic paint manufacturer, whichever is more.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the coatings. Remove dirt, oil, grease, and other foreign matter.

C. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface material film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply pavement marking paint according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Apply pavement marking paint with atomizing spray type striping machine equipped with separate thermostatically controlled heating devices for each paint pot and capable of applying paint such that lines and markings have uniform, straight edges, true and smooth alignments and uniform thickness.

2. Apply paint at manufacturer’s recommended rates and wet film thickness.


3. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly secured to paving surface. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint application beyond stencil. Apply paint so it cannot run beneath stencil.

4. Refer to Part 2 “Pavement Marking Paint” Article for paint colors.

5. Completed lines, markings, and curbs shall be clean, sharp, and to dimensions indicated.

a. Ragged ends of segments, fogginess along the sides or objectionable dribbling of paint along the unpainted portions or the stripes will not be permitted.

b. The finished paint shall have an opaque, well-painted appearance with no black or other discolorations showing through.

B. Pavement Markings:

1. Stripe and mark parking stalls and access aisles as shown on Drawings.

a. Width of Parking Stall Striping: 4 inches.

b. Width of Striping at Accessible Parking Stall Access Aisle: 4 inches.

i) Paint words NO PARKING in 12-inch high letters (color: white) at foot of access aisle.

c. Paint International Symbol of Accessibility at accessible parking stalls. Center symbol in stall, facing outwards, with lower edge of symbol aligned with end of parking stall, as indicated on Drawings. Symbol to painted white on blue background, in accordance with ANSI A117.1.

2. Pavement markings shall be stable, firm and slip resistant.

C. Curbs: Paint curbs to designate parking or drop-off functions as indicated on Drawings, and as specified in Part 2 “Pavement Marking Paint” Article of this Section.

3.5 CLEANING

A. At completion of pavement striping and marking, and curb painting, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.

1. After completing painting, clean adjacent paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Exercise reasonable precautions to protect the paint, as applied, during drying time. Remove objectionable tracking and marks.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 32 17 26 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Tactile Warning Surfaces

SECTION 32 17 26

TACTILE WARNING SURFACES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Tactile warning surface panels with truncated domes for horizontal pedestrian traffic areas.

a. Cast-in-place.


1. Section 32 13 13 ”Site Concrete” for concrete substrates to receive tactile warning surface panels.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. ASTM B 117: Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

2. ASTM C 501: Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser.

3. ASTM C 1028: Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

4. ASTM D 570: Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.

5. ASTM D 638: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.

6. ASTM D 695: Standard Test Method Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.

7. ASTM D 790: Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.

8. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

9. ASTM G 26: Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Xenon-Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.

10. ASTM G 155: Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials.

B. California Building Code (CBC) - California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2.


C. Federal Standard 595B: Colors.

D. United States Department of Justice:


1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of cast-in-place tactile warning surface panels with placement of site concrete as specified in Section 32 13 13 ”Site Concrete.”

B. Verify concrete slump range is within limits as recommended in writing by manufacturer of tactile warning surface cast-in-place panels.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and placement of tactile warning surface panel joints and fasteners.

C. Samples for Verification: 6 inch by 6 inch sample, for each color and type of tactile warning surface.


A. Maintenance Data: For tactile warning surfaces to include in maintenance manuals. Include manufacturer’s written cleaning instructions.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing tactile warning surfaces and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained and approved by manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for delivery, storage, and handling of tactile warning surface panels.

B. Store panels on flat surfaces.



A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when substrate temperature and ambient temperature, and existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of tactile warning surfaces to be performed according to manufacturer’s written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Close area to traffic for 48 hours after tactile warning surface installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements for tactile warning surfaces as per the following:

1. California Building Code (Title 24, Part 2) Chapter 11B.


2.2 TACTILE WARNING SURFACES - GENERAL

A. General: Manufacturer’s detectable warning system consisting of prefabricated panels with raised truncated dome pattern and non-slip surface field area to provide warning and directional assistance to visually impaired pedestrians.

B. Truncated Dome Profile Dimensions:

1. Base Diameter: 0.9 inch.

2. Diameter at Top of Truncated Dome: 0.45 inch.

3. Dome Height: 0.2 inch.

4. Dome Pattern: In-line square pattern.

a. Dome Spacing: 1.67 inches minimum, 2.35 inches maximum, center to center, both ways.

2.3 TACTILE WARNING SURFACES - CAST-IN-PLACE PANELS

A. General: Manufacturer’s prefabricated polymer or glass and carbon-reinforced composite panels with raised truncated dome pattern; designed for installation by casting embedment flanges with mechanical keyways on backside of panel into wet (e.g. uncured) concrete substrate; homogeneous color and pattern throughout thickness of material; waterproof and nonabsorbent; ultraviolet light-stable; preapproved by Division of the State Architect (DSA).

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cast-in-place tactile warning panels by one of the following:

a. ADA Solutions, Inc.

b. Engineering Plastics, Inc.; Armor-Tile.

c. Manufacturer of equal product in accordance with Division 1 requirements for product substitutions.


B. Panel Dimensions: 24 inches by 36 inches, 24 inches by 48 inches, 24 inches by 60 inches, 36 inches by 48 inches, or 36 inches by 60 inches, as indicated on Drawings.

C. Face Thickness: 1/8 to 3/16 inches.

D. Panel Depth (Including Embedment Flanges): 1-3/8 to 1-1/2 inches.

E. Color: Yellow - AMS Standard No. 595A, Color No. 33538.

F. Physical Properties:

1. Slip Resistance: Not less than 0.80 static coefficient of friction for wet surfaces, per ASTM C 1028.

2. Water Absorption: 0.13 percent maximum, per ASTM D 570.

3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 23,800 psi, per ASTM D 695.

4. Tensile Strength: Not less than 12,100 psi, per ASTM D 638.

5. Flexural Strength: Not less than 24, 600 psi, per ASTM D 790.

6. Wear Resistance: Not less than 500, per ASTM C 501.

7. Flame Spread: 15 or less, per ASTM E 84.

8. Weathering: No change or deterioration at 3,000 hours of exposure, per ASTM G 26 or ASTM G 155.

9. Salt and Spray Performance: No deterioration or other effects after 120 hours of exposure, per ASTM B 117.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer’s written recommendations to ensure adhesion of tactile warning surface panels.

B. At areas to receive surface-applied tactile warning panels, verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, loose material, dust, oils, grease, and other foreign materials that might impair adhesive bond.

C. Prior to installation, clean backside of surface-applied tactile warning surface panels in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.


A. General: Install tactile warning surface in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.


B. Lay out tactile warning surface panels in sizes and configurations as shown on Drawings.

C. If not indicated otherwise, lay out panels from center marks established at end points, so panels at opposite ends of run are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths equal to less than one-half of a panel width at ends.

D. Maintain correct orientation of each panel, so as to maintain correct alignment of truncated domes from panel to panel.

E. Set panels true and square to adjacent curbs, ramps, and paving edges.

F. Install adjacent panels in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions to maintain correct spacing and alignment of truncated domes from panel to panel.

G. Where cut widths are necessary, cut and fit panels along a clean, straight line.

H. Where occurring adjacent to vertical surfaces, scribe, cut, and fit panels to butt neatly and cleanly to base of vertical surface.

3.4 INSTALLATION - CAST-IN-PLACE TACTILE WARNING SURFACE PANELS

A. Refer to Section 32 13 13 ”Site Concrete” for placement and finishing of concrete paved substrate at areas to receive cast-in-place tactile warning surfaces.

B. Upon placement and finishing of concrete substrates, verify proper lines and levels have been achieved.

C. Protect finished face of tactile warning surface panel from wet concrete with manufacturer’s plastic sheeting or other means of protection.

D. Place cast-in-place tactile warning surface panels into fresh concrete and tamp into place as required to eliminate all air voids below each panel, and fully encase all embedment flanges and keyway holes with concrete.

1. Surface of panel field (e.g. base of truncated dome) is to be flush with adjacent paving surface.

2. Maintain flush alignment of panel field surface of adjacent panels.

3. Place weights on panels as recommended in writing by manufacturer to maintain solid embedment of panels in concrete with no air voids.

E. Finish adjacent concrete as specified in Section 32 13 13 ”Site Concrete.”

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Do not allow traffic on tactile warning panels until the following conditions have been met:

1. Surface-Applied Panels: Sufficient time has been allowed for adhesive to set as per written instructions of manufacturer.

2. Cast-in-Place Panels: Underlying concrete has fully cured.


B. Once conditions have been met for allowing traffic over tactile warning panels, do not move heavy or sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard sheets over tactile warning surfaces and under objects while objects are being moved. Slide or roll objects over protective sheets without moving sheets.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by tactile surface manufacturer.

B. Clean tactile warning surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. END OF SECTION 32 17 26

County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 32 31 13 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Chain-Link Fences and Gates

SECTION 32 31 13

CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Chain-link fences.

2. Gates included as part of the chain-link fencing system:

a. Swing gates.

3. Concrete fence and gate post footings.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A 123: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

2. ASTM A 392: Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric.

3. ASTM A 817: Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Wire for Chain-Link Fence Fabric and Marcelled Tension Wire.

4. ASTM A 824: Standard Specification for General Requirements for Copper Alloy Castings.

5. ASTM C 33: Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

6. ASTM C 94: Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

7. ASTM C 150: Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

8. ASTM F 567: Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence.

9. ASTM F 626: Standard Specification for Fence Fittings.

10. ASTM A 653: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

11. ASTM F 668: Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Other Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric.

12. ASTM F 900: Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates.

13. ASTM F 934: Standard Specification for Standard Colors for Polymer-Coated Chain-Link Fence Materials.


14. ASTM F 1043: Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Fence Framework.

15. ASTM F 1083: Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures.

16. ASTM F 1664: Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other Conforming Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Tension Wire Used with Chain-Link Fence.

B. California Building Code (CBC) – California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2.

C. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI):

1. Product Manual.

2. WSG 2445: Chain Link Fence Wind Load Guide for the Selection of Line Post and Line Post Spacing.

D. United States Department of Justice:



A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to review pertinent issues related chain-link fencing.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following:

1. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.

2. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.

3. Gates and hardware.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of fence and gate assembly.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, post anchorages and attachments to other work. Show locations of fences, gates, posts, rails, tension wires, and gate swings. Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components.

2. Include accessories, hardware, gate operation, and operational clearances.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of component with factory-applied finish, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Polymer-coated steel wire in 6-inch lengths.

2. Polymer coating, in 6-inch lengths on shapes for posts and rails.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence and gate, signed by product manufacturer.


B. Product Test Report: For framework strength according to ASTM F 1043, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For gate operators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Emergency Access Requirements: According to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for gates with automatic gate operators serving as a required means of access.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical chain-link fence and gate, including accessories.

a. Size: 10-foot length of fence.


A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Determine chain-link fencing minimum post size and maximum spacing, and minimum footing dimensions, according to CLFMI WLG 2445, based on mesh size and pattern specified. Chain-link fencing and gate framing shall withstand the following design wind loads and stresses for indicated fence heights:

1. Wind loads and stresses calculated based on requirements of the California Building Code, using factors defined therein and applicable to local site conditions.

a. Wind Speed (Ultimate Design Wind Speed Vult): 115 mph.

b. Where privacy slats or screening occurs on chain-link fencing and gates, account for added wind load and stresses.

B. Allowable Soil Values for Footing Design:

1. Bearing Value: 1,500 lbs per square foot.

2. Lateral Bearing Pressure: 100 lbs per square foot.

3. Lateral Sliding Resistance: 130 lbs per square foot.


2.2 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC

A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist according to CLFMI Product Manual and requirements indicated below:

1. Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Steel Wire for Fabric: Wire diameter of 0.148-inch (9 gage).

a. Mesh Size: 2 inches.

b. Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 2, 2.0 oz/sq ft with zinc coating applied before weaving.

c. Polymer-Coated Fabric: ASTM F 668, Class 2b over zinc-coated steel wire.

i) Color: Black.

d. Coat selvage ends of metallic-coated fabric before the weaving process with manufacturer’s standard clear protective coating.

3. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.

2.3 FENCE FRAMEWORK

A. Posts and Rails: ASTM F 1043 for framework, including rails, braces, and line; terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness according to ASTM F 1043 based on the following:

1. Fence Height: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Heavy-Industrial-Strength Material: Group IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40.

3. Metallic Coating for Steel Framework:

a. Type A: Not less than minimum 2.0 oz/sq ft average zinc coating according to ASTM A 123 or 4.0 oz/sq ft zinc coating according to ASTM A 653.

b. Type B: Zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz/sq ft of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, verifiable polymer film.

c. External, Type B: Zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz/sq ft of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, verifiable polymer film. Internal, Type D, consisting of 81 percent, not less than 0.3 mil-thick, zinc-pigmented coating.

d. Type C: Zn-5-A1-MM alloy, consisting of not less than 1.8-oz/sq ft coating.

e. Coatings: Any coating above.

4. Polymer Coating Over Metallic Coating: Comply with ASTM F 626 and ASTM F 1043 for polymer coating applied to exterior surfaces of tubular shapes and both exterior and interior surfaces of open-sided shapes.

a. Color: Matching polymer-coated chain-link fence fabric, according to ASTM F 934.

b. Thickness: Not less than 10-mil thick PVC or 3 mil thick polyester finish.


2.4 TENSION WIRE

A. General: Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations.

1. Location: Extended along bottom of fence fabric.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch diameter, marcelled tension wire complying with ASTM A 817 or ASTM A 824, with the following metallic coating:

1. Type II: Zinc-coated (galvanized) by hot-dip process, with the following minimum coating weight:

a. Matching chain-link fabric coating weight.

C. Polymer-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch diameter tension wire complying with ASTM F 1664, Class 2b over zinc-coated steel wire.

1. Color: Match chain-link fabric, according to ASTM F 934.

2.5 SWING GATES

A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts and single-swing and double-swing gate types.

1. Gate Leaf Width and Height: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Pipe and Tubing:

1. Zinc-Coated Steel: ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083.

2. Polymer Coating Over Metallic Coating: Matching fence framing.


C. Gate Frame Member Sizes and Strength: As required to withstand loads and stresses based on gate size and configuration, and in accordance with ASTM F 900.

1. Frame Corner Construction: Welded.

D. Gate Posts: Fabricated from round or square galvanized tubular steel of dimensions and wall thickness as required to withstand expected loads and stresses based on gate size and configuration, and in accordance with ASTM F 900.

E. Hardware:

1. Exit Device at Pedestrian Gate: As specified on Drawings.

a. Mounting Plate: 14 gage galvanized steel plate.

2. Hinges: 180-degree swing; as specified on Drawings

a. Direction of Swing: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Latch at Trash Enclosure Gates: Permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking accessible from both sides of gate.

a. At pairs of gates, provide drop-rod latch assembly to secure inactive leaf in closed position.


4. Kickplate: Provide smooth, uninterrupted surface over the lower 10-inch portion of gate on both sides. Extend smooth surface for entire width of gate.

a. Fabricate kickplate from 0.0747 inch (14 gage) thick galvanized steel plate.

2.6 FITTINGS

A. Provide fittings according to ASTM F 626.

B. Post Caps: Provide for each post.

C. Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post.

D. Rail Fittings: Provide the following:

1. Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6 inches long.

2. Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting intermediate rails in the fence line-to-line posts.

E. Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel.

F. Tension Bars: Steel, length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post.

G. Truss Rod Assemblies: Steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading rod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment.

H. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626.

1. Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the following:

a. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 0.148 inch (9 gage) diameter wire; galvanized coating thickness matching coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric.

I. Finish:

1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz/sq ft zinc.

2. Polymer Coating Over Metallic Coating: Matching fence framing.


2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Normal-weight concrete with not less than 3000-psi compressive strength (28 days), 3-inch slump. Measure, batch, and mix according to ASTM C 94.

1. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

2. Aggregate: ASTM C 33; 1-inch maximum size.

3. Water: ASTM C 94; potable.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted by Architect.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.

3.3 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified.

1. Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line.

B. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, into firm, undisturbed soil.

C. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.

1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.

2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.

a. Concealed Concrete: Top 2 inches below grade to allow covering with surface material.

D. Terminal Posts: Install terminal, end, corner, and gate posts according to ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more. For runs exceeding 500 feet, space pull posts an equal distance between corner or end posts.

E. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet on center maximum.

F. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fence posts. Diagonally brace terminal posts to adjacent line posts with truss rods and turnbuckles. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts.

1. Locate horizontal braces midheight of fabric 6 feet or higher, on fences with top rail and at 2/3 fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension.


G. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fence posts. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches on center. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric. Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations:

1. Extended along bottom of fence fabric. Install bottom tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire.

H. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fence posts. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer.

I. Intermediate Rails: Secure to posts with fittings.

J. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1 inch bottom clearance between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.

K. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches on center.

L. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing.

1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches on center and to braces at 24 inches on center.

M. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of fence opposite the fabric side.

3.4 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer’s written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Gate: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.


B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. END OF SECTION 32 31 13

County Office of Education - 16273.000 Section 32 80 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Irrigation

SECTION 32 80 00

IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, facilities, transportation and services to complete all water supply, irrigation system and related work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Scope of work:

The general extent of the water supply and irrigation system work is shown on the Drawings and may include, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Installation of automatic irrigation systems and controls. 2. Excavation for points of connection. 3. Use of potable water for the irrigation system.

C. Related sections can include, but may not be limited to:

1. Selective Demolition 2. Earthwork 3. Landscape Soil Preparation 4. Planting 5. Landscape Maintenance

1.3 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. B 62-85 - Standard Specifications for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal

Castings. 2. D 1784-81 - Standard Specifications for Rigid (PVC) Compounds and

Chlorinated Poly (vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 3. D 1785-86 - Standard Specifications for (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40

and 80. 4. D 2241-84 - Standard Specifications for PVC Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR

Series). 5. D 2564 Standard Specifications for Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic Pipe

and Fittings. 6. F477 Specification for Elastomeric seals (gaskets) for joining plastic pipe.

B. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), requirements for Seal of Approval. C. Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI), recommendations for hydrostatic design stresses for

PVC pipe.


D. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 2000 Edition and 2001

Supplement.

E. State of California, Department of Public Health.

F. Permits and Fees: Contractor is responsible to obtain all required permits and pay all associated fees unless otherwise noted.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform to requirements of applicable Division Two specifications, General Conditions and Special Provisions.

B. Submit the following at the beginning of the project:

1. Four (4) copies of Materials List of all products specified. 2. Four (4) copies of the Product Data or cut sheets of all products specified.

No substitutions shall be permitted without written acceptance by the Owner.

C. Submit the following at project close-out:

1. Final Record Drawings: Two sets of these shall be produced, one for placement at or within the irrigation controller cabinet reduced to 11" x 17" and one full size set for storage at another location desired by the Owner.

2. Both sets shall have all the irrigation valve zone lateral lines color-coded so as to readily distinguish between adjacent zones. The valve size, station number and gallons per minute shall be legible at each valve and shall match how the controller is wired. Additionally, each valve shall be annotated to describe which type of irrigation it is, i.e. spray, rotor, etc. The color-coded copies shall then be professionally laminated in minimum 5-mil clear plastic.

3. Turn-over Materials: Provide one (1) each of the following to the District: a. One (1) Quick Coupler attachment key equipped with standard thread

hose bib per (5) Quick Couplers installed on the project. b. One (1) key for locking Quick Coupler covers per (5) Quick Couplers

installed on the project.

1.5 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Comply with applicable Division Two specifications, General Conditions and/or Special Provisions.

B. Accurately record locations of all piping and equipment that varies from what is

shown on the Drawings horizontally to within one (1) foot and vertically to within 0.5 feet.

C. Contractor shall keep accurate ‘As-Built’ record drawings at the project site that are updated on a daily basis. Contractor shall make the record drawings available to the Owner for monthly reviews. Failure to comply may be cause for the withholding of Progress Payments.



A. Unless otherwise specified, install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Comply with the requirements of the California Plumbing Code and California

Building Code: Section 1806A.11 – Pipe and Trenches; NFPA 24, Section 10.4.4.


A. Store PVC pipe in a neat and orderly manner fully supported and protected from sunlight.

B. All equipment shall be delivered, unloaded and handled so as to protect from

damage at all times.


A. PVC shall not be cemented during wet conditions per the discretion of the Owner.

B. Trench excavation and backfilling shall not be performed during excessively wet conditions per the discretion of the Owner.

1.9 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for coordinating, sequencing and scheduling all work with all applicable trades and/or sub-contractors so as to insure proper and timely performance.

1.10 GUARANTY

A. Conform to applicable Technical Specifications, General Conditions and Special Provisions.

B. Contractor shall provide a written guaranty covering entire system against defects

in installation, workmanship and equipment for a period of one full year from date of written Final Acceptance.

C. Contractor shall make necessary repairs to the system as well as to other work

affected by defects in the system during guaranty period. Repairs shall be made at the Contractor's sole expense.

1.11 MAINTENANCE

A. Conform to Section 32 93 00 - Landscape Maintenance. B. Service: Contractor shall service and maintain system during the Landscape

Maintenance Period. C. The entire irrigation system shall be under full automatic operations for a period of

two days prior to the start of any planting work.


D. Final Acceptance and start of guaranty period shall occur no earlier than the end

of the specified Landscape Maintenance Period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Use only new materials of brands shown on Drawings, specified herein or as acceptable to the Owner.

B. All irrigation controllers, backflow devices, heads and valves that are removed are

to be returned to the Owner in good condition to the Owner at a designated location with 5 miles of the project site.

C. All equipment related to the conveyance of recycled water shall be colored purple

and/or accompanied with signage indicating that said item is a part of a recycled water system and drinking of the water should be avoided.

2.2 PIPE

A. PVC Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (Type I) plastic pipe PVC 1120 and NSF approved as indicated on the plans. 1. Pressurized main line: As specified on the Drawings. 2. Lateral lines and sleeves: As specified on the Drawings.

2.3 PVC FITTINGS

A. PVC Fittings: Polyvinyl chloride (Type I) plastic fittings 1120, Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 as may be noted in the Drawings.

B. PVC Nipples: Polyvinyl chloride (Type I) plastic fittings 1120, Schedule 80.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE and ENCLOSURE. A. Backflow Prevention Device: Not included in this contract. B. Enclosure for Backflow Prevention Device: Not included in this contract.

2.5 CONTROLLER

A. Controller: Not included in this contract.

2.6 VALVES A. Remote Control Valves: As specified on Drawings. B. Quick Coupler Valves: As specified on Drawings. C. Shut Off Valves: As specified on Drawings.

2.7 VALVE BOXES


A. Valve boxes: As specified on the Drawings.

2.8 FLOW SENSOR

A. Flow Sensor: Not included in this contract. 2.9 RAIN GUAGE

A. Rain Gauge: Not included in this contract.

2.10 VALVE WIRING

A. Low Voltage: 1. Conductors:

a. Control wires shall be solid copper, UL rated for direct burial, Type UF, 14 gauge wire. Insulating jacket color shall be red.

b. Common wires shall be solid copper, UL rated for direct burial, Type UF, 14 gauge wire. Insulating jacket color shall be white.

c. Spare control wires shall be solid copper, UL rated for direct burial, Type UF, 14 gauge wire, Insulating jacket color shall be blue.

2. Splice connectors: 3M "DBR/Y-6" splice connectors or acceptable equal.

2.11 CONNECTING COMPOUNDS

A. Primer: IPS Corporation Weld-on #P-70.

B. Cement: 1. IPS Corporation Weld-on #721 for Class 200 P.V.C. or schedule 40 P.V.C.

(up to 6" diameter) and schedule 80 (up to 4" diameter) P.V.C. Pipe. IPS Corporation Weld-on #711 shall be used for larger pipe diameters.

2. IPS Corporation Weld-on #795 for flexible P.V.C. to rigid P.V.C. connections.

2.12 SPRINKLER OR BUBBLER HEADS

A. Sprinkler or Bubbler Heads: As specified on Drawings.

2.13 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS

A. Pipe Detection Tape: "Sentry Line" three (3) inch wide, detectable, "Caution Water Line Buried Below" tape as available from Terra Tape Inc. Houston, Texas (800)-231-6074 or acceptable equal. Install above mainline per plans.

B. Tracer Wire: Copper wire, UL rated for direct burial in ground, 12 gauge AWG.

Insulating jacket color shall be yellow. C. Pipe Sleeving: Schedule 40 PVC, unless noted otherwise. Size for water carrying

pipe and wiring shall be 2.5 times the size of the largest pipe, but no smaller than 4 inches. Cover ends of sleeves and pipes with root barrier fabric.


D. Teflon tape shall be of a variety commonly used for wrapping threaded connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, test and verify that water pressure levels meet the requirements specified on the Drawings. Notify the Owner immediately of any discrepancies. The system is designed to operate at a maximum flow of 100 GPM with a minimum 70 static P.S.I. at the water meter. Contractor shall verify GPM and static pressure prior to beginning work. Contact Owner immediately should discrepancy arise and re-direct work to avoid delay.

B. Irrigation plans are diagrammatic. Pipe lines shown parallel in the Drawings may

be placed in a common trench, provided that a minimum horizontal distance of three inches (3") is maintained between buried lines.

C. Sprinkler heads are shown schematically. Suspected discrepancies in coverage

or sizes of areas to be irrigated shall be brought to the attention of the Owner prior to installation. Contractor shall re-direct work to avoid delay while awaiting resolution.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Contractor shall make provisions and take necessary precautions to protect existing work or features.

B. In the event the existing irrigation system is affected by this project, and should

the mainline be shut off for any reason during the course of construction, the contractor shall provide ample water by approved alternate means to all landscaping that the existing irrigation system waters. This is to include areas beyond the immediate project limit of work. The contractor shall continue to do so until irrigation system is operable.

C. Layout: Coordinate lay-out of system with Owner as necessary.

3.3 TRENCHING

A. Conform to applicable Division Two specifications, General Conditions and Special Provisions.

B. Excavate trenches with vertical walls, uniform bottom, free of deleterious

materials, and wide enough for pipes to lay side by side, fully supported on bottom. There shall be a minimum three inch (3") clearance between all pipes. 1. No lines shall be installed parallel to and directly over another line. 2. When lines must cross, the angle shall be forty-five to ninety degrees, and

a minimum of three inch (3") vertical clearance shall be maintained.


C. Contractor shall use extreme care when it is necessary to trench near existing trees. Excavation in areas exhibiting roots 2” and larger shall be done by hand. Roots 2” or larger in diameter damaged during construction shall be cleanly cut.

D. Provide minimum coverage depths as follows:

1. Mainline: 24", or 36” where located in emergency vehicle access areas. 2. Lateral Lines: 18" in planting areas, 24" under paving, or 36” where

located in emergency vehicle access areas.

E. Hydraulic driving methods shall not be used under paved surfaces.

3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable Division Two specifications, General Conditions and/or Special Provisions and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Rubber Ring Seal Joint:

1. Use factory-made male end or prepare field-cut male end to exact specifications of factory-made end.

2. Carefully clean bell or coupling and insert rubber ring without lubricant. Position ring carefully according to manufacturer’s specifications.

3. Lubricate male end according to manufacturer’s instructions and insert male end to specified depth. Use hands only when inserting PVC pipe.

4. Thrust blocks shall be provided where specified and as necessary to resist system pressure on ring-tite pipe and fittings. Thrust blocks shall be concrete and the size shall be based on an average soil safe bearing load of 1,000 pounds per square foot.

5. Form thrust blocks in such a manner such that concrete comes in contact only with the fittings. Thrust blocks shall be between solid soil and the fitting.

C. Solvent Welded Joints:

1. Assemble above ground where possible. 2. Cut square, ream, and thoroughly clean. 3. Make joint using specified primer and cement, continuously wiping off

excess. 4. Allow sixty (60) minutes of set-up time before handling and twenty-four (24)

hours curing before applying water pressure.

D. Threaded Joints: 1. Use Teflon tape on all pressurized, threaded plastic to plastic and plastic to

steel joints. 2. Hand tighten and use only light strap-type friction wrench pressure to

complete.

E. Where possible, snake lateral line pipe a minimum of one (1) additional foot per one hundred (100) feet of pipe to allow for expansion and contraction.

F. Pipe shall be installed as specified and generally as shown in Drawings.


G. Cap or plug openings as soon as pipes have been installed to prevent intrusions of debris.

H. Sleeves:

1. Install pipe sleeves where necessary, where shown and at all points where pipes and control wires pass through or under concrete or masonry. In footings, install sleeving that allows one-inch (1") min. clearance around pipe(s).

2. Each end of sleeve shall extend 12 inches (12") beyond edge of paving or structure above. Provide removable non-decaying plug at each end of sleeve, to prevent earth from entering pipe. In addition, wrap ends of sleeves with root barrier fabric and into voids of pipe sleeve.

I. Install thrust blocks as shown in Drawings.

J. Thoroughly flush system prior to installing valves and nozzles.

3.5 EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION

A. Controller: 1. Not included in this contract.

B. Remote Control Valves:

1. Install as shown in Drawings. 2. Valve boxes shall be set plumb and square with adjacent structures. 3. Install valve tags in an acceptable manner with valve station and controller

number. 4. Provide twelve (12) inches minimum separation when valve boxes are

grouped together and align in a neat and orderly manner. 5. Locate valves in shrub/ground cover areas whenever possible.

C. Quick Coupler Valves:

1. Install as shown in Drawings.

D. Shut-off Valves: 1. Install as shown in Drawings.

E. Control Wire:

1. Connect control wires to controller in sequential arrangement according to identification number in the Drawings. Label each controller station with permanent non-fading labels indicating identification number of valve controlled.

2. Install as shown in Drawings. 3. Bundle multiple wires with tape or ties at ten (10) foot intervals maximum.

Do not tape wires in sleeves. 4. Make all splices in valve boxes using only specified connectors. 5. Provide thirty six (36) inch wire coil at each remote control valve, all

directional changes, and entrances to sleeves. 6. Install two spare control wires and loop into, every remote control valve on

system. Terminate wires inside controller enclosure unconnected and clearly labeled as extra.


7. All wiring under paving shall be installed in a PVC pipe sleeve large enough to allow withdrawal and insertion of individual wires.

8. If any control wire run is over 2000', up-size applicable control wire to be 12 gauge.

9. Control wires under paving structure will be installed in a separate sleeve.

F. Sprinkler or Bubbler Heads: 1. Install as shown in Drawings. 2. Install plumb with finish grade. 2. Thoroughly flush all lines prior to installing nozzles. 3. Irrigation Contractor shall adjust irrigation head location, spacing, arc or

radius for optimum coverage and to prevent any overspray-contact of building or onto adjacent pavement when operating without windy conditions. Valves shall be adjusted to avoid misting as applicable.

G. Valve Boxes:

1. Install as shown in Drawings. 2. Valve box size shall be as required to adequately house all proposed

components related to the item that is to be contained within the valve box. 3. Each valve box shall be labeled on the lid. 3. Avoid heavy compaction of soil around boxes to prevent collapse of sides

of boxes.

H. Tracer Wire: 1. Install as shown in Drawings. 2. Tracer wire shall be strapped to main line pipe at 10-foot intervals and

extend into all valve and pull boxes for accessibility requirements. All splices shall be soldered and protected per splicing detail shown in Drawings. Remove and/or neutralize all flux residue.


A. General: 1. Notify Owner for the following reviews, with 2 working days minimum

notice: a. Pressure testing mains and laterals b. Coverage test prior to planting c. Pre-maintenance observation d. Final observation

2. Contractor shall provide all equipment and personnel required to conduct tests.

3. Provide up-to-date Project Record Drawings at each review. 4. If Owner is called out for review prior to the system being ready as

specified, the contractor shall be back-charged for the full cost of the review.

B. Pressure Tests:

1. Do not install remote control valves, quick couplers, or any other valve assembly until testing of pressure main lines has been accepted by the Owner.


2. Testing shall occur with trenches open. Small amounts of backfill between fittings shall be allowed to prevent pipe displacement. All fittings shall be visible prior to testing.

3. Test all pressure supply lines under hydrostatic pressure of 125 P.S.I. minimum. Pipe shall hold pressure for a period of six (6) consecutive hours with no more than five (5) P.S.I. loss in order to pass test.

4. Lateral lines shall be tested under full line pressure for a period of one hour prior to backfilling. Cap all heads and center load pipe between fittings prior to testing.

5. Correct all deficiencies revealed by tests to the satisfaction of the Owner.

C. System Flushing: 1. After sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, and prior to

installation of automatic valves, quick couplers, and sprinkler nozzles, thoroughly flush all lines with water to completely clean lines of debris.

2. Install sprinkler nozzles only after lines have been flushed to the satisfaction of the Owner.

D. Coverage Tests:

1. Perform coverage tests after all systems are completed and operational, after finish grading (Refer to Section 02911 – Landscape Soil Preparation) has been completed, but prior to any planting, in the presence of the Owner.

2. Correct all deficiencies to the satisfaction of the Owner prior to planting.

3.7 BACKFILLING

A. General: 1. Backfill only after specified tests have been performed and accepted. 2. Clean trenches of all debris and deleterious material before backfilling. 3. Backfill, as shown in Drawings, with native material granular in nature and

free from deleterious material. Install pipe detection tape over entire run of mainline as shown in Drawings.

4. Compact trenching to 95% relative density under pavement and 85% relative density within planting areas.

5. Dress off trench surfaces flush with finish grade.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and balance system to eliminate over spray and fogging/misting and as directed by Owner.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owners personnel in complete and proper operation of system prior to Final Acceptance.

3.10 FINAL REVIEW

A. Provide Owner with all Record Drawing submittals, turn-over materials, salvaged items and warranty requirements prior to Final Review.

County Office of Education - 16273.000 Section 32 90 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Planting

SECTION 32 90 00

PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and


1.2 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install all plantings, staking, mulch placement, root barrier, wood header and related work thereto.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 01 56 39 – Tree Protection and Trimming 2. Section 31 22 00 – Grading 4. Section 32 80 00 – Irrigation 5. Section 32 91 00 – Landscape Soil Preparation 6. Section 32 93 00 – Landscape Maintenance

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Reviews: The Contractor shall specifically request the following reviews prior to progressing with the work:

1. Plant material approval 2. Plant layout 3. Finish grade 4. Substantial completion 5. Final completion

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Plant Material: Within 21 calendar days after award of contract, Contractor shall submit notice to the Owner’s Representative certifying the quantity and species of plant material ordered, the nursery supplying the material, any plant material unavailable at the time, and proposed plant substitutions. No plants shall be ordered or delivered prior to written acceptance by the Owner’s Representative.

B. Mulch: Within 21 calendar days after award of contract, Contractor shall submit

written certificates stating composition and origin of mulch to the Owner’s Representative. Contractor shall submit two 1-gallon samples with certificates.

C. Plant Materials Products:

1. Thirty (30) days prior to planting, submit four (4) copies of documentation that all plants specified have been ordered. Include names and addresses of all suppliers.


2. Substitutions: If substitutions are required, they shall be brought to the attention of the Owner, at time of submittal, for any requested substitutions.

3. Submit four (4) copies of product data or “cut-sheets” for all products proposed for use.

C. Samples: Submit four (4) samples of the following (1 quart size “zip-lock” plastic bag min. each): 1. Soil amendment (with current evaluation and sieve analysis). 2. Bark mulch top dress. 3. Import topsoil.

D. Certificates: Submit “cut-sheets” or other product literature showing certified

chemical analysis of the following: 1. All fertilizers. 2. All herbicides.

1.5 SOURCE/QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Control of work: Comply with the Standard Specifications. B. Control of materials: Comply with the Standard Specifications. C. Contractor shall provide on-site at all times during execution of this Section at

least one person who is thoroughly familiar and experienced with the materials and products being installed and proper methods of their installation. Notify the Owner immediately of all changes in supervision.

D. General: Ship plant material with certificates of inspection required by governing

authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to plant materials (as applicable). E. Tree, Shrubs and Plants: Provide trees, shrubs and plants of quantity, size,

genus, species and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 “American Standard for Nursery Stock.” Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in a recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, etc., larvae, and defects such as girdling or bound roots, knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions or disfigurement.

F. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturers certified

analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable.

G. Quality Review: The Owner shall inspect & approve all trees and shrubs before

planting for compliance with specified requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quantity. Owner retains right to further review trees and shrubs for size and condition of root systems, trunks, stems branches or structure, buds, etc., and to disqualify unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during the progress of work. Owner will tag all trees to be retained for the project. Remove disqualified trees or shrubs immediately from project site and replace with


materials acceptable to Owner. Provide two-week notice of plant arrival date of all plant material.


A. General: 1. Handle and store all products of this Section in such a manner as to

protect them from damage at all times. 2. Storage of products on-site shall be coordinated by the Contractor in an

orderly manner.

B. Plants: 1. Delivery: Coordinate with Owner. Provide proper identification for

landscape labor force and vehicles at all times while on site. 2. Storage: Coordinate with Owner. Provide exposure as required by plant

variety and provide wind & solar protection for all plants. Water regularly to maintain thorough moisture in root zone. Temporary, automatic irrigation system will be required at discretion of Owner if extended storage period becomes necessary. Protect dark colored plant containers from direct exposure to the sun.

3. Contractor shall protect and maintain all plant material from time of delivery to time of final acceptance. Owner shall not be responsible for losses due to vandalism, theft, or severe weather conditions.

4. Labeling: At least one plant of each variety or type shall be legibly labeled at all times clearly indicating correct plant name as indicated on Drawings. Labels shall be durable, waterproof, and vandal resistant.

C. Fertilizers:

1. Deliver in original, unopened containers with original labels intact and legible which state the guaranteed chemical analysis.

D. Bulk Material:

1. Coordinate delivery and storage of bulk material with Owner. 2. Confine materials to neat piles in areas acceptable to the Owner.

1.7 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature (AJCHN):

Standardized Plant Names B. American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. (AAN):

American Standard for Nursery stock C. Sunset Western Garden Book, Lane Publishing CO. D. Agricultural Code of California. E. General provisions of the “Greenbook” Standard Specifications for Public Works

Construction, 2000 Edition, written and promulgated by Public Works Standards, Inc.



A. Planting operations shall not be conducted under the following conditions,

subject to the discretion of the Owner: 1. Freezing weather 2. Excessive heat 3. High winds 4. Wet conditions

1.9 GUARANTEE

A. All work executed and all materials provided or used under this Section shall be guaranteed, in writing by the contractor, to be free of defects and poor workmanship for a period of one year after Final Acceptance.

B. All plant materials shall be guaranteed to be in a healthy and thriving condition

one (1) year after Final Acceptance, unless it can be proven, to the satisfaction of the Owner that the unhealthy or non-thriving material is due to causes other than the Contractor’s materials or workmanship.

C. Replace all dead plants and plants not in vigorous condition immediately upon

notification by Owner during Guaranty Period. Replaced plants shall be subsequently guaranteed by the contractor for an additional year following date of replacement.

D. Repair all defective materials and work as acceptable to the Owner during

guaranty period.

1.10 TURF ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

A. Turf Establishment period shall include complete establishment of turf and two mowings as specified herein, prior to the commencement of the specified Landscape Maintenance Period.

1.11 MAINTENANCE PERIOD

A. Refer to Section 32 93 00 - Landscape Maintenance for information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Nomenclature and Labels: Plant botanical names shall conform to "Standardized Plant Names", second edition, and secondly, "A Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants of California", Manual 32, University of California. All plants of each clone, species, and cultivar shall be delivered to the site labeled with their full botanical names. Every plant species shall be labeled with no less than one label for every ten plants of a species.

B. Quality: Minimum quality of all plant material shall conform to prevailing

published specifications of the California Association of Nurserymen and the American Association of Nurserymen 'American Standard for Nursery Stock'


unless otherwise indicated. Additional specifications shall be indicated on the drawings.

C. Quantities: the quantities shown on the plant list and in labels are for the Owner’s

Representative’s use and are not to be construed as the complete and accurate limits of the contract. Contractor shall furnish and install all plants shown schematically on the drawings. Any unlabelled plants shall be considered as the smaller size shown for that type on the drawings.

D. Root Systems: All container-grown stock shall be grown in its container for at

least six months prior to its planting. Contractor shall allow one percent of the quantity of plants for removal and inspection. Any plant material, within one year following the final acceptance of the project, determined by the Owner’s Representative to be defective, restricted, declining or otherwise deficient due to abnormal root growth, shall be replaced by Contractor, to the equal condition of adjacent plants, at the time of replacement.

E. Trees: All trees shall have straight trunks of uniform taper, larger at the bottom,

unless otherwise noted. Trunks shall be free of damaged bark, with all minor abrasions and cuts showing healing tissue. Sucker basal growth and sucker lateral growth shall be removed and treated to eliminate resprouting. Normal lower side branching shall remain. Trees unable to stand upright without support shall be rejected.

F. Health: Foliage roots and stems of all plants shall be of vigorous health and

normal habit of growth for its species. All plants shall be free of all diseases, insect stages, burns, or disfiguring characteristics.

G. Tree Stakes and Ties: Refer to the Drawings. H. Untrue Species: All plant material, within two years following the final acceptance

of the project, determined by the Owner’s Representative to be untrue to the species, clone, and/or variety specified, shall be replaced by the Contractor, to the equal condition of adjacent plants at the time of replacement.

I. Mulch: Shall be shredded redwood bark containing no preservatives or dyes of

any kind. J. Root Barrier: Shall be by "DeepRoot", model no. UB 24-2, 24" Universal Barrier,

or equal. K. Sod Turf Seed: Sod turf seed mix shall be approved by the Owner, and shall be

as specified on the Drawings.

L. Herbicides: Shall be as follows: 1. Pre-emergent: “Ronstar-G” pelletized, “Surflan” liquid, or acceptable

equal. 2. Other: All other herbicides shall be accepted by Owner prior to use.

M. Wood Header: Wood header shall be as specified on the Drawings.

N. Other Materials:


1. Provide all other materials necessary to complete landscaping work as shown on Drawings and specified herein.

2. All products and materials, including those specified above, shall be new, first quality as acceptable to the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Plant Material Approvals: Before planting operations commence, all or a representative sampling of plant material shall be reviewed at the site by the Owner’s Representative. Defective plants installed without such review shall be removed from the site upon request by the Owner’s Representative and an acceptable plant substituted in its place. Provide two-week notice of plant arrival date of all plants prior to installation. Plant review will occur once (within span of one business day) for all plant material.

B. Layout: Only those plants to be planted in any single day shall be laid out.

Locations of all plants shall be reviewed prior to planting. Plants installed without this review shall be transplanted as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

C. Protection of Plants: Contractor shall maintain all plant material in a healthy

growing condition prior to and during planting operations. Contractor shall be responsible for vandalism, theft and damage to plant material until the commencement of the maintenance period.

D. Root Systems: Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of all root systems

on plant materials. Inspection shall include, but not be limited to, checking for rootbound stock, encircling roots at the perimeter of the container, girdling roots at the top surface of the rootball, and other defective root conditions. Such inspections shall include the complete removal of soil from one percent of plant material containers, or at least one plant from each nursery and each plant type. Contractor shall cut defective or potentially defective girdling, rootbound, and encircling roots and spread the root system into the surrounding backfill. The Contractor shall reject plants with excessively defective root systems.

E. Pruning: Contractor shall do no pruning without the specific approval of the

Owner’s Representative. Plants pruned without approval shall be replaced by the Contractor, if required.

F. Basins: Construct basins as necessary to water plants. Remove basins from all

plants under a permanent irrigation system prior to final inspection and finish grade the planting area. Basins for plants to be hand-watered shall remain in place. Basin bottoms shall drain to berm away from plant stem.

G. Staking: All trees shall be staked as drawn with stakes driven securely into

existing soil aligned with the trunk and perpendicular (where applicable) to the direction of the prevailing winds.

H. NOT USED.


I. Plant Pits, Backfill and Finish Grading: See SOIL PREPARATION Section for materials and installation requirements.

J. Cleanup: After completion of all operations, Contractor shall remove all trash,

excess soil and other debris. All walks and pavement shall be swept and washed clean, leaving the entire area in a neat, orderly condition.

K. Weed Control Treatment: Prior to applying mulch, all planted areas (excluding

turf) shall be treated with Regal Ronstar per the manufacturer's specifications for pre-emergent treatment.

L. Mulch: Place a two-inch minimum layer of mulch in all areas indicated on the plans. No mulch shall be placed within the biodetention facility, including the slopes surrounding it.

3.2 TREE, SHRUB AND GROUND COVER PLANTING

A. Layout: Plant layout shall be inspected and approved by a representative of the Owner prior to installation. This inspection will occur simultaneous to the plant inspection day.

B. Plant Pit Excavation:

1. Excavate pits to sizes indicated in Drawings. 2. Thoroughly scarify all sides of plant pits to remove "auger slick" and

encourage root penetration.

C. Set trees and shrubs in pit on undisturbed native soil or compacted backfill base as per Details. Set plumb and rotate plant for best appearance. Thoroughly scarify all plant rootballs to eliminate any circling roots and to encourage root growth. Set plant so root crown level will be above surrounding grade, after settlement, as indicated in the Drawings, and with nursery stakes facing north.

D. Contractor shall place plant materials so they do not interfere with irrigation

system or inhibit required coverage. Plant locations may be adjusted as long as design intent is not compromised. Contractor shall give minimum 10 full working days notice for observation. Contractor shall set out plant material as per plan and receive approval from Owner with respect to plant health and location prior to installation. Contractor shall replace any material as requested by the Owner.

E. When work has to occur under the drip line of existing trees not scheduled for

removal, the contractor shall use all possible care to avoid injury to the trees and tree roots. Grade in lines radial to the existing trees rather than tangential. All partial cuts or tears through roots 2” in diameter and larger shall be cut clean. Trenches adjacent to roots shall be filled within 24 hours after excavation. Where this is not possible, the side of the trench adjacent to the tree, and any exposed roots, shall be kept shaded and moist with dampened burlap or canvas at all times.

F. Backfilling:

1. Backfill mix for 1 gallon size and larger shall consist of 100% native site soil with plant tabs added per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Tamp backfill mix under and around rootballs.


3. Flood plant pit when half backfilled; allow to drain. 4. Complete backfilling. Tamp as necessary, do not over compact.

G. Watering:

1. Thoroughly water plants immediately after planting. 2. Construct water basins as specified in Drawings.

H. Finish Grade Restoration: Restore finish grades by hand raking. Dispose of

excess subgrade soil.

3.3 TREE STAKING

A. Stake trees as shown in Drawings. B. Set stakes plumb, without damage to rootball and sufficiently deep to provide

necessary support. C. Tree ties shall be tied loosely enough to allow movement, yet taut enough to

support tree.

3.4 GROUND COVER PLANTING: Refer to the Drawings.

3.5 HERBICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and a recommendation from a state licensed Pest Control Advisor.

B. Apply pre-emergent herbicide to soil prior to placement of bark mulch top-dress.

3.6 BARK MULCH TOP DRESS

A. Apply two (2) inches of specified bark mulch top dress to all non-turf planting areas and other areas as may be specified in the Drawings.

B. Rake bark mulch top dress evenly to create a uniform surface and pull bark

mulch top dress away from trunks or stalks of plants. Leave 18” bark-free collar around all tree trunks, 6” bark-free collar around shrubs.

3.7 ROOT BARRIER

A. Install root barrier per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install root barrier as indicated on the drawings.

3.8 WOOD HEADER

A. Install wood header as indicated on the drawings.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner shall review and accept the following prior to contractor proceeding

with subsequent work:


1. Preparation - At completion of finish grading and prior to planting, grading tolerances and soil preparation shall be checked for conformance to Construction Documents.

2. Layout - Layout of plants, header board, and other major items shall be as directed and/or accepted by the Owner.

3. Pre-maintenance review - At completion of this Section, work shall be reviewed to check conformance with Construction Documents. Acceptance by Owner shall mark beginning of the specified maintenance period. If acceptance is not given, a punch-list of items requiring attention will be issued to the Contractor. One more review will be allowed after contractor certifies in writing that the punch-list has been completed. Punch-list items shall be completed to the Owners satisfaction prior to the Owner issuing acceptance of the improvements and commencement of the Specified Maintenance Period.

B. All costs incurred from repeat reviews required due to contractor not being

prepared or non-conformance with Construction Documents shall be back charged to the contractor at $500.00 per review.

3.10 TURF SOD

A. Seed mixture and source shall be confirmed and approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to delivery to the site.

B. After application of soil amendments and preparation of soil has been completed

as specified, the areas to receive sod shall be brought to a smooth, uncompacted grade.

C. Contractor shall fine grade so that proper drainage of the entire area is assured.

All surface irregularities, including gullies, shall be removed. All rocks, soil lumps, and other deleterious materials larger than one inch (1") shall be removed and the area raked smooth.

D. Contractor shall avoid any compaction of the soils after treatment and shall not

permit vehicular or equipment traffic over such areas. In the event of such compaction, the Contractor shall be required to recultivate any areas thus compacted, at his own expense.

A. All soil preparation and planting operations shall be conducted under favorable

weather conditions only. Soil shall not be worked when excessively dry or wet, and the Owner’s Representative reserves the right to stop any work taking place during a period when conditions are considered detrimental to soil structure or plant growth.


County Office of Education - 16273.000 Section 32 91 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Landscape Soil Preparation

SECTION 32 91 00

LANDSCAPE SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Furnish and install all landscape soil preparation as shown and specified, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: import topsoil placement, organic amendment and fertilizer placement, soil scarification, and finish grading.


1. Earthwork 2. Planting

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Reviews: Contractor shall specifically request at least two days in advance the following reviews prior to progressing with the work:

1. Completion of rough grading 2. Completion of regrading of native material 3. Verification of amendment incorporation depths 4. Finish grade

B. Certification: Written certificates stating quantity, type, and composition, weight

and origin for all amendments and chemicals shall be delivered to the Owner’s Representative before the material is used on the site.

C. Soil Samples: Contractor shall provide a one-quart sample of the import topsoil

and onsite topsoil to Waypoint Analytical in San Jose, (408) 727-0330, for their testing for conformance to this specification. No material shall be delivered to the site, placed on-site, graded on-site, or otherwise modified until the Owner’s Representative approves the material. All testing costs shall be paid for by the Contractor. Contractor shall allow for sufficient time for such testing prior to construction. Testing costs for the initial samples and costs for any additional samples due to non-compliance shall be paid for by the Contractor.

D. Amendment Samples: Contractor shall provide a one-quart sample of each proposed amendment to Soil and Plant Laboratory of Santa Clara, (408) 727-0330, for their testing for conformance to this specification. No material shall be delivered to the site until the Owner’s Representative approves the samples. Testing costs shall be paid for by the Contractor.


E. Planting Areas: All areas to be planted, whether in seed, container stock, flats, or otherwise, are defined as planting areas in these documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Topsoil shall be onsite or imported topsoil, and meet the classification

of ‘Sandy Loam’, unless otherwise noted. Submit samples and current onsite soil fertility and structure analyses in the quantity previously specified. 1. A sample of the proposed import topsoil and onsite topsoil shall be

submitted for analysis 45 days prior to delivery or placement. The acceptable imported topsoil shall be fertile and friable, free from refuse, debris, heavy clay, rocks (rock, stones, rubble, clay clods, etc. over 2" in diameter), noxious seeds, roots, toxins, and any other deleterious materials per the discretion of the Owner. a. Onsite stockpiled topsoil may be used as import topsoil if it meets

the criteria for the ‘Sandy Loam’ classification, as determined by a soil test and report submitted by the Contractor.

2. Soil Chemistry Characteristics shall be: a. Reaction- pH of saturated paste = 5.5 to 7.5

b. Salinity (Electrical conductivity in mmho/cm) = <4.0

c. Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) = <6.0

d. Sodium = <5.0 milliequivalents per liter

e. Chloride = <5.0 milliequivalents per liter

f. Boron (Parts Per Million in extract) = <1.0

3. Soil Fertility Characteristics a. Adequate amounts of nitrogen, potassium, phosphorus, calcium,

and magnesium should be available to support healthy plant growth. Deficiencies shall be mitigated with inorganic fertilizer amendments following importation.

4. Soil Physical Properties a. Soil texture shall be a sandy loam or loam as evaluated by an

USDA sieve analysis. Sand fraction of sandy loam soil shall be properly distributed so that soil is not subject to compaction. Minimum organic content shall be minimum 2% and maximum 5% based on dry weight and determined by ash method of analysis.

b. Required Particle Size Distribution (sandy loam): Medium sand: 5-10% Fine sand: 80-85% Silt and Clay: <7%

B. Fertilizer: Shall be determined from soils analysis results. For purposes of

bidding only, assume the following: Assume per 1000 square feet:

3 cubic yards Nitrogen Stabilized Organic Amendment 125 pounds Agricultural Gypsum 3 pounds Ureaform 38-0-0 (20% water insoluble N) 20 pounds Commercial Fertilizer (6-20-20)

10 pounds Potassium Sulfate (0-0-50)


C. Organic Soil Amendment: Shall be determined from soils analysis results. For purposes of bidding only, assume the following:

Organic Soil Amendment shall be “Super Humus” Compos as available from BFI Organics Inc. 1995 Oakland Road, San Jose, California, 95131 Ph.: (408) 262-1401 Fax: (408) 262-0603; or “Organic Compost” as available from Z-Best Products Inc., 705 Los Esteros Road, San Jose Ca. 95134 Ph.: (408) 934-6152 Fax: (408) 263-2393; or acceptable equal. Acceptable material shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

a) Gradation: A minimum of 90% of the material shall pass a 2" screen. Material passing shall meet the following criteria: % Passing Sieve Designation 85-100 9.51 mm (3/8") 50-80 2.38 mm (No. 8) 0-40 500 Micron (No. 35)

b) Organic Content: Minimum 25% based on dry weight and determined by ash method. Minimum 240 lbs. organic matter per cubic yard of compost.

c) Carbon to Nitrogen Ratio: Maximum 35:1 if material is claimed to be nitrogen stabilized.

d) PH: 5.5-8.0 as determined in saturated paste. e) Soluble Salts: Refer to manufacturer's specification

guidelines. f) Moisture Content: 25-60% g) Contaminants: Shall be free of glass, metal and visible

plastics. h) Color / Odor: Color shall be dark brown to black. Odor

shall be soil-like, (musty or moldy) not sour, ammonia-like or putrid.

D. Soil Sulphur: Shall be agricultural grade, 99% pure, pelletized/granular form,

not powdered. E. Iron Sulphate: Shall be “Gro-Power Premium Green” non-staining iron with

micronutrients, soil penetrant, trace minerals, and humic acids as available through Gro-Power Inc. Ph.: (800) 473-1307, or Approved Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LIMITS AND GRADES

A. Prior to commencing soil preparation operations, Contractor shall request a review by the Owner’s Representative to verify specified limits and grades of work completed to date and soil preparation work to commence. Contractor shall complete the rough grading as necessary to round the top and toe of all slopes, providing naturalized contouring to integrate newly graded areas with the natural topography. Finish grading under this section shall be completed in accordance with the grades indicated on the landscape drawings.


B. All planting areas shall receive topsoil to a depth of 12” below the final finish grades, except at turf lawn areas the depth shall be 6” below the final finish grade.

3.2 SUBGRADE AND TOPSOIL SCARIFICATION

A. Prior to placing topsoil, all subgrade surface shall be ripped twice in opposite direction to a depth of 12”. Upon completion of scarification, compact to 85% relative density.

B. Where no additional topsoil is placed onto a planting area, surface shall be ripped twice in opposite direction to a depth of 12”. Upon completion of scarification, compact to 85% relative density.

3.3 ORGANIC AMENDMENT AND FERTILIZER INCORPORATION The following recommendation for topsoil is for bidding purposes only.

A. Shall be determined from soil analysis results. For bidding purposes only

assume the specified materials shall be uniformly distributed throughout all new turf planting areas and incorporated to a homogeneously blended soil depth of six inches.

3.4 PLANT PITS

A. Plant pits shall have their sides and bottoms loosened or otherwise broken to prevent glazed or compacted surfaces and shall be as shown on the planting detail.

3.5 BACKFILL

A. Only unamended soil shall be used beneath the root ball; cultivate bottom of plant pit to improve porosity. Backfill around sides of rootball shall be a mixture of 1/3 organic amendment and fertilizer and 2/3 soil excavated from plant pit.

3.6 PLANT TABLETS

A. All container plants shall receive plant tablets as follows: One-gallon plants two 21-gram tablets Five-gallon plants five 21-gram tablets Fifteen-gallon plants twelve 21-gram tablets 24 inch box trees eighteen 21-gram tablets 36 inch box trees & larger twenty-three 21-gram tablets Space the tablets evenly around the root ball halfway up backfill touching side

of root ball. Owner’s Representative may require excavation of plants selected at random for conformance review.

3.7 FINISH GRADING


A. Contractor shall finish grade all irrigated planting areas unless otherwise noted, and shall remove all rocks and clods over one cubic inch to a depth of one inch below finish grade. All areas shall be smooth and uniformly graded. All erosion damage during the construction period shall be repaired by the Contractor.

B. Unless otherwise noted, all soil finish grades shall be one inch below finish

surface of walks, boxes, pavements, and curbs. END OF SECTION OF SECTION 32 91 00

County Office of Education - 16273.000 Section 32 93 00 - Page 1 Calaveras Head Start Building Landscape Maintenance

SECTION 32 93 00

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SCOPE

A. Work in this section includes the growing and maintenance operations necessary to establish the shrubs, trees, and other plantings; to provide pest and disease control, general site clean-up, maintain the irrigation system and related construction elements.


1. Section 01 56 39 – Tree Protection and Trimming 2. Section 32 84 00 – Planting Irrigation 3. Section 32 90 00 – Planting 4. Section 32 91 00 – Landscape Soil Preparation

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Soil Testing: Contractor shall collect one one-quart sample in the turf area of the in-place topsoil 20 calendar days after completion of planting and submit to Waypoint Analytical in San Jose, (408) 727-0330, for maintenance period fertilizer recommendation. Test results shall be made available to the Owner’s Representative. Sample shall be a representative composite taken from several planting areas. Cost of soil test shall be paid for by the Contractor.

B. Herbicide: Submit a written recommendation from a State of California

appropriately licensed individual along with complete product data from proposed manufacturer, for review by Owner’s Representative and/or Owner’s appropriately licensed individual.

1.4 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. General provisions of the “Greenbook” Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, 2000 Edition, written and promulgated by Public Works Standards, Inc.


A. Control of work: Comply with the Standard Specifications. B. Control of materials: Comply with the Standard Specifications.


C. The Maintenance Contractor shall be experienced in horticulture and landscape maintenance, practices and techniques, and shall provide sufficient number of workers with adequate and well maintained equipment to perform the work during the Landscape Maintenance Period.

1.6 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PERIOD A. Landscape Maintenance Period shall be 60 Calendar Days. B. Continuously maintain the entire project area during the progress of the work,

during the specified Landscape Maintenance Period or until Final Acceptance of the project by the Owner.

C. Landscape Maintenance Period shall not start until all elements of construction,

planting and irrigation for the entire project are in accordance with Contract Documents. A prime requirement is that all landscape areas shall be planted. If such criteria are met to the satisfaction of the Owner, a written notification shall be issued to establish the beginning date of Landscape Maintenance Period. Additionally, all elements contained on the Pre-maintenance Punch-list shall have been completed to the satisfaction of the Owner.

D. Any day of improper maintenance, as determined by the Owner, shall not be

credited as an acceptable Landscape Maintenance Period day. The Landscape Maintenance Period shall be extended on a day-for-day basis should this occur until proper maintenance, as determined by the Owner, is being performed.

E. Contractor shall secure the project site against trespass, vandalism or theft

during the Landscape Maintenance Period, subject to the satisfaction of the Owner.

1.7 GUARANTY

A. All work executed under this section shall be guaranteed against any and all poor, inadequate or inferior materials and/or workmanship, as determined by the Owner, for the entire Landscape Maintenance Period and for a period of one year after Final Acceptance of project.

B. The contractor shall install all replacement material in conformance with the

Contract Documents.

1.8 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Upon completion of all project work, including Landscape Maintenance Period, the Owner will, upon written request from the contractor (10 working day minimum notice), make an observation to determine conformance with the Contract Documents.

B. If, at the final project observation, work is found at variance with the Contract

Documents, or is otherwise unacceptable, the Owner shall issue a punch-list of items requiring attention to the contractor. The Contractor shall repair, replace or otherwise correct all non-compliant work, continue Landscape Maintenance Period, and make another written request to the Owner to verify punch-list


completion. If punch-list is found to be incomplete, or if site is still found to be unacceptable, the Contractor shall be back-charged as necessary for all additional observations required to issue Final Acceptance. All replacement materials and installations shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. Remove rejected work and materials immediately from project. Prior to Final Acceptance, Contractor shall provide the Owner with all Record Drawings (accurate “as builts”) and written Guaranty Statements in accordance with the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fertilizer: Used during the course of the maintenance period shall be determined by soils test required under Part 1 of this Section. For bidding purposes only, assume the use of ammonium sulfate (21-0-0) at 5 lbs. per 1000 SF, minimum of two applications.

B. Water: During the course of construction and maintenance period water shall be

paid for by the Owner.

C. Herbicide: Shall be a commercially available pre-emergent herbicide material recommended for this project and these plantings by a State of California appropriately licensed individual. The licensed individual shall review all planting, including trees, the types and extent of soil preparation, the irrigation systems, drainage patterns, and other project characteristics to verify type, compatibility, and recommend the appropriate herbicide(s) for use. Contractor shall be responsible for all overspray, spreading, runoff, plant health, and other impacts from the use of the herbicide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TIME LIMITS:

A. The maintenance period shall commence from the date of substantial completion of planting as defined in paragraph 3.8 below, and extend for a 60 calendar day period thereafter, or until the acceptance of Final Completion.

3.2 WATERING:

A. Water appropriately (based on plant type and includes non-irrigated hydroseeded areas) to insure vigorous and healthy growth until work is accepted. Water or irrigate in a manner to prevent runoff or erosion. When hand watering, use a “water wand” to break the water force.

3.3 FERTILIZER APPLICATION:

A. Fertilizer(s) shall be applied per Soil and Plant Laboratory recommendations. For bidding purposes, assume initial application to be two weeks after planting and subsequent applications to be at 30-day intervals.

3.4 HERBICIDE APPLICATION:


A. Herbicide shall not be used until all plant material has been planted a minimum of 20 calendar days. All planting areas shall be kept weed-free by non-herbicide methods during this time period. Herbicide shall not be applied to any areas that are or have been seeded. Contractor must apply the material in conformance with the written recommendations of the State appropriately licensed individual.

3.5 BASIC REQUIREMENTS:

A. All planting areas shall be kept weed-free at all times during the maintenance period. All pest and disease control shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. All planting areas shall be kept at optimum moisture for plant growth. Settlement of soil and plants and soil erosion shall be repaired and areas replanted as required. Dying or deficient plants shall be replaced as soon as they become apparent.

3.6 WEEDING:

A. Entire project site shall be kept free of weeds at all times. Control new weed growth with pre-emergent herbicides dispensed by mechanical means. If weeds develop, use legally approved herbicides.

B. No herbicide shall be used without the Owner prior consent. Apply in accordance

with manufacturers' recommendations and a recommendation from a state licensed Pest Control Advisor. Use only herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If selective herbicides are used, extreme caution shall be observed so as not to damage any other plants. Spraying shall be done only under windless conditions, and after posting notification of intended spraying at least 24 hours in advance.

C. Disease and Pest Control: Disease and insect damage shall be controlled by the

use of fungicides and insecticides, subject to the prior consent of the Owner.

D. Pruning: 1. Trees: Prune trees to select and develop permanent scaffold branches; to

eliminate narrow v-shaped branch forks that lack strength; to reduce potential toppling and wind damage by thinning out crowns; to maintain a natural appearance and to balance crown with roots. Prune only as directed by the Owner, or as required in an emergency situation.

2. Shrubs: The objectives of shrub pruning are the same as for trees. Shrubs shall not be clipped into balled or boxed forms unless such is required by the design.

3. All pruning cuts shall be made to lateral branches, buds or near flush with the trunk. “Stubbing” or heading cuts shall not be permitted.

4. Only skilled workers shall perform pruning work in accordance with standard horticultural pruning practices. Remove from the project all pruned branches and material. Remove and replace any plant material excessively pruned or malformed resulting from improper pruning practices at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Staking & Guying: Stakes and guys shall remain in place through the

maintenance period and shall be periodically inspected and adjusted by the


contractor to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds, loosen for proper growth or other appropriate reasons.

F. Protection: The contractor shall maintain protection of all planting areas until

Final Acceptance. Damaged areas shall be repaired or replaced at the contractor’s expense. Contractor shall re-use the 6’ high chain link fence that was used during the course of construction and locate it around all planting areas for the entire length of Landscape Maintenance Period.

3.7 TURF LAWN CARE: A. The Contractor shall maintain all lawns in a healthy growing condition by

performing the following operations and other work incidental thereto: 1. Mowing: Lawns shall be mown at least once a week and as necessary to

maintain a neat, trim appearance. The lawn shall be mowed to height determined by District Maintenance Representative. The cutting edges of all mowing equipment shall be kept in a sharp condition. If reel type mowers are used, they shall be kept in proper adjustment. Bruising or rough cutting of grass will not be permitted. Papers, toys, rubbish and debris shall be removed by the Contractor prior to mowing. Grass cuttings shall be removed after mowing.

2. Trimming: a. All edges shall be trimmed after each cutting or as necessary.

Trimming shall include cutting all grass along walls, fences, foundations, curbs, sidewalks, shrubs, tree trunks, poles, or any other object within or immediately adjacent to the lawn areas.

b. The trimming shall be done by power edgers or by hand, but in no case will soil sterilants or other types of weed killers be permitted for use in trimming or edging. Use of string trimmers shall be approved by District Representative.

c. Trim around sprinkler heads as necessary to provide maximum water coverage.

d. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to tree trunks, shrubs, sprinklers, buildings and other structures. Damage shall be reported to the District and repairs promptly made.

e. After trimming, all trimmings and debris shall be raked off lawns, swept off sidewalks and paved areas, and disposed of.

3. Weed, disease and pest control: a. Lawns shall be kept free of weeds. Weeding may be done

manually or by the use of District’s approved selective herbicides. Extreme caution shall be observed, if selective weed killers are used, so as not to damage any other plants. If spraying is done, it shall only be done at times when there is no wind. Spray applicators shall comply with all state requirements and certification.

b. Insecticides, fungicides or herbicides shall be applied subject to the prior consent and approval of the District. Insects and diseases shall be controlled by the use of District approved insecticides and fungicides.

c. Moles and gophers shall be controlled by methods approved by the District.

4. Depressions, Swales and Bare Areas:


a. Depressions shall be brought level to grade with topsoil and reseeded as necessary.

b. Swales shall be reconstructed, reseeded or improved as necessary to provide adequate drainage.

c. Bare places shall be reseeded or resodded as necessary. 5. Watering: a. Lawns shall be deeply watered as weather conditions require to

provide adequate moisture for optimum growth. Lawns shall at no time show a lack of fresh green color or a loss of resilience due to lack of water.

b. Wherever the permanently installed sprinkler system does not adequately cover the areas, the Contractor shall set out additional hoses and sprinklers as required to uniformly water all areas.

c. Watering shall be done at night or in the early morning. d. Watering shall be controlled to prevent excessive runoff, pond,

and over watering. 6. Fertilizing: a. Turf shall be well hydrated prior to fertilizing and shall be watered

immediately after fertilization to prevent burning of grass. b. Burning of grass due to improper fertilization shall be considered

as "unsatisfactory work" and shall be sodded within 24 hours.

3.8 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITY:

A. Work installed under this contract that is damaged or stolen prior to Substantial Completion shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. After Substantial Completion and through the maintenance period, these damages and similar factors such as extensive litter, abuse and defacement shall be the Owner’s responsibility to repair or replace and shall not be a part of this contract. No planting shall be guaranteed beyond the maintenance period, except as to conformance to specified species and variety, and except as to conditions specified under "Root Systems" of Planting, Section 32 90 00.

3.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

A. Substantial completion shall be deemed as the time all major plantings, including trees and turf, are installed, and when all other work is satisfactorily completed (with the exception of minor items to be completed as noted upon a checklist compiled by the Owner’s Representative). Individual bare spots in turf areas shall not exceed one square feet. Maintenance period shall not commence until work is deemed substantially complete by the Owner’s Representative.

3.9 FINAL REVIEW:

A. Contractor shall request a final review of the project at least five working days in advance of the proposed date. Failure to request this notice shall automatically extend the date of completion. The maintenance period will continue until project is deemed complete.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 33 00 00 - Page 1Calaveras Head Start Building Piped Utiltiies

SECTION 33 00 00

PIPED UTILITIES

1.00 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


1. Connection to existing systems.

2. Pipe installation and connection to building stubouts.


1. Trenching, backfilling and compacting: Section 31 23 33.

2. Storm Drainage Utilities: Section 33 40 00.

3. Sanitary Sewerage Utilities: Section 33 30 00.

4. Water Utilities: Section 33 10 00.


A. Refer to specific utility Sections as noted above.

1.03 HANDLING

A. Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store plastic piping, insulation, joint materials, fittings, valves and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on ground. Keep interiors of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.

B. Handle pipe, fittings, valves and other accessories in such a manner as to ensure deliver to the trench in sound and undamaged condition. Take special care to avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings; make satisfactory repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Carry pipe to the trench; do not drag it.

C. The pipe will be inspected at destination to assure compliance with specified requirements. Any pipe or couplings that are found to be defective or that do not meet the requirements of the Specifications shall be replaced. Rejection of 10% of any shipment shall be cause of, and will be considered sufficient reason for, rejection of the entire shipment.


2.00 PRODUCTS

A. Refer to specific utility Sections as noted above.

3.00 EXECUTION

A. Any connections to public improvements require notification of, and inspection by the City or Public Utility Company.

3.01 CONNECTION TO EXISTING SYSTEM(S)

A. Make connections to existing lines at a time which will cause a minimum of disruption to the existing system. Any service interruption(s) shall be coordinated with and approved by the Engineer. Overtime costs shall be paid for by the Contractor.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with and arrange for "hot" tap connections to existing mains by forces of the Water Service Agency. Owner will pay separately for work to be done by the Water Service Agency.


A. Laying and jointing of pipe and fitting shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Joint deflections shall not exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer. There shall be no shoulder or unevenness along the interior of the pipe at the shoulder joints.

B. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Do not under any circumstances drop or dump pipe, valves, fittings or other appurtenances into trenches. Do not drag pipe with preformed rubber joint seals against trench walls and damage the seals.

C. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the site and work into place without springing or forcing. Do not use pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper installation of jointing material.

D. Pipe fittings, valves and accessories shall be carefully inspected before and after installation and those found defective shall be replaced. Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings. Before the pipe is laid, the interior of the joint of the preceding pipe and fitting shall be carefully cleaned. After each section of the pipe has been laid to line and grade and jointed to the preceding section, and after jointing procedure has commenced, there shall be no movement of the pipe in subsequent operations.

E. Take care to place sand under the haunches on either side of the pipe. Lay bell and spigot pipe with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying. Drainage and sewerage pipe shall be laid uphill commencing at the lowest invert elevation. Grade the pipeline in straight lines, taking care to avoid the formation of any dips or low points. Wood support blocking will not be permitted. Lay pipe so that the


full length of each section of pipe and each fitting will rest solidly on the pipe bedding; excavate recesses to accommodate bells, joints and couplings.

F. Before the Contractor leaves the work at any time, the pipe shall be securely closed at its open end. After the work is completed, the pipe shall be carefully and thoroughly cleaned of all refuse, earth or any objectionable material.

3.03 STRUCTURES AND APPURTENANCES

A. Structures and appurtenances shall be installed at the locations and to the lines and dimensions and/or as herein specified.

B. Valves shall be set plumb and valve boxes shall be centered over valve stems.

C. Connections in manholes shall be constructed with concrete channels directed toward the outlet pipe or as indicated on the plans.

D. Penetrations into manholes, vaults and building walls shall be by preformed breakout or coredrill holes. Breakout or coredrill holes in concrete structures shall be grouted all around to prevent groundwater infiltration.


County Office of Education – 16273.000 Section 33 40 00 - Page 1Calaveras Head Start Building Storm Drainage Utilities

SECTION 33 40 00

STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

1.00 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


1. Storm drain pipe and appurtenances.

2. Concrete inlet and outlet structures, manholes, and miscellaneous drainage structures.


1. Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting: Section 31 23 33.

2. Piped Utilities: Section 33 00 00.


A. Reference Standards: Applicable provisions of the following govern the work of this Section.

1. American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), M36.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):a. A74: Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

b. A615: Deformed and Plan Billet-Steel Bars for Reinforcement.

c. B32: Solder Metal.

d. C76: Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe.

e. C150: Portland Cement.

f. C478: Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections.

g. C700: Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength and Perforated.

h. D3030: Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.


3. California Department of Transportation (CDT), Standard Specifications: Sections 51, 52, 55, 66, 70, 72, 75 and 90.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following:

1. Submit product data for drainage piping specialties.

2. Submit shop drawings for pre-cast concrete storm drainage manholes, catch basins, and cleanout boxes, including frames, covers, and grates.

2.00 PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (RCP)

A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76 with tongue-and-groove or bell-and-spigot joints. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, reinforced concrete pipe shall be of Class shown on the Drawings, 1350-D pipe. Joint grout shall conform to Section 65 of CDT Standard Specifications.

2.02 ASBESTOS-CEMENT PIPE (ACP)

A. Asbestos-cement storm drain pipe: Asbestos-Cement pipe is NOT allowed on this project.

2.03 CAST IRON PIPE (CIP)

A. Cast Iron Pipe and fittings: ASTM C74. Joints shall be rubber-gasket bell-and-spigot type.

2.04 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (PVC)

A. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings: ASTM D3034, SDR 35 with bell-and-spigot type rubber-gasket joints.

2.05 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE (VCP)

A. Vitrified clay pipe fittings: ASTM C700, extra strength.

2.06 MANHOLES AND CATCH BASINS

A. Precast drainage structures: Section 70-1.02H of the CDT Standard Specifications and ASTM C478 and of size and shape indicated. Equivalent cast-in-place structures may be used at Contractor's option.

B. Frames and covers: Cast iron conforming to Section 55-2.03 and 75.1.02 of the CDT Standard Specifications. Manhole covers shall have 24" clear opening with the words STORM SEWER in letters not less than 2" high cast into the cover (except where grated covers are shown on the Drawings).


C. Grates for catch basins shall have reticulin bars suitable for use in area with bicycle and pedestrian traffic, ½" maximum gaps perpendicular to flow of traffic.

2.07 FILTER FABRIC

A. One of the following:

1. Mirafi 140N.2. Typar 4 oz.3. True Tex MG-100.4. Bidim C-22.

2.08 PAINT

A. For exterior galvanized metal:

1. First coat: Zinc dust, zinc oxide primer house and trim paint.

2. Second coat: Type and color to match existing building walls and/or trim where applicable.

B. For exterior ungalvanized metal:

1. First coat: Rust Block primer.

2. Second coat: House and trim paint, type and color to match existing building walls and/or trim where applicable.

2.09 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

A. Concrete: Class A concrete conforming to Section 90 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

B. Cement: Type II cement conforming to ASTM Designation C150 as modified by Section 90 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

C. Aggregate: ¾" maximum size conforming to Section 90 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

D. Water: Clear and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances.

E. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, intermediate grade, and deformed in accordance with Section 52 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

F. No admixtures will be allowed without Owner's Representative approval.

3.00 EXECUTION



A. Install in conformance with Section 33 00 00, Piped Utilities.

3.02 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

A. Mix concrete in accordance with standards for class B concrete per Section 90 of the CDT Standard Specifications.

B. Construction of concrete structures shall conform to applicable provisions of Section 51 of the CDT Standard Specifications. Unless noted otherwise in these Specifications, exposed surfaces of structure shall have Class 1 surface finish.

C. Curing shall conform to applicable portions in Section 90 of the CDT Standard Specifications. No pigment shall be used in curing compounds.

D. Work is subject to inspection. No concrete shall be placed until the Owner's designated representative has approved the forms and reinforcement.
